2014 Lancia Thema Owner's Manual

ENGLISH

Owner Handbook

The data contained in this publication is intended merely as a guide. Lancia reserves the right to modify the models and versions described in this booklet at any time for technical and commercial reasons. If you have any further questions please consult your Lancia dealer. Printed in recycled paper without chlorine. WHY CHOOSE GENUINE PARTS

We really know your car because we invented, designed and built it: we know every single detail. At Lancia Service authorised workshops you can find technicians who are trained by us, offering quality and professionalism for all your service requirements. Lancia workshops are always close to you for your servicing operations, repairs and seasonal checks and our experts will offer practical recommendations for keeping your car in the best possible condition. When you use Genuine Parts you keep the reliability, comfort and performance features of your new car over time. Always ask for Genuine Parts and insist on them being fitted to your car. We recommend them because we know they are derived from our continued commitment to research and development and our use of highly innovative technologies. For these reasons, you can rely on Genuine Parts because they are the only ones designed specifically for your car.

All our Genuine Parts undergo rigorous testing, both in design and build stages, by specialists who check the use of cutting-edge materials and test their reliability. This guarantees performance and safety in the long term for both you and the passengers in your automobile. Always insist on a Genuine Part and check that it has been used. Dear Customer, Thank you for choosing LANCIA and congratulations on your choice of a LANCIA Thema. We have written this handbook to help you get to know all your car and use it in the best possible way. You should read it right through before taking to the road for the first time. You will find information, tips and important warnings regarding the driving of your car to help you get the most from the technological features of your LANCIA. Carefully read the warnings and indications. The enclosed Warranty Booklet lists the services that LANCIA offers to its customers: • the Warranty Certificate with terms and conditions for maintaining its validity • the range of additional services available to LANCIA customers. Enjoy the read. Happy motoring!

This Owner Handbook describes all versions of the LANCIA Thema; please consider only the information rel- evant to your version, engine and configuration.

TABLE OF CONTENTS

1 INTRODUCTION ...... 3

2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ...... 9

3 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ...... 63

4 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ...... 155

5 STARTING AND OPERATING ...... 193

6 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES ...... 251

7 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE ...... 267

8 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES ...... 305

9 INDEX ...... 313

1 2 1

INTRODUCTION

• INTRODUCTION ...... 4 • IMPORTANT NOTICE...... 4 • HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL ...... 6 • WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS ...... 7 • VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER ...... 7 • VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS ...... 7

3 INTRODUCTION Operating this vehicle at excessive IMPORTANT NOTICE speeds or while intoxicated may result Congratulations on selecting your in loss of control, collision with other ALL MATERIAL CONTAINED IN new LANCIA vehicle. Be assured that vehicles or objects, going off the road, THIS PUBLICATION IS BASED ON it represents precision workmanship, or overturning; any of which may lead THE LATEST INFORMATION distinctive styling, and high quality - to serious injury or death. Also, failure AVAILABLE AT TIME OF PUBLI- all essentials that are traditional to to use seat belts subjects the driver CATION APPROVAL. THE RIGHT our vehicles. and passengers to a greater risk of IS RESERVED TO PUBLISH REVI- SIONS AT ANY TIME. Before you start to drive this vehicle, injury or death. read this Owner's Manual and all the To keep your vehicle running at its This Owner's Manual has been pre- supplements. Be sure you are familiar best, have your vehicle serviced at pared with the assistance of service with all vehicle controls, particularly recommended intervals by an autho- and engineering specialists to ac- those used for braking, steering, and rized dealer who has the qualified per- quaint you with the operation and transmission shifting. Learn how your sonnel, special tools, and equipment maintenance of your new vehicle. It is vehicle handles on different road sur- to perform all service. supplemented by a Warranty Infor- faces. Your driving skills will improve mation Booklet and various with experience, but as in driving any The manufacturer and its distributors customer-oriented documents. You vehicle, take it easy as you begin. Al- are vitally interested in your complete are urged to read these publications ways observe local laws wherever you satisfaction with this vehicle. If you carefully. Following the instructions drive. encounter a service or warranty prob- and recommendations in this Owner's lem, which is not resolved to your Manual will help assure safe and en- NOTE: After reviewing the owner satisfaction, discuss the matter with joyable operation of your vehicle. information, it should be stored in your dealer's management. the vehicle for convenient refer- After you have read the Owner’s encing and remain with the vehicle Your authorized dealer will be happy Manual, it should be stored in the when sold. to assist you with any questions about vehicle for convenient reference and your vehicle. remain with the vehicle when sold. Failure to operate this vehicle correctly may result in loss of control or a collision.

4 The manufacturer reserves the right the driving safety of your vehicle will Nor do they cover the cost of any to make changes in design and speci- not be impaired by the attachment or repairs or adjustments that might be fications, and/or to make additions to installation of such parts. Even if such caused or needed because of the in- or improvements in its products with- parts are officially-approved (for ex- stallation or use of non-manufacturer out imposing any obligations upon it- ample, by a general operating permit parts, components, equipment, mate- self to install them on products previ- for the part or by constructing the rials, or additives. Nor do your war- ously manufactured. part in an officially approved design), ranties cover the costs of repairing or if an individual operating permit damage or conditions caused by any The Owner's Manual illustrates and was issued for the vehicle after the changes to your vehicle that do not describes the features that are stan- attachment or installation of such comply with the manufacturers speci- dard or available as extra cost op- parts, it cannot be implicitly assumed fications. tions. Therefore, some of the equip- that the driving safety of your vehicle ment and accessories in this Original parts and accessories and is unimpaired. Therefore, neither ex- publication may not appear on your other products approved by the perts nor official agencies are liable. vehicle. manufacturer, including qualified ad- The manufacturer only assumes re- vice, are available at your authorized NOTE: Be sure to read the Own- sponsibility when parts, which are ex- dealer. er's Manual first before driving pressly authorized or recommended your vehicle and before attaching by the manufacturer, are attached or When it comes to service, remember or installing parts/accessories or installed at an authorized dealer. The that your authorized dealer knows making other modifications to the same applies when modifications to your vehicle best, has the factory- vehicle. the original condition are subse- trained technicians and genuine quently made on the manufacturer's parts, and is interested in your satis- In view of the many replacement parts vehicles. faction. and accessories from various manufacturers available on the market, the Your warranties do not cover any part Copyright © FIAT Group Automo- manufacturer cannot be certain that that the manufacturer did not supply. biles S.p.A.

5 HOW TO USE THIS Since the specification of your vehicle Consult the following table for a de- MANUAL depends on the items of equipment scription of the symbols that may be ordered, certain descriptions and il- used on your vehicle or throughout Consult the Table of Contents to de- lustrations may differ from your vehi- this Owner's Manual: termine which section contains the in- cle's equipment. formation you desire. The detailed index at the back of this Owner's Manual contains a complete listing of all subjects.

6 WARNINGS AND VEHICLE CAUTIONS MODIFICATIONS/ This Owners Manual contains ALTERATIONS WARNINGS against operating procedures that could result in a collision or WARNING! bodily injury. It also contains CAU- TIONS against procedures that could Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle could seriously affect its result in damage to your vehicle. If VIN Location you do not read this entire Owners roadworthiness and safety and may Manual, you may miss important in- lead to a collision resulting in seri- formation. Observe all Warnings and ous injury or death. Cautions. VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER VIN Location The vehicle identification number (VIN) is on the left front corner of the instrument panel. The VIN is visible from outside of the vehicle through the windshield. The VIN is also located on the right front strut tower inside the engine compartment and printed on a label that is affixed to the left rear C-Pillar. VIN Location

7 8 2

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

• A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS ...... 12 • KEYLESS IGNITION NODE (KIN) ...... 12 • KEYFOB...... 12 • IGNITION OR ACCESSORY ON MESSAGE .....13 • SENTRY KEY® ...... 14 • REPLACEMENT KEYS ...... 14 • CUSTOMER KEY PROGRAMMING ...... 14 • GENERAL INFORMATION ...... 14 • VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM ...... 15 • REARMING OF THE SYSTEM ...... 15 • TOARMTHESYSTEM...... 15 • TODISARMTHESYSTEM...... 15 • PREMIUM SECURITY SYSTEM (for versions/ markets, where provided) ...... 16 • TOARMTHESYSTEM...... 16 • TODISARMTHESYSTEM...... 17 • SECURITY SYSTEM MANUAL OVERRIDE.....18 • ILLUMINATED ENTRY (for versions/markets, where provided) ...... 18 • REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY (RKE) ...... 18

9 • TO UNLOCK THE DOORS ...... 18 • TO LOCK THE DOORS...... 19 • TO UNLATCH THE TRUNK ...... 19 • TRANSMITTER BATTERY REPLACEMENT . . .19 • GENERAL INFORMATION ...... 20 • DOOR LOCKS ...... 20 • MANUAL DOOR LOCKS ...... 20 • POWER DOOR LOCKS ...... 21 • CHILD-PROTECTION DOOR LOCK SYSTEM — REAR DOORS ...... 22 • KEYLESS ENTER-N-GO™ ...... 23 • WINDOWS ...... 25 • POWER WINDOWS ...... 25 • WINDBUFFETING...... 27 • TRUNK LOCK AND RELEASE ...... 27 • TRUNK SAFETY WARNING ...... 28 • TRUNK EMERGENCY RELEASE ...... 28 • OCCUPANT RESTRAINTS ...... 28 • LAP/SHOULDER BELTS ...... 31 • LAP/SHOULDER BELT UNTWISTING PROCEDURE ...... 33 • SEAT BELTS IN PASSENGER SEATING POSITIONS...... 34 • AUTOMATIC LOCKING RETRACTOR MODE (ALR) ...... 34 • ENERGY MANAGEMENT FEATURE ...... 35 • SEAT BELT PRETENSIONERS ...... 35

10 • ACTIVE HOOD SYSTEM (for versions/markets, where provided) ...... 35 • ENHANCED SEAT BELT USE REMINDER SYSTEM (BeltAlert®) ...... 37 • SEAT BELTS AND PREGNANT WOMEN...... 38 • SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) — AIR BAGS ...... 38 • AIR BAG DEPLOYMENT SENSORS AND CONTROLS ...... 41 • EVENT DATA RECORDER (EDR) ...... 46 • CHILD RESTRAINTS ...... 47 • ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS ...... 58 • ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS FOR DIESEL ENGINE ...... 59 • SAFETYTIPS...... 59 • TRANSPORTING PASSENGERS ...... 59 • EXHAUST GAS...... 59 • SAFETY CHECKS YOU SHOULD MAKE INSIDE THE VEHICLE ...... 60 • PERIODIC SAFETY CHECKS YOU SHOULD MAKE OUTSIDE THE VEHICLE ...... 61

11 A WORD ABOUT YOUR are LOCK/OFF, ACC, and ON/RUN. KEY FOB KEYS The fourth position is START. During start RUN will illuminate. The Key Fob also contains the Remote Your vehicle uses a keyless ignition Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter and NOTE: In case the ignition switch system. This system consists of a Key an emergency key, which stores in the does not change with the push of a Fob with Remote Keyless Entry rear of the Key Fob. button, the RKE transmitter (Key (RKE) transmitter and a Keyless Ig- The emergency key allows for entry Fob) may have a low or dead bat- nition Node (KIN). into the vehicle should the battery in tery. In this situation a back up the vehicle or the Key Fob go dead. Keyless Enter-N-Go™ Feature method can be used to operate the The emergency key is also for locking ignition switch. Put the nose side This vehicle is equipped with the Key- the glove box. You can keep the emer- (side opposite of the emergency less Enter-N-Go™ feature, (refer to gency key with you when valet park- key) of the Key Fob against the "Keyless Enter-N-Go™" in "Things ing. ENGINE START/STOP button and To Know Before Starting Your Ve- push to operate the ignition To remove the emergency key, slide hicle" for further information). switch. the mechanical latch on the back of KEYLESS IGNITION NODE the Key Fob sideways with your (KIN) thumb and then pull the key out with your other hand. This feature allows the driver to operate the ignition switch with the push of a button, as long as the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter is in the passenger compartment. The Keyless Ignition Node (KIN) has Keyless Ignition Node (KIN) four operating positions, three of 1 — LOCK/OFF which are labeled and will illuminate 2 — ACC (ACCESSORY) when in position. The three positions 3 — ON/RUN Mechanical Latch On The Back Of The Key Fob

12 for up to 10 minutes after the igni- WARNING! (Continued) tion is cycled to the OFF position. Opening either front door will can- • Do not leave the Key Fob in or cel this feature. The time for this near the vehicle, or in a location feature is programmable. Refer to accessible to children, and do not “Uconnect® Settings” in “Under- leave the ignition of a vehicle standing Your Instrument Panel” equipped with Keyless Enter-N- for further information. Go™ in the ACC or ON/RUN Emergency Key Removal mode. A child could operate power windows, other controls, or NOTE: You can insert the WARNING! move the vehicle. double-sided emergency key into • When leaving the vehicle, always the lock cylinders with either side • Do not leave children or animals remove the Key Fob from the ve- up. inside parked vehicles in hot hicle and lock your vehicle. weather. Interior heat build-up IGNITION OR ACCESSORY • Never leave children alone in a may cause serious injury or ON MESSAGE vehicle, or with access to an un- death. locked vehicle. Opening the driver's door when the • Allowing children to be in a ve- ignition is in ACC or ON (engine not hicle unattended is dangerous for CAUTION! running), a chime will sound to re- a number of reasons. A child or An unlocked car is an invitation to mind you to cycle the ignition to OFF. others could be seriously or fa- thieves. Always remove the Key In addition to the chime, the ignition tally injured. Children should be Fob from vehicle, cycle the ignition or accessory on message will display warned not to touch the parking OFF and lock all doors when leav- in the cluster. brake, brake pedal or the shift ing the vehicle unattended. NOTE: With the Uconnect® sys- lever. tem, the power window switches, (Continued) radio, power sunroof (for versions/ markets, where provided), and power outlets will remain active

13 If the Vehicle Security Light turns on SENTRY KEY® CAUTION! (Continued) during normal vehicle operation (ve- The Sentry Key® Immobilizer System hicle running for longer than 10 sec- • For vehicles equipped with Key- prevents unauthorized vehicle opera- onds), it indicates that there is a fault less Enter-N-Go™, always re- tion by disabling the engine. The sys- in the electronics. Should this occur, member to place the ignition in tem does not need to be armed or have the vehicle serviced as soon as the OFF position. activated. Operation is automatic, re- possible by an authorized dealer. gardless of whether the vehicle is Duplication of Key Fobs may be per- locked or unlocked. All of the Key Fobs provided with formed at an authorized dealer, this your new vehicle have been pro- procedure consists of programming a The system uses a Key Fob with Re- grammed to the vehicle electronics. blank Key Fob to the vehicle electron- mote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmit- ics. A blank Key Fob is one that has ter, a Keyless Ignition Node (KIN) and REPLACEMENT KEYS never been programmed. a RF receiver to prevent unauthorized NOTE: Only Key Fobs that are vehicle operation. Therefore, only NOTE: When having the Sentry programmed to the vehicle elec- Key Fobs that are programmed to the Key® Immobilizer System ser- tronics can be used to start and vehicle can be used to start and oper- viced, bring all vehicle Key Fobs operate the vehicle. Once a Key ate the vehicle. with you to the authorized dealer. Fob is programmed to a vehicle, it After placing the ignition in the ON/ cannot be programmed to any CUSTOMER KEY RUN position, the Vehicle Security other vehicle. PROGRAMMING Light will turn on for three seconds Programming Key Fobs or RKE for a bulb check. If the light remains CAUTION! transmitters may be performed at an on after the bulb check, it indicates authorized dealer. that there is a problem with the elec- • Always remove the Key Fobs tronics. This condition will result in from the vehicle and lock all GENERAL INFORMATION the engine being shut off after two doors when leaving the vehicle seconds. unattended. The Sentry Key® operates on a carrier frequency of 433.92 MHz. The (Continued) Sentry Key® Immobilizer system will be used in the following European

14 countries, which apply Directive triggers the alarm, the Vehicle Secu- 2. Perform one of the following 1999/5/EC: Austria, Belgium, Czech rity Alarm will provide the following methods to lock the vehicle: Republic, Denmark, Finland, France, audible and visible signals: the horn •Press LOCK on the interior power Germany, Greece, Hungary, Ireland, will pulse, the park lamps and/or turn door lock switch with the driver Italy, Luxembourg, Netherlands, Nor- signals will flash, and the Vehicle Se- and/or passenger door open. way, Poland, Portugal, Romania, curity Light in the instrument cluster Russian Federation, Slovenia, Croa- will flash. •Press the LOCK button on the exte- tia, Spain, Sweden, Switzerland, and rior Passive Entry Door Handle with a United Kingdom. REARMING OF THE valid Key Fob available in the same SYSTEM exterior zone (refer to "Keyless Enter- Operation is subject to the following N-Go™" in "Things To Know Before If something triggers the alarm, and conditions: Starting Your Vehicle" for further in- no action is taken to disarm it, the • This device may not cause harmful formation). Vehicle Security Alarm will turn off interference. the horn after 29 seconds, and turn off • Press the LOCK button on the Re- • This device must accept any inter- all of the visual signals after an addi- mote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmit- ference that may be received, in- tional 31 seconds, then the Vehicle ter. cluding interference that may cause Security Alarm will rearm itself. 3. If any doors are open, close them. undesired operation. TO ARM THE SYSTEM TO DISARM THE SYSTEM VEHICLE SECURITY Follow these steps to arm the Vehicle The Vehicle Security Alarm can be ALARM Security Alarm: disarmed using any of the following The Vehicle Security Alarm monitors 1. Make sure the vehicle ignition sys- methods: the vehicle doors, hood and trunk for tem is "OFF". (refer to "Starting Pro- • Press the UNLOCK button on the unauthorized entry and the Keyless cedures" in "Starting And Operating" Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) Enter-N-Go™ Start/Stop button for for further information). transmitter. unauthorized operation. While the Vehicle Security Alarm is armed, inte- • Grasp the Passive Entry Unlock rior switches for door locks and deck- Door Handle (refer to "Keyless lid release are disabled. If something Enter-N-Go™" in "Things To 15 Know Before Starting Your Ve- If the Vehicle Security Alarm is armed the turn signal and side repeater lights hicle" for further information). and the battery becomes discon- will flash for 29 seconds, and then the nected, the Vehicle Security Alarm lights will continue to flash for an • Cycle the vehicle ignition system will remain armed when the battery is additional 5 seconds. The system will out of the OFF position by pressing reconnected; the exterior lights will repeat this sequence for up to 8 secu- the Keyless Enter-N-Go™ Start/ flash, the horn will sound. If this oc- rity violations in any mode (door ajar, Stop button (requires at least one curs, disarm the Vehicle Security motion, hood ajar, etc.) before having valid Key Fob in the vehicle). Alarm. to rearm the system. At the end of any NOTE: particular trigger event, the lights will • The driver's door key cylinder PREMIUM SECURITY continue to flash for 26 seconds. and the trunk button on the RKE SYSTEM (for TO ARM THE SYSTEM transmitter cannot arm or dis- versions/markets, where arm the Vehicle Security Alarm. Follow these steps to arm the theft provided) alarm: • When the Vehicle Security Alarm is armed, the interior The Premium Security system moni- 1. Make sure the vehicle ignition sys- power door lock switches will tors the doors, hood latch, and trunk tem is "OFF". (refer to "Starting Pro- not unlock the doors. for unauthorized entry and the igni- cedures" in "Starting And Driving" tion switch for unauthorized opera- for further information). The Vehicle Security Alarm is de- tion. The system also includes a dual 2. Perform one of the following signed to protect your vehicle; how- function intrusion sensor and vehicle methods to lock the vehicle: ever, you can create conditions where tilt sensor. The intrusion sensor moni- • Press LOCK on the interior power the system will give you a false alarm. tors the vehicle interior for motion. door lock switch with the driver If one of the previously described The vehicle tilt sensor monitors the and/or passenger door open. arming sequences has occurred, the vehicle for any tilting actions (tow Vehicle Security Alarm will arm re- away, tire removal, ferry transport, • Press the LOCK button on the exte- gardless of whether you are in the etc). rior Passive Entry Door Handle with a vehicle or not. If you remain in the valid Key Fob available in the same vehicle and open a door, the alarm In the event that something triggers exterior zone (refer to "Keyless Enter- will sound. If this occurs, disarm the the security system, the headlights N-Go™" in "Knowing Your Vehicle" Vehicle Security Alarm. will turn on, the alarm will sound and for further information). 16 • Press the LOCK button on the Re- TO DISARM THE SYSTEM • When the Vehicle Security mote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmit- Alarm is armed, the interior The Vehicle Security Alarm can be ter. power door lock switches will disarmed using any of the following not unlock the doors. 3. If any doors are open, close them. methods: The Vehicle Security Alarm is de- NOTE: • Press the UNLOCK button on the signed to protect your vehicle; how- • Once the security system is Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) ever, you can create conditions where armed, it remains in that state transmitter. the system will give you a false alarm. until you disarm it by following • Grasp the Passive Entry Unlock If one of the previously described either of the disarming proce- Door Handle with a valid key fob arming sequences has occurred, the dures described. If a power loss available in the same exterior zone Vehicle Security Alarm will arm re- occurs after arming the system, (refer to "Keyless Enter-N-Go™" gardless of whether you are in the you must disarm the system after in "Knowing Your Vehicle" for fur- vehicle or not. If you remain in the restoring power to prevent ther information). vehicle and open a door, the alarm alarm activation. will sound. If this occurs, disarm the • Cycle the vehicle ignition system Vehicle Security Alarm. • The ultrasonic intrusion sensor out of the OFF position by pressing (motion detector) actively moni- the Keyless Enter-N-Go™ Start/ If the Vehicle Security Alarm is armed tors your vehicle every time you Stop button (requires at least one and the battery becomes discon- arm the security system. If you valid Key Fob in the vehicle). nected, the Vehicle Security Alarm prefer, you can turn OFF the ul- will remain armed when the battery is NOTE: trasonic intrusion sensor and reconnected; the exterior lights will vehicle tilt sensor when arming • The driver's door key cylinder flash, the horn will sound. If this oc- the security system. To do so, and the trunk button on the RKE curs, disarm the Vehicle Security press the LOCK button on the transmitter cannot arm or dis- Alarm. RKE transmitter three times arm the Vehicle Security Alarm. within 5 seconds of arming the system (while the Vehicle Secu- rity Light is flashing rapidly).

17 SECURITY SYSTEM NOTE: MANUAL OVERRIDE • The front courtesy overhead The system will not arm if you lock console and door courtesy lights the doors using the manual door lock will turn on if the dimmer con- plunger. trol is in the "Dome ON" position (extreme top position). ILLUMINATED ENTRY • The Illuminated Entry system (for versions/markets, will not operate if the dimmer Key Fob With RKE Transmitter where provided) control is in the “Dome defeat” TO UNLOCK THE DOORS position (extreme bottom posi- The courtesy lights will turn on when tion). Press and release the UNLOCK but- you use the Remote Keyless Entry ton on the RKE transmitter once to (RKE) transmitter to unlock the REMOTE KEYLESS unlock the driver's door or twice doors or open any door. ENTRY (RKE) within five seconds to unlock all This feature also turns on the ap- doors. The turn signal lights will flash The RKE system allows you to lock or proach lighting in the outside mirrors to acknowledge the unlock signal. unlock the doors or open the trunk (for versions/markets, where pro- The illuminated entry system will also from distances up to approximately vided). Refer to “Mirrors” in “Under- turn on. 20 m using a hand-held Key Fob with standing The Features Of Your Ve- RKE transmitter. The RKE transmit- If the vehicle is equipped with Passive hicle” for further information. ter does not need to be pointed at the Entry, refer to “Keyless Enter-N- The lights will fade to off after ap- vehicle to activate the system. Go™” under “Things To Know Before proximately 30 seconds or they will Starting Your Vehicle” for further in- NOTE: Driving at speeds 8 km/h immediately fade to off once the igni- formation. and above disables the system tion is cycled to the ON/RUN position from responding to all RKE trans- 1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks from the OFF position. mitter buttons for all RKE trans- This feature lets you program the sys- mitters. tem to unlock either the driver's door or all doors on the first press of the

18 UNLOCK button on the RKE trans- TO LOCK THE DOORS NOTE: mitter. To change the current setting, Press and release the LOCK button on • Perchlorate Material — special refer to “Uconnect® Settings” in the RKE transmitter to lock all doors. handling may apply. Batteries “Understanding Your Instrument The turn signal lights will flash to could contain dangerous mate- Panel” for further information. acknowledge the signal. rials. Please dispose of them ac- Flash Headlights With Lock cording to respect for environ- If the vehicle is equipped with Passive ment and local laws. This feature will cause the turn signal Entry, refer to “Keyless Enter-N-Go” lights to flash when the doors are under “Things To Know Before Start- • Do not touch the battery termi- locked or unlocked with the RKE ing Your Vehicle” for further informa- nals that are on the back hous- transmitter. This feature can be tion. ing or the printed circuit board. turned on or turned off. To change the 1. Remove the emergency key by current setting, refer to “Uconnect® TO UNLATCH THE TRUNK sliding the mechanical latch on the Settings” in “Understanding Your In- Press the TRUNK button on the RKE back of the RKE transmitter sideways strument Panel” for further informa- transmitter two times within five sec- with your thumb and then pull the tion. onds to unlatch the trunk. key out with your other hand. Headlight Illumination On If the vehicle is equipped with Passive Approach Entry, refer to “Keyless Enter-N-Go” This feature activates the headlights under “Things To Know Before Start- for up to 90 seconds when the doors ing Your Vehicle” for further informa- are unlocked with the RKE transmit- tion. ter. The time for this feature is pro- TRANSMITTER BATTERY grammable on vehicles equipped REPLACEMENT through Uconnect®. To change the current setting, refer to “Uconnect® The recommended replacement bat- Emergency Key Removal Settings” in “Understanding Your In- tery is one CR2032 battery. strument Panel” for further information.

19 2. Insert the tip of the emergency key 4. To assemble the RKE transmitter If your RKE transmitter fails to oper- or a #2 flat blade screwdriver into the case, snap the two halves together. ate from a normal distance, check for slot and gently pry the two halves of these two conditions: the RKE transmitter apart. Make sure GENERAL INFORMATION 1. A weak battery in the RKE trans- not to damage the seal during re- Transmitter and receivers operate on mitter. The expected life of the battery moval. a carrier frequency of 433.92 MHz as is a minimum of three years. required by EEC regulations. These devices must be certified to conform 2. Closeness to a radio transmitter to specific regulations in each indi- such as a radio station tower, airport vidual country. Two sets of regula- transmitter, and some mobile or CB tions are involved: ETS (European radios. Telecommunication Standard) 300– 220, which most countries use, and DOOR LOCKS German BZT federal regulation MANUAL DOOR LOCKS Separating The RKE Transmitter 225Z125, which is based on ETC Case 300–220 but has additional unique To lock each door, push the door lock 3. Remove the battery by turning the requirements. Other defined require- knob on each door trim panel down- back cover over (battery facing down- ments are noted in ANNEX VI of ward. To unlock the front doors, pull ward) and tapping it lightly on a solid COMMISSION DIRECTIVE 95/56/ the inside door handle to the first de- surface such as a table or similar, then EC. Operation is subject to the follow- tent. To unlock the rear doors, pull the replace the battery. When replacing ing conditions: door lock knob on the door trim panel the battery, match the + sign on the • This device may not cause harmful upward. battery to the + sign on the inside of interference. the battery clip, located on the back • This device must accept any inter- cover. Avoid touching the new battery ference received, including interfer- with your fingers. Skin oils may cause ence that may cause undesired op- battery deterioration. If you touch a eration. battery, clean it with rubbing alcohol.

20 WARNING! (Continued) • Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. • Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or Door Lock Knob others could be seriously or fa- Power Door Lock Switch If the door lock knob is down when tally injured. Children should be The doors can also be locked and un- you shut the door, the door will lock. warned not to touch the parking locked with the Keyless Enter-N-Go Therefore, make sure the Key Fob is brake, brake pedal or the shift (Passive Entry) system. For further not inside the vehicle before closing lever. information, refer to “Keyless Enter- the door. • Do not leave the key fob in or near N-Go” in “Things To Know Before the vehicle, or in a location acces- Starting Your Vehicle”. sible to children, and do not leave WARNING! the ignition of a vehicle equipped If you press the power door lock • For personal security and safety with Keyless Enter-N-Go in the switch while the ignition is in the ACC in the event of an accident, lock ACC or ON/RUN mode. A child or ON/RUN position, and any front the vehicle doors before you drive could operate power windows, door is open, the power locks will not as well as when you park and other controls, or move the ve- operate. This prevents you from acci- leave the vehicle. hicle. dentally locking the Key Fob in the vehicle. Cycling the ignition to the • When leaving the vehicle, always OFF position or closing the door will remove the key fob and lock your POWER DOOR LOCKS allow the locks to operate. If a door is vehicle. A power door lock switch is on each open, and the ignition is in the ACC or front door trim panel. Use this switch (Continued) ON/RUN position, a chime will sound to lock or unlock the doors. as a reminder to remove the Key Fob.

21 Automatic Door Locks Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit Programming When enabled, the door locks will lock automatically when the vehicle's To change the current setting, refer to speed exceeds 24 km/h. The auto “Uconnect® Settings” in “Under- door lock feature can be enabled or standing Your Instrument Panel” for disabled by your authorized dealer further information. per written request of the customer. NOTE: Use the Automatic Unlock Please see your authorized dealer for Doors On Exit feature in accor- service. Child-Protection Door Lock Function dance with local laws. Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit WARNING! CHILD-PROTECTION Avoid trapping anyone in a vehicle The doors will unlock automatically DOOR LOCK SYSTEM — on vehicles with power door locks if: in a collision. Remember that the REAR DOORS rear doors can only be opened from 1. The Automatic Unlock Doors On To provide a safer environment for the outside when the Child- Exit feature is enabled. small children riding in the rear seats, Protection locks are engaged 2. The transmission was in gear and the rear doors are equipped with (locked). the vehicle speed returned to 0 km/h. Child-Protection Door Lock system. NOTE: For emergency exit from 3. The transmission is in NEUTRAL To Engage Or Disengage The the rear seats when the Child- or PARK. Child-Protection Door Lock Protection Door Lock System is System engaged, manually raise the door 4. The driver door is opened. lock knob to the unlocked posi- 1. Open the rear door. 5. The doors were not previously un- tion, roll down the window, and locked. 2. Insert the tip of the emergency key open the door using the outside into the lock and rotate to the LOCK door handle. 6. The vehicle speed is 0 km/h. or UNLOCK position. 3. Repeat steps 1 and 2 for the opposite rear door.

22 KEYLESS ENTER-N- To Unlock From The Driver's Side To Unlock From The Passenger Side GO™ With a valid Passive Entry RKE The Passive Entry system is an en- transmitter within 1.5 m of the driv- With a valid Passive Entry RKE hancement to the vehicle’s Remote er's door handle, grab the front driver transmitter within 1.5 m of the pas- Keyless Entry (RKE) system and a door handle to unlock the driver's senger door handle, grab the front feature of Keyless Enter-N-Go™ . door automatically. The interior door passenger door handle to unlock all This feature allows you to lock and panel lock knob will raise when the four doors automatically. The interior unlock the vehicle’s door(s) without door is unlocked. door panel lock knob will raise when having to press the RKE transmitter the door is unlocked. lock or unlock buttons. NOTE: All doors will unlock NOTE: when the front passenger door • Passive Entry may be pro- handle is grabbed regardless of the grammed ON/OFF; refer to driver’s door unlock preference “Uconnect® Settings” in “Un- setting (“Unlock Driver Door 1st derstanding Your Instrument Press” or “Unlock All Doors 1st Press”). Panel” for further information. Grab The Door Handle To Unlock • If wearing gloves on your hands, NOTE: If “Unlock All Doors 1st Preventing Inadvertent Locking Of or if it has been raining on the Press” is programmed all doors Passive Entry RKE Transmitter In Passive Entry door handle, the will unlock when you grab hold of Vehicle unlock sensitivity can be af- the front driver’s door handle. To To minimize the possibility of unin- fected, resulting in a slower re- select between “Unlock Driver tentionally locking a Passive Entry sponse time. Door 1st Press” and “Unlock All RKE transmitter inside your vehicle, • If the vehicle is unlocked by the Doors 1st Press”, refer to the Passive Entry system is equipped Passive Entry Door Handle and “Uconnect® Settings” in “Under- with an automatic door unlock fea- no door goes ajar within 60 sec- standing Your Instrument Panel” ture which will function if the ignition onds, the vehicle will re-lock for further information. switch is in the OFF position. and if equipped will arm the theft alarm. 23 If one of the vehicle doors is open and • The doors are locked using the the door panel switch is used to lock RKE transmitter the vehicle, once all open doors have • The doors are locked using the been closed the vehicle checks the in- LOCK button on the Passive En- side and outside of the vehicle for any try door handles valid Passive Entry RKE transmitters. If one of the vehicle's Passive Entry • The doors are manually locked RKE transmitters is detected inside using the door lock knobs the vehicle, and no other valid Passive Trunk Passive Entry Button • There is a valid Passive Entry Entry RKE transmitters are detected RKE transmitter outside the ve- NOTE: If you inadvertently leave outside the vehicle, the Passive Entry hicle and within 1.5 m of either your vehicle's Passive Entry RKE System automatically unlocks all ve- Passive Entry door handle transmitter in the trunk and try to hicle doors and chirps the horn three close the deck lid, the deck lid will times (on the third attempt ALL • Three attempts are made to lock automatically unlatch, unless an- doors will lock and the Passive Entry the doors using the door panel other one of the vehicle’s Passive RKE transmitter can be locked in the switch and then close the doors Entry RKE transmitters is outside vehicle). To Enter The Trunk the vehicle and within 1.0 m of the NOTE: The vehicle will only un- deck lid. With a valid Passive Entry RKE lock the doors when the doors are transmitter within 1.0 m of the deck To Lock The Vehicle’s Doors locked using the door panel lid, press the button on the right side switch, a valid Passive Entry RKE With one of the vehicle’s Passive En- of CHMSL, (Center High Mounted transmitter is detected inside the try RKE transmitters within 1.5 m of Stop Light) which is located on the vehicle, and no valid Passive Entry the driver or passenger front door deck lid. RKE transmitter is detected out- handles, press the door handle LOCK side the vehicle. The vehicle will button to lock all four doors. not unlock the doors when any of the following conditions are true:

24 NOTE: • After pressing the door handle LOCK button, you must wait two seconds before you can lock or unlock the doors, using either Passive Entry door handle. This is done to allow you to check if the vehicle is locked by pulling Press The Door Handle Button To Power Window Switches the door handle, without the ve- Lock hicle reacting and unlocking. There are single window controls on Do NOT grab the door handle, when each passenger door trim panel, pressing the door handle lock button. • The Passive Entry system will which operate the passenger door This could unlock the door(s). not operate if the RKE transmit- windows. The window controls will ter battery is dead. operate only when the ignition is in The vehicle doors can also be locked the ACC or ON/RUN position or when by using the RKE transmitter lock Power Accessory Delay is active. button or the lock button located on NOTE: For vehicles equipped the vehicle’s interior door panel. with the Uconnect®, the power window switches will remain ac- WINDOWS tive for up to 10 minutes after the ignition is cycled to the OFF posi- DO NOT Grab The Door Handle POWER WINDOWS tion. Opening either front door will When Locking The window controls on the driver's cancel this feature. The time is door control all the door windows. programmable. Refer to “Uconnect® Settings” in “Under- standing Your Instrument Panel” for further information.

25 WARNING! To stop the window from going all the • Any impact due to rough road way down during the AUTO-down conditions may trigger the auto- Never leave children unattended in operation, pull up on the switch reverse function unexpectedly a vehicle. Do not leave the key fob briefly. during auto-closure. If this hap- in or near the vehicle, and do not pens, pull the switch lightly to AUTO-Up Feature With leave the ignition of a vehicle the first detent and hold to close Anti-Pinch Protection (for equipped with Keyless Enter-N- the window manually. Go™ in the ACC or ON/RUN versions/markets, where mode. Occupants, particularly un- provided) attended children, can become en- Lift the window switch to the second WARNING! trapped by the windows while op- detent, release, and the window will There is no anti-pinch protection erating the power window switches. go up automatically. when the window is almost closed. Such entrapment may result in se- Be sure to clear all objects from the rious injury or death. To stop the window from going all the window before closing. way up during the AUTO-up opera- AUTO-Down Feature tion, push down on the switch briefly. Reset Auto-Up The driver door power window switch To close the window part way, lift the Should the Auto Up feature stop and some model passenger door window switch to the first detent and working, the window may need to be power window switches have an release it when you want the window reset. To reset Auto Up: AUTO-down feature. Press the win- to stop. 1. Make sure the door is fully closed. dow switch to the second detent, re- NOTE: lease, and the window will go down 2. Pull the window switch up to close automatically. • If the window runs into any ob- the window completely and continue stacle during auto-closure, it to hold the switch up for an additional To open the window part way, press will reverse direction and then two seconds after the window is the window switch to the first detent go back down. Remove the ob- closed. and release it when you want the win- stacle and use the window dow to stop. switch again to close the window.

26 3. Push the window switch down TRUNK LOCK AND firmly to the second detent to open the RELEASE window completely and continue to hold the switch down for an additional two seconds after the window is The trunk lid fully open. can be released from inside the Window Lockout Switch vehicle by The window lockout switch on the Window Lockout Switch pressing the driver's door trim panel allows you to WIND BUFFETING TRUNK RE- disable the window controls on the LEASE button rear passenger doors and the rear sun- Wind buffeting can be described as located on the screen (for versions/markets, where the perception of pressure on the ears instrument panel to the left of the provided). To disable the window or a helicopter-type sound in the ears. steering wheel. controls and the rear sunscreen, press Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffet- NOTE: The transmission must be and release the window lockout but- ing with the windows down, or the in PARK before the button will op- ton (setting it in the DOWN position). sunroof (for versions/markets, where erate. To enable the window controls and provided) in certain open or partially the rear sunscreen, press and release open positions. This is a normal oc- The trunk lid can be released from the window lockout button again (set- currence and can be minimized. If the outside the vehicle by pressing the ting it in the UP position). buffeting occurs with the rear win- TRUNK button on the Remote Key- dows open, then open the front and less Entry (RKE) transmitter twice rear windows together to minimize within five seconds or by using the the buffeting. If the buffeting occurs external release switch located on the with the sunroof open, then adjust the underside of the decklid overhang. sunroof opening to minimize the buf- The release feature will function only feting. when the vehicle is in the unlock condition.

27 With the ignition in the ON/RUN po- TRUNK SAFETY sition, the Trunk Open symbol will WARNING display in the instrument cluster indicating that the trunk is open. The odometer display will reappear once WARNING! the trunk is closed. Do not allow children to have ac- With the ignition in the OFF position, cess to the trunk, either by climbing the Trunk Open symbol will display into the trunk from outside, or Trunk Emergency Release until the trunk is closed. through the inside of the vehicle. Always close the trunk lid when OCCUPANT RESTRAINTS Refer to “Keyless Enter-N-Go™” in your vehicle is unattended. Once in “Things To Know Before Starting the trunk, young children may not Some of the most important safety Your Vehicle” for more information be able to escape, even if they en- features in your vehicle are the re- on trunk operation with the Passive tered through the rear seat. If straint systems: Entry feature. trapped in the trunk, children can • Three-point lap and shoulder belts die from suffocation or heat stroke. for the driver and all passengers TRUNK EMERGENCY • Advanced Front Air Bags for driver RELEASE and front passenger As a security measure, a trunk inter- • Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air nal emergency release lever is built Bag into the trunk latching mechanism. In • Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflat- the event of an individual being able Curtains (SABIC) for the locked inside the trunk, the trunk can driver and passengers seated next be simply opened by pulling on the to a window glow-in-the-dark handle attached to the trunk latching mechanism. • Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags

28 • An energy-absorbing steering col- can be used to hold infant and child WARNING! (Continued) umn and steering wheel restraint systems. For more information, refer to ISOFIX — Child Seat • Only use a rearward-facing child • Active Hood System Anchorage System. restraint in a vehicle with a rear • Knee bolsters/blockers for front seat. NOTE: The Advanced Front Air seat occupants Bags have a multistage inflator de- Children that are not big enough to • Front seat belts incorporate preten- sign. This allows the air bag to wear the vehicle seat belt properly sioners that may enhance occupant have different rates of inflation (see section on Child Restraints) protection by managing occupant based on several factors, including should be secured in the rear seat in energy during an impact event the severity and type of collision. child restraints or belt-positioning booster seats. Older children who do • All seat belt systems (except the Here are some simple steps you can not use child restraints or belt- driver’s and front passenger's) in- take to minimize the risk of harm positioning booster seats should ride clude Automatic Locking Retrac- from a deploying air bag: properly buckled up in the rear seat. tors (ALRs), which lock the seat 1. Children 12 years old and un- Never allow children to slide the belt webbing into position by ex- der should always ride buckled up shoulder belt behind them or under tending the belt all the way out and in a rear seat. their arm. then adjusting the belt to the desired length to restrain a child seat You should read the instructions pro- or secure a large item in a seat WARNING! vided with your child restraint to make sure that you are using it prop- • Never place a rear facing infant Please pay close attention to the infor- erly. mation in this section. It tells you how seat in front of an air bag. A de- to use your restraint system properly, ploying Passenger Advanced 2. All occupants should always to keep you and your passengers as Front Air Bag can cause death or wear their lap and shoulder belts safe as possible. serious injury to a child 12 years properly. or younger, including a child in a 3. The driver and front passenger If you will be carrying children too rearward facing infant seat. small for adult-sized seat belts, the seats should be moved back as far seat belts or the ISOFIX feature also (Continued) as practical to allow the Advanced Front Air Bags room to inflate. 29 4. Do not lean against the door or WARNING! WARNING! (Continued) window. If your vehicle has side air bags, and deployment occurs, • Relying on the air bags alone • In a collision, you and your pas- the side air bags will inflate force- could lead to more severe injuries sengers can suffer much greater fully into the space between you in a collision. The air bags work injuries if you are not properly and the door. with your seat belt to restrain you buckled up. You can strike the properly. In some collisions, the interior of your vehicle or other 5. If the air bag system in this ve- air bags won't deploy at all. Al- passengers, or you can be thrown hicle needs to be modified to ac- ways wear your seat belts even out of the vehicle. Always be sure commodate a disabled person, though you have air bags. you and others in your vehicle are contact the Customer Center. • Being too close to the steering buckled up properly. Phone numbers are provided un- wheel or instrument panel during • Being too close to the Supplemen- der (If You Need Assistance). Advanced Front Air Bag deploy- tal Side Air Bag Inflatable Cur- ment could cause serious injury, tain (SABIC) and/or Seat- WARNING! including death. Air bags need Mounted Side Air Bag (SAB) room to inflate. Sit back, com- Infants in rear facing child re- during deployment could cause fortably extending your arms to straints should never ride in the you to be severely injured or reach the steering wheel or in- front seat of a vehicle with a Pas- killed. strument panel. senger Advanced Front Air Bag. An Research has shown that seat belts air bag deployment can cause se- • Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflat- able Curtain (SABIC) and Seat- save lives, and they can reduce the vere injury or death to infants in seriousness of injuries in a collision. that position. Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB) also need room to inflate. Do not Some of the worst injuries happen Buckle up even though you are an lean against the door or window. when people are thrown from the ve- excellent driver, even on short trips. Sit upright in the center of the hicle. Seat belts reduce the possibility Someone on the road may be a poor seat. of ejection and the risk of injury driver and cause a collision that in- caused by striking the inside of the (Continued) cludes you. This can happen far away vehicle. Everyone in a motor vehicle from home or on your own street. should be belted at all times.

30 LAP/SHOULDER BELT LAP/SHOULDER BELTS WARNING! (Continued) OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS All seating positions in your vehicle • Be sure everyone in your vehicle is are equipped with combination lap/ in a seat and using a seat belt 1. Enter the vehicle and close the shoulder belts. properly. door. Sit back and adjust the front seat. The belt webbing retractor is de- • Wearing a seat belt incorrectly is signed to lock during very sudden dangerous. Seat belts are de- 2. The seat belt latch plate is above stops or impacts. This feature allows signed to go around the large the back of your seat. Grasp the latch the shoulder part of the belt to move bones of your body. These are the plate and pull out the belt. Slide the freely with you under normal condi- strongest parts of your body and latch plate up the webbing as far as tions. However, in a collision, the belt can take the forces of a collision necessary to make the belt go around will lock and reduce your risk of strik- the best. your lap. ing the inside of the vehicle or being • Wearing your belt in the wrong thrown out. place could make your injuries in a collision much worse. You might suffer internal injuries, or you WARNING! could even slide out of part of the • It is dangerous to ride in a cargo belt. Follow these instructions to area, inside or outside of a ve- wear your seat belt safely and to hicle. In a collision, people riding keep your passengers safe, too. in these areas are more likely to • Two people should never be Pulling Out The Lap/Shoulder Belt be seriously injured or killed. belted into a single seat belt. Latch Plate • Do not allow people to ride in any People belted together can crash area of your vehicle that is not into one another in a collision, equipped with seats and seat hurting one another badly. Never belts. use a lap/shoulder belt or lap belt for more than one person, no (Continued) matter what their size.

31 3. When the belt is long enough to fit, WARNING! (Continued) insert the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a “click.” • A belt that is worn under your arm is dangerous. Your body could strike the inside surfaces of the vehicle in a collision, increasing head and neck injury. A belt worn under the arm can cause internal injuries. Ribs are not as Removing Slack From Belt strong as shoulder bones. Wear the belt over your shoulder so that WARNING! Inserting Latch Plate Into Buckle your strongest bones will take the • A lap belt worn too high can in- force in a collision. crease the risk of injury in a colli- • A shoulder belt placed behind WARNING! sion. The belt forces won't be at you will not protect you from in- the strong hip and pelvic bones, • A belt that is buckled into the jury during a collision. You are but across your abdomen. Always wrong buckle will not protect you more likely to hit your head in a wear the lap part of your seat belt properly. The lap portion could collision if you do not wear your as low as possible and keep it ride too high on your body, possi- shoulder belt. The lap and shoul- snug. bly causing internal injuries. Al- der belt are meant to be used to- • A twisted belt may not protect ways buckle your belt into the gether. you properly. In a collision, it buckle nearest you. could even cut into you. Be sure 4. Position the lap belt across your • A belt that is too loose will not the belt is straight. If you can't thighs, below your abdomen. To re- protect you properly. In a sudden straighten a belt in your vehicle, move slack in the lap belt portion, pull stop, you could move too far for- take it to your authorized dealer up a bit on the shoulder belt. To ward, increasing the possibility of immediately and have it fixed. injury. Wear your seat belt snug. loosen the lap belt if it is too tight, tilt the latch plate and pull on the lap (Continued) belt. A snug belt reduces the risk of sliding under the belt in a collision.

32 5. Position the shoulder belt on your ADJUSTABLE UPPER In the rear seat, move toward the cen- chest so that it is comfortable and not SHOULDER BELT ANCHORAGE ter of the seat to position the belt away resting on your neck. The retractor In the driver and front passenger from your neck. will withdraw any slack in the belt. seats, the shoulder belt can be ad- LAP/SHOULDER BELT 6. To release the belt, push the red justed upward or downward to posi- UNTWISTING PROCEDURE button on the buckle. The belt will tion the belt away from your neck. automatically retract to its stowed po- Push and fully depress the button Use the following procedure to un- sition. If necessary, slide the latch above the webbing to release the an- twist a twisted lap/shoulder belt: plate down the webbing to allow the chorage, then move it up or down to 1. Position the latch plate as close as belt to retract fully. the position that fits you best. possible to the anchor point. 2. At about 15 to 30 cm above the WARNING! latch plate, grasp and twist the belt A frayed or torn belt could rip apart webbing 180 degrees to create a fold in a collision and leave you with no that begins immediately above the protection. Inspect the belt system latch plate. periodically, checking for cuts, 3. Slide the latch plate upward over frays, or loose parts. Damaged the folded webbing. The folded web- parts must be replaced immedi- Adjusting Upper Shoulder Belt bing must enter the slot at the top of ately. Do not disassemble or modify As a guide, if you are shorter than the latch plate. the system. Seat belt assemblies average you will prefer a lower posi- must be replaced after a collision if 4. Continue to slide the latch plate up tion, and if you are taller than average they have been damaged (i.e., bent until it clears the folded webbing. you will prefer a higher position. retractor, torn webbing, etc.). When you release the anchorage try to move it up and down to make sure that it is locked in position.

33 SEAT BELTS IN If the passenger seating position is that has a belt with this feature. Chil- PASSENGER SEATING equipped with an ALR and is being dren 12 years old and under should POSITIONS used for normal usage: always be properly restrained in the rear seat. Only pull the belt webbing out far The seat belts in the rear passenger enough to comfortably wrap around How To Engage The Automatic seating positions are equipped with the occupant's mid-section so as to Locking Mode Automatic Locking Retractors (ALR) not activate the ALR. If the ALR is which are used to secure a child re- 1. Buckle the combination lap and activated, you will hear a ratcheting straint system. For additional infor- shoulder belt. sound as the belt retracts. Allow the mation, refer to “Installing Child Re- webbing to retract completely in this 2. Grasp the shoulder portion and straints Using The Vehicle Seat Belt” case and then carefully pull out only pull downward until the entire belt is under the “Child Restraints” section. the amount of webbing necessary to extracted. The chart below defines the type of comfortably wrap around the occu- feature for each seating position. 3. Allow the belt to retract. As the pant's mid-section. Slide the latch belt retracts, you will hear a clicking plate into the buckle until you hear a Driver Cen- Pas- sound. This indicates the safety belt is "click." ter senger now in the Automatic Locking Mode. First N/A N/A ALR AUTOMATIC LOCKING How To Disengage The Automatic Row RETRACTOR MODE (ALR) Locking Mode Second ALR ALR ALR In this mode, the shoulder belt is au- Row Unbuckle the combination lap/ tomatically pre-locked. The belt will shoulder belt and allow it to retract • N/A — Not Applicable still retract to remove any slack in the completely to disengage the Auto- shoulder belt. The Automatic Locking • ALR — Automatic Locking Retrac- matic Locking Mode and activate the Mode is available on all passenger- tor vehicle sensitive (emergency) locking seating positions with a combination mode. lap/shoulder belt. Use the Automatic Locking Mode anytime a child safety seat is installed in a seating position

34 WARNING! SEAT BELT ACTIVE HOOD SYSTEM PRETENSIONERS (for versions/markets, • The belt and retractor assembly must be replaced if the seat belt The seat belts for both front seating where provided) assembly Automatic Locking Re- positions are equipped with preten- The Active Hood system is intended to tractor (ALR) feature or any sioning devices that are designed to enhance pedestrian protection by el- other seat belt function is not remove slack from the seat belt in the evating the vehicle’s hood upon an im- working properly when checked event of a collision. These devices may pact with a pedestrian or other object. according to the procedures in the improve the performance of the seat The system is automatically activated Service Manual. belt by assuring that the belt is tight when the vehicle is moving within a • Failure to replace the belt and about the occupant early in a colli- specified vehicle speed range. In order retractor assembly could increase sion. Pretensioners work for all size to detect a range of pedestrians, other the risk of injury in collisions. occupants, including those in child objects that are impacted may result in restraints. an Active Hood deployment. ENERGY MANAGEMENT NOTE: These devices are not a Deployment Sensors And Controls FEATURE substitute for proper seat belt The Occupant Restraint Controller This vehicle has a safety belt system placement by the occupant. The (ORC) determines if deployment of with an Energy Management feature seat belt still must be worn snugly the actuators in a frontal impact is in the front seating positions to help and positioned properly. required. Based on the impact sensors further reduce the risk of injury in the The pretensioners are triggered by the signals, the ORC determines when to event of a head-on collision. Occupant Restraint Controller deploy the actuators. The impact sen- This safety belt system has a retractor (ORC). Like the air bags, the preten- sors are located within the front bum- assembly that is designed to release sioners are single use items. A de- per area. webbing in a controlled manner. This ployed pretensioner or a deployed air feature is designed to help reduce the bag must be replaced immediately. The ORC monitors the readiness of belt force acting on the occupant’s the electronic parts of the Active Hood chest. system whenever the ignition switch is in the START or ON/RUN position. If the key is in the LOCK position, in the

35 ACC position, or not in the ignition, In the event of an Active Hood deploy- The front bumper assembly may af- the Active Hood system is not on and ment, the vehicle should be serviced fect proper operation of the Active the Active Hood will not deploy. by an authorized dealer. The hood Hood system. The front bumper com- The ORC contains a backup power hinges must be serviced and the ac- ponents should be inspected for dam- supply system that may deploy the tuator assemblies replaced to restore age and replaced if necessary in the actuators even if the battery loses system functionality. event of a frontal impact, even if it occurs at a low rate of speed. power or it becomes disconnected Following an Active Hood deploy- prior to deployment. ment, the hood position can be tem- NOTE: After any Active Hood de- Service Active Hood System porarily reset by pushing down at the ployment, the vehicle should be rear edge over the hood hinges as the taken to an authorized dealer im- If the ORC has deployed the Active internal pressure of each actuator is mediately. Hood, or if it detects a malfunction in relieved. The temporary hood reset any part of the system, it turns on the position is intended to improve for- Air Bag Warning Light and it will CAUTION! ward driving visibility over the hood display the “SERVICE ACTIVE until the vehicle can be serviced. The To prevent possible damage, do not HOOD” message in the Electronic Ve- temporary hood reset position will slam the rear of the hood to reset it. hicle Information Center (EVIC), for Press the rear of the hood down versions/markets, where provided. A leave the hood approximately 5 mm until an audible and tactile detent is single chime will sound if the Air Bag above the fender surface. detected (approximately 5 mm Warning Light comes on again after above the fender). This should se- initial startup. It also includes diag- cure both hood hinge reset mecha- nostics that will illuminate the Air Bag nisms. Warning Light if a malfunction is noted that could affect the Active Hood system. The diagnostics also record the nature of the malfunction. If the Air Bag Warning Light is illuminated, or if “SERVICE ACTIVE Service Active Hood Deployment HOOD” appears in the EVIC, see your authorized dealer.

36 ignition is on. If the driver or front WARNING! WARNING! (Continued) seat passenger is unbelted, the Seat • Ignoring the Air Bag Warning • Do not attempt to modify any Belt Reminder Light will turn on and Light in your instrument panel or part of your Active Hood system. remain on until both front seat belts the “SERVICE ACTIVE HOOD” The Active Hood may deploy ac- are fastened. message in the EVIC could mean cidentally or may not function The BeltAlert® warning sequence be- you won’t have the Active Hood properly if modifications are gins after the vehicle speed is over to enhance pedestrian protection. made. Take your vehicle to an 8 km/h, by blinking the Seat Belt If the light does not come on as a authorized dealer for any hood Reminder Light and sounding an in- bulb check when the ignition is service. termittent chime. Once the sequence first turned on, stays on after you • Drivers must be aware of pedes- starts, it will continue for the entire start the vehicle, or if it comes on trians. Always be sure to check duration or until the respective seat- as you drive, see your authorized for pedestrians, animals, other belts are fastened. After the sequence dealer. vehicles, and obstructions. You completes, the Seat Belt Reminder • Modifications to any part of the are responsible for safety and Light remains illuminated until the Active Hood system could cause it must continue to pay attention to respective seat belts are fastened. The to fail when you need it. Do not your surroundings. Failure to do driver should instruct all other occu- modify the components or wiring. so can result in serious injury or pants to fasten their seat belts. If a Do not modify the front bumper, death. front seat belt is unbuckled while vehicle body structure, or add an traveling at speeds greater than aftermarket front bumper or ENHANCED SEAT BELT 8 km/h, BeltAlert® will provide both cover. USE REMINDER SYSTEM audio and visual notification. • It is dangerous to try to repair any (BeltAlert®) part of the Active Hood system The front passenger seat BeltAlert® is yourself. Be sure to tell anyone BeltAlert® is a feature intended to not active when the front passenger who works on your vehicle that it remind the driver and front passenger seat is unoccupied. BeltAlert® may be has an Active Hood system. (for versions/markets, where pro- triggered when an animal or heavy vided with front passenger object is on the front passenger seat or (Continued) BeltAlert®) to fasten their seat belts. when the seat is folded flat (for The feature is active whenever the versions/markets, where provided). It 37 is recommended that pets be re- Pregnant women should wear the lap strained in the rear seat in pet har- part of the belt across the thighs and nesses or pet carriers that are secured as snug across the hips as possible. by seat belts, and cargo is properly Keep the belt low so that it does not stowed. come across the abdomen. That way the strong bones of the hips will take BeltAlert® can be enabled or disabled the force if there is a collision. by your authorized dealer. LANCIA does not recommend deactivating SUPPLEMENTAL BeltAlert®. Advanced Front Air Bag And Knee RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) Bolster Locations NOTE: Although BeltAlert® has — AIR BAGS been deactivated, the Seat Belt Re- 1 — Driver And Passenger Ad- This vehicle has Advanced Front Air minder Light will continue to illu- vanced Front Air Bags Bags for both the driver and front minate while the driver’s or front 2 — Knee Bolster passenger as a supplement to the seat passenger (for versions/markets, 3 — Supplemental Driver Side Knee belt restraint systems. The driver's where provided with BeltAlert®) Air Bag/Knee Bolster Advanced Front Air Bag is mounted seat belt remains unfastened. in the center of the steering wheel. NOTE: The Driver and Front Pas- SEAT BELTS AND The passenger's Advanced Front Air senger Advanced Front Air Bags PREGNANT WOMEN Bag is mounted in the instrument are certified to regulations for Ad- panel, above the glove compartment. vanced Air Bags. We recommend that pregnant women The words SRS AIRBAG are em- use the seat belts throughout their The Advanced Front Air Bags have a bossed on the air bag covers. In addi- multistage inflator design. This allows pregnancy. Keeping the mother safe is tion, the vehicle is equipped with a the best way to keep the baby safe. the air bag to have different rates of Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air inflation based on several factors, in- Bag mounted in the instrument panel cluding the severity and type of colli- below the steering column. sion. This vehicle may be equipped with a driver and/or front passenger seat

38 belt buckle switch that detects • After any accident, the vehicle • Front Seat Belt Pretensioners, Seat whether the driver or front passenger should be taken to an autho- Belt Buckle Switch seat belt is fastened. The seat belt rized dealer immediately. Advanced Front Air Bag Features buckle switch may adjust the inflation Air Bag System Components rate of the Advanced Front Air Bags. The Advanced Front Air Bag system Your vehicle may be equipped with has multistage driver and front pas- This vehicle is equipped with Supple- the following air bag system compo- senger air bags. This system provides mental Side Air Bag Inflatable Cur- nents: output appropriate to the severity and tains (SABIC) to protect the driver, type of collision as determined by the front, and rear passengers sitting next • Occupant Restraint Controller Occupant Restraint Controller to a window. The SABIC air bags are (ORC) (ORC), which may receive informa- located above the side windows and • Air Bag Warning Light tion from the front impact sensors. their covers are also labeled: SRS AIRBAG. • Steering Wheel and Column The first stage inflator is triggered This vehicle is equipped with Supple- • Instrument Panel immediately during an impact that requires air bag deployment. This low mental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags • Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air output is used in less severe collisions. (SAB) to provide enhanced protection Bag for an occupant during a side impact. A higher energy output is used for • Knee Impact Bolsters The Supplemental Seat-Mounted more severe collisions. Side Air Bags are located in the out- • Driver Advanced Front Air Bag board side of the front seats. • Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag WARNING! NOTE: • Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side • No objects should be placed over or near the air bag on the instru- • Air Bag covers may not be obvi- Air Bags (SAB) ment panel, because any such ob- ous in the interior trim, but they • Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflat- jects could cause harm if the ve- will open during air bag deploy- able Curtains (SABIC) hicle is in a collision severe ment. • Front and Side Impact Sensors (for enough to cause the air bag to versions/markets, where provided) inflate. (Continued) 39 The SABIC deploy downward, cover- WARNING! (Continued) ing both windows on the impact side. • Do not put anything on or around the air bag covers or attempt to open them manually. You may damage the air bags and you could be injured because the air bags may no longer be functional. The protective covers for the air Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air bag cushions are designed to open Bag Label only when the air bags are inflat- When the air bag deploys, it opens the Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable ing. seam between the front and side of the Curtains (SABIC) Label Location • Do not drill, cut or tamper with seat’s trim cover. Each air bag deploys NOTE: the knee bolster in any way. independently; a left side impact de- • Air Bag covers may not be obvi- • Do not mount any accessories to ploys the left air bag only and a right- ous in the interior trim, but they the knee bolster such as alarm side impact deploys the right air bag will open during air bag deploy- lights, stereos, citizen band ra- only. dios, etc. ment. Supplemental Side Air Bag • Being too close to the side air Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Inflatable Curtain (SABIC) bags during deployment could Air Bags (SAB) SABIC air bags may offer side-impact cause you to be severely injured Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air protection to front and rear seat out- or killed. Bags (SAB) may provide enhanced board occupants in addition to that protection to help protect an occupant provided by the body structure. Each SAB and SABIC air bags are a supple- during a side impact. The SAB is air bag features inflated chambers ment to the seat belt restraint system. marked with an air bag label sewn placed adjacent to the head of each Occupants, including children who into the outboard side of the front outboard occupant that reduce the po- are up against or very close to SAB or seats. tential for side-impact head injuries. SABIC air bags can be seriously injured or killed. Occupants, especially children, should not lean on or sleep 40 against the door, side windows, or passenger, and position the front oc- WARNING! (Continued) area where the SAB or SABIC air bags cupants for the best interaction with inflate, even if they are in an infant or • Your vehicle is equipped with left the Advanced Front Air Bags. child restraint. Always sit upright as and right Supplemental Side Air Along with seat belts and pretension- possible with your back against the Bag Inflatable Curtain (SABIC), ers, Advanced Front Air Bags and the seat back, use the seat belts properly, do not stack luggage or other Supplemental Driver Knee Air Bag and use the appropriate sized child cargo up high enough to block the work with the knee impact bolsters to restraint, infant restraint or booster location of the SABIC. The area provide improved protection for the seat recommended for the size and where the SABIC is located driver and front passenger. weight of the child. should remain free from any obstructions. The system includes side impact sen- AIR BAG DEPLOYMENT sors that are calibrated to deploy the • Do not use accessory seat covers SENSORS AND CONTROLS side air bags during impacts that re- or place objects between you and Occupant Restraint Controller quire air bag occupant protection. the side air bags; the performance could be adversely affected (ORC) and/or objects could be pushed The ORC is part of a regulated safety WARNING! into you, causing serious injury. system required for this vehicle. • Your vehicle is equipped with SABIC air bags, do not have any Supplemental Driver Side Knee The ORC determines if deployment of accessory items installed which Air Bag the front and/or side air bags in a will alter the roof, including add- The Supplemental Driver Side Knee frontal or side collision is required. ing a sunroof to your vehicle. Do Air Bag provides enhanced protection Based on the impact sensor's signals, not add roof racks that require and works together with the Driver a central electronic ORC deploys the permanent attachments (bolts or Advanced Front Air Bag during a Advanced Front Air Bags, SABIC air screws) for installation on the ve- frontal impact. bags, SAB, Supplemental Driver Side hicle roof. Do not drill into the Knee Air Bag, and front seat belt pre- roof of the vehicle for any reason. Knee Impact Bolsters tensioners, as required, depending on The Knee Impact Bolsters help pro- several factors, including the severity (Continued) tect the knees of the driver and front and type of impact.

41 Advanced Front Air Bags and Supple- Because air bag sensors measure ve- seconds for a self-check when the ig- mental Driver Side Knee Air Bag are hicle deceleration over time, vehicle nition is first turned on. After the self- designed to provide additional protec- speed and damage by themselves are check, the Air Bag Warning Light will tion by supplementing the seat belts not good indicators of whether or not turn off. If the ORC detects a mal- in certain frontal collisions depending an air bag should have deployed. function in any part of the system, it on several factors, including the se- turns on the Air Bag Warning Light, Seat belts are necessary for your pro- verity and type of collision. Advanced either momentarily or continuously. A tection in all collisions, and also are Front Air Bags and Supplemental single chime will sound if the light needed to help keep you in position, Driver Side Knee Air Bag are not ex- comes on again after initial startup. away from an inflating air bag. pected to reduce the risk of injury in It also includes diagnostics that will rear, side, or rollover collisions. The ORC monitors the readiness of illuminate the instrument cluster Air the electronic parts of the air bag sys- The Advanced Front Air Bags and Bag Warning Light if a malfunction is tem whenever the ignition is in the Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air noted that could affect the air bag START or ON/RUN position. If the Bag will not deploy in all frontal col- system. The diagnostics also record ignition is in the OFF position or in lisions, including some that may pro- the nature of the malfunction. the ACC position, the air bag system is duce substantial vehicle damage — not on and the air bags will not infor example, some pole collisions, flate. WARNING! truck underrides, and angle offset collisions. On the other hand, depending The ORC contains a backup power Ignoring the Air Bag Warning Light on the type and location of impact, supply system that may deploy the air in your instrument panel could Advanced Front Air Bags may deploy bags even if the battery loses power or mean you won't have the air bags to in crashes with little vehicle front-end it becomes disconnected prior to de- protect you in a collision. If the light damage but that produce a severe ini- ployment. does not come on as a bulb check tial deceleration. when the ignition is first turned on, Also, the ORC turns on the stays on after you start the vehicle, The side air bags will not deploy in all Air Bag Warning Light in or if it comes on as you drive, have side collisions. Side air bag deploy- the instrument panel for an authorized dealer service the air ment will depend on the severity and approximately four to eight bag system immediately. type of collision.

42 Driver And Passenger Advanced sides of the air bag. In this way, the air Based on the severity and type of col- Front Air Bag Inflator Units bags do not interfere with your con- lision, the side air bag inflator on the The Driver and Passenger Advanced trol of the vehicle. crash side of the vehicle may be triggered, releasing a quantity of non- Front Air Bag Inflator Units are lo- Supplemental Driver Side Knee toxic gas. The inflating SAB exits cated in the center of the steering Air Bag Inflator Unit wheel and on the right side of the through the seat seam into the space The Supplemental Driver Side Knee instrument panel. When the ORC de- between the occupant and the door. Air Bag unit is located in the instru- tects a collision requiring the Ad- The SAB fully inflates in about 10 ment panel trim beneath the steering vanced Front Air Bags, it signals the milliseconds. The side air bag moves column. When the ORC detects a col- inflator units. A large quantity of non- at a very high speed and with such a lision requiring the Advanced Front toxic gas is generated to inflate the high force that it could injure you if Air Bags, it signals the inflator units. Advanced Front Air Bags. Different you are not seated properly, or if items A large quantity of non-toxic gas is air bag inflation rates are possible, are positioned in the area where the generated to inflate the Supplemental based on several factors, including the side air bag inflates. This especially Driver Side Knee Air Bag. The trim collision type and severity. The steer- applies to children. cover separates and folds out of the ing wheel hub trim cover and the up- Supplemental Side Air Bag way allowing the air bag to inflate to per right side of the instrument panel Inflatable Curtain (SABIC) the full size. The air bag fully inflates separate and fold out of the way as the Inflator Units in about 15 to 20 milliseconds. air bags inflate to their full size. The During collisions where the impact is air bags fully inflate in about 50 to 70 Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side confined to a particular area of the milliseconds. This is about half of the Air Bag (SAB) Inflator Units side of the vehicle, the ORC may de- time it takes to blink your eyes. The The Supplemental Seat-Mounted ploy the SABIC air bags, depending air bags then quickly deflate while Side Air Bags (SAB) are designed to on the severity and type of collision. In helping to restrain the driver and activate only in certain side collisions. these events, the ORC will deploy the front passenger. The ORC determines if a side collision SABIC only on the impact side of the The Advanced Front Air Bag gas is requires the side air bags to inflate, vehicle. vented through the vent holes in the based on the severity and type of col- A quantity of non-toxic gas is gener- lision. ated to inflate the side curtain air bag.

43 The inflating side curtain air bag Enhanced Accident Response If A Deployment Occurs pushes the outside edge of the head- System The Advanced Front Air Bags are de- liner out of the way and covers the In the event of an impact causing air signed to deflate immediately after window. The air bag inflates in about bag deployment, if the communica- deployment. 30 milliseconds (about one-quarter of tion network remains intact, and the the time that it takes to blink your NOTE: Front and/or side air bags power remains intact, depending on eyes) with enough force to injure you will not deploy in all collisions. the nature of the event the ORC will if you are not belted and seated prop- This does not mean something is determine whether to have the En- erly, or if items are positioned in the wrong with the air bag system. hanced Accident Response System area where the side curtain air bag perform the following functions: If you do have a collision, which de- inflates. This especially applies to ploys the air bags, any or all of the children. The side curtain air bag is • Cut off fuel to the engine. following may occur: only about 9 cm thick when it is in- • Flash hazard lights as long as the flated. • The nylon air bag material may battery has power or until the igni- sometimes cause abrasions and/or Because air bag sensors estimate de- tion is cycled off. skin reddening to the driver and celeration over time, vehicle speed • Turn on the interior lights, which front passenger as the air bags de- and damage are not good indicators of remain on as long as the battery has ploy and unfold. The abrasions are whether or not an air bag should have power or until the ignition key is similar to friction rope burns or deployed. removed. those you might get sliding along a Front And Side Impact Sensors carpet or gymnasium floor. They • Unlock the doors automatically. are not caused by contact with In front and side impacts, impact sen- In order to reset the Enhanced Acci- chemicals. They are not permanent sors can aid the ORC in determining dent Response System functions after and normally heal quickly. How- appropriate response to impact an event, the ignition switch must be ever, if you haven't healed signifi- events. changed from IGN ON to IGN OFF. cantly within a few days, or if you have any blistering, see your doctor immediately.

44 • As the air bags deflate, you may see Maintaining Your Air Bag System WARNING! (Continued) some smoke-like particles. The particles are a normal by-product • Do not attempt to modify any of the process that generates the WARNING! part of your air bag system. The non-toxic gas used for air bag infla- • Modifications to any part of the air bag may inflate accidentally tion. These airborne particles may air bag system could cause it to or may not function properly if irritate the skin, eyes, nose, or fail when you need it. You could modifications are made. Take throat. If you have skin or eye irri- be injured if the air bag system is your vehicle to an authorized tation, rinse the area with cool wa- not there to protect you. Do not dealer for any air bag system ser- ter. For nose or throat irritation, modify the components or wiring, vice. If your seat, including your move to fresh air. If the irritation including adding any kind of trim cover and cushion, needs to continues, see your doctor. If these badges or stickers to the steering be serviced in any way (including particles settle on your clothing, wheel hub trim cover or the upper removal or loosening/tightening follow the garment manufacturer's right side of the instrument panel. of seat attachment bolts), take instructions for cleaning. Do not modify the front bumper, the vehicle to your authorized Do not drive your vehicle after the air vehicle body structure, or add af- dealer. Only manufacturer ap- bags have deployed. If you are in- termarket side steps or running proved seat accessories may be volved in another collision, the air bags boards. used. If it is necessary to modify will not be in place to protect you. • It is dangerous to try to repair any the air bag system for persons WARNING! part of the air bag system your- with disabilities, contact your au- self. Be sure to tell anyone who thorized dealer. Deployed air bags and seat belt pre- works on your vehicle that it has tensioners cannot protect you in Air Bag Warning Light another collision. Have the air an air bag system. bags, seat belt pretensioners, and (Continued) the front seat belt retractor assem- You will want to have the blies replaced by an authorized air bags ready to inflate for dealer immediately. Also, have the your protection in a colli- Occupant Restraint Controller Sys- sion. The Air Bag Warning tem serviced as well. Light monitors the internal circuits

45 and interconnecting wiring associated See your authorized dealer if the • How fast the vehicle was traveling. fuse is good. with air bag system electrical compo- These data can help provide a better nents. While the air bag system is EVENT DATA RECORDER understanding of the circumstances in designed to be maintenance free. If which crashes and injuries occur. any of the following occurs, have an (EDR) authorized dealer service the air bag This vehicle is equipped with an event NOTE: EDR data are recorded by system immediately. data recorder (EDR). The main pur- your vehicle only if a non-trivial pose of an EDR is to record, in certain crash situation occurs; no data are • The Air Bag Warning Light does recorded by the EDR under nor- not come on during the four to eight crash or near crash-like situations, such as an air bag deployment or hit- mal driving conditions and no per- seconds when the ignition is first sonal data (e.g., name, gender, age, cycled to the ON/RUN. ting a road obstacle, data that will assist in understanding how a vehi- and crash location) are recorded. • The Air Bag Warning Light remains cle’s systems performed. The EDR is However, other parties, such as on after the four to eight-second designed to record data related to ve- law enforcement, could combine interval. hicle dynamics and safety systems for the EDR data with the type of per- sonally identifying data routinely • The Air Bag Warning Light comes a short period of time, typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR in this ve- acquired during a crash investiga- on intermittently or remains on tion. while driving. hicle is designed to record such data as: To read data recorded by an EDR, NOTE: If the speedometer, ta- special equipment is required, and ac- chometer, or any engine related • How various systems in your vehicle were operating; cess to the vehicle or the EDR is gauges are not working, the Occu- needed. In addition to the vehicle pant Restraint Controller (ORC) • Whether or not the driver and pas- manufacturer, other parties, such as may also be disabled. The air bags senger safety belts were law enforcement, that have the spe- may not be ready to inflate for your buckled/fastened; cial equipment, can read the informa- protection. Promptly check the • How far (if at all) the driver was tion if they have access to the vehicle fuse block for blown fuses. Refer to or the EDR. “Fuses” in “Maintaining Your Ve- depressing the accelerator and/or hicle” for the proper air bag fuses. brake pedal; and,

46 CHILD RESTRAINTS WARNING! There are different sizes and types of restraints for children from newborn Everyone in your vehicle needs to be • “Extreme Hazard! Do not use a size to the child almost large enough buckled up all the time, including ba- rearward-facing child restraint for an adult safety belt. Always check bies and children. on a seat protected by an air bag the child seat Owner's Manual to en- in front of it!” Refer to visor and sure you have the correct seat for your door shut face mounted labels for child. Use the restraint that is correct information. for your child. • In a collision, an unrestrained child, even a tiny baby, can become a projectile inside the vehicle. The force required to hold even an infant on your lap could Children 12 years or younger should become so great that you could ride properly buckled up in a rear not hold the child, no matter how seat, if available. According to crash strong you are. The child and oth- statistics, children are safer when ers could be badly injured. Any properly restrained in the rear seats child riding in your vehicle rather than in the front. should be in a proper restraint for the child's size.

47 Summary Of Recommendations For Restraining Children In Vehicles

Recommended Type of Child Child Size, Height, Weight or Age Restraint Infants and Toddlers Children who are two years old or younger Either an Infant Carrier or a Convertible and who have not reached the height or Child Restraint, facing rearward in the weight limits of their child restraint rear seat of the vehicle Small Children Children who are at least two years old or Forward-Facing Child Restraint with a who have out-grown the height or weight five-point Harness, facing forward in the limit of their rear-facing child restraint rear seat of the vehicle Larger Children Children who have out-grown their Belt Positioning Booster Seat and the ve- forward-facing child restraint, but are too hicle seat belt, seated in the rear seat of the small to properly fit the vehicle’s seat belt vehicle Children Too Large for Children 12 years old or younger, who Vehicle Seat Belt, seated in the rear seat of Child Restraints have out-grown the height or weight limit the vehicle of their booster seat Infants And Child Restraints The infant carrier is only used rearward-facing direction than infant Safety experts recommend that chil- rearward-facing in the vehicle. It is carriers do, so they can be used dren ride rearward-facing in the ve- recommended for children from birth rearward-facing by children who hicle until they are two years old or until they reach the weight or height have outgrown their infant carrier but until they reach either the height or limit of the infant carrier. Convertible are still less than at least two years weight limit of their rear facing child child seats can be used either old. Children should remain safety seat. Two types of child re- rearward-facing or forward-facing in rearward-facing until they reach the straints can be used rearward-facing: the vehicle. Convertible child seats of- highest weight or height allowed by infant carriers and convertible child ten have a higher weight limit in the their convertible child seat. seats.

48 All children whose weight or height is WARNING! WARNING! (Continued) above the forward-facing limit for the • Never place a rear facing infant child seat should use a belt- • When your child restraint is not seat in front of an air bag. A de- positioning booster seat until the ve- in use, secure it in the vehicle with ploying Passenger Advanced hicle’s seat belts fit properly. If the the seat belt or ISOFIX anchor- Front Air Bag can cause death or child cannot sit with knees bent over ages, or remove it from the ve- serious injury to a child 12 years the vehicle’s seat cushion while the hicle. Do not leave it loose in the or younger, including a child in a child’s back is against the seatback, vehicle. In a sudden stop or acci- rearward facing infant seat. they should use a belt-positioning dent, it could strike the occupants • Only use a rearward-facing child booster seat. The child and belt- or seatbacks and cause serious restraint in a vehicle with a rear positioning booster seat are held in personal injury. seat. the vehicle by the seat belt. Children Too Large For Booster Older Children And Child Seats Restraints WARNING! Children who are large enough to Children who are two years old or who • Improper installation can lead to wear the shoulder belt comfortably, have outgrown their rear-facing con- failure of an infant or child re- and whose legs are long enough to vertible child seat can ride forward- straint. It could come loose in a bend over the front of the seat when facing in the vehicle. Forward-facing collision. The child could be their back is against the seatback, child seats and convertible child seats badly injured or killed. Follow should use the seat belt in a rear seat. used in the forward-facing direction the child restraint manufacturer’s Use this simple 5-step test to decide are for children who are over two directions exactly when installing whether the child can use the vehicle’s years old or who have outgrown the an infant or child restraint. seat belt alone: rear-facing weight or height limit of (Continued) 1. Can the child sit all the way back their rear-facing convertible child against the back of the vehicle seat? seat. Children should remain in a forward-facing child seat with a har- 2. Do the child’s knees bend comfort- ness for as long as possible, up to the ably over the front of the vehicle seat – highest weight or height allowed by while they are still sitting all the way the child seat. back? 49 3. Does the shoulder belt cross the 5. Can the child stay seated like this squirming or slouching can move the child’s shoulder between their neck for the whole trip? belt out of position. If the shoulder and arm? belt contacts the face or neck, move If the answer to any of these questions the child closer to the center of the 4. Is the lap part of the belt as low as was “no,” then the child still needs to vehicle. Never allow a child to put the possible, touching the child’s thighs use a booster seat in this vehicle. If the shoulder belt under an arm or behind and not their stomach? child is using the lap/shoulder belt, their back. check belt fit periodically. A child’s

Universal Child Seat Position Chart

Mass Group Seating Position (or other site) Front Rear Rear Center Intermediate Intermediate Passenger Outboard Outboard Center Group up to 10 kg XUUN/AN/A Group 0+ up to 13 kg XUUN/AN/A Group I 9 to 18 kg XUUN/AN/A Group II 15 to 25 kg XUUN/AN/A Group III 22 to 36 kg XUUN/AN/A Key of letters used in the table above: • L = Suitable for particular child • B = Built-in restraint for this mass restraints given on attached list. group. • U = Suitable for “universal” cat- These restraints may be of the “spe- egory restraints approved for use in • X = Seat position not suitable for cific vehicle”, “restricted or “semi- this mass group. children in this mass group. universal” categories. • UF = Suitable for forward-facing “universal” category restraints approved for use in this mass group.

50 ISOFIX Fixture Chart

Vehicle ISOFIX Positions Chart Front Rear Interme- Interme- Mass Size Rear Other Fixture Passen- Outboard diate diate Group Class Center Sites ger Rt./Lt. Outboard Center F ISO/L1 X X X N/A N/A N/A Carrycot G ISO/L2 X X X N/A N/A N/A (1) X N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A 1UF / 0 — up to E ISO/R1 X 1UF N/A N/A N/A 1UF 10 kg (1) X N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A 1UF / E ISO/R1 X 1UF N/A N/A N/A 1UF 1UF / 0+ — up D ISO/R2 X 1UF N/A N/A N/A 1UF to 13 kg 1UF / C ISO/R3 X 1UF N/A N/A N/A 1UF (1) X N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A

51 Vehicle ISOFIX Positions Chart Front Rear Interme- Interme- Mass Size Rear Other Fixture Passen- Outboard diate diate Group Class Center Sites ger Rt./Lt. Outboard Center 1UF / D ISO/R2 X 1UF N/A N/A N/A 1UF 1UF / C ISO/R3 X 1UF N/A N/A N/A 1UF 1UF / I–9to B ISO/F2 X 1UF N/A N/A N/A 1UF 18 kg 1UF / B1 ISO/F2X X 1UF N/A N/A N/A 1UF 1UF / A ISO/F3 X 1UF N/A N/A N/A 1UF (1) X N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A II–15to (1) X N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A 25 kg III–22to (1) X N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A 36 kg Key of letters used in the table above: • 1UF = Suitable for ISOFIX forward CRS are those of the “specific ve- child restraint systems of “univer- hicle”, “restricted” or “semi- • (1) For the CRS which do not carry sal” category approved for use in universal” categories. the ISO/XX size class identification the mass group. (A to G), for the applicable mass • X = ISOFIX position not suitable group, the car manufacturer shall • 1L = suitable for particular ISOFIX for ISOFIX child restraint systems indicate the vehicle specific ISOFIX child restraint systems (CRS) given in this mass group and/or this size child restraint system(s) recom- in the attached list. These ISOFIX class. mended for each position.

52 Recommendations For Attaching Child Restraints

Restraint Type Combined Weight of Use any attachment method shown with an “X” Below the Child + Child ISOFIX – ISOFIX – Seat Belt + Restraint Lower Seat Belt Lower Anchors Top Tether Anchors Only + Top Tether Anchor Only Anchor Rear-Facing Child Restraint Up to 29.5 kg X X Rear-Facing Child Restraint More than 29.5 kg X Forward-Facing Child Restraint Up to 29.5 kg X X Forward-Facing Child Restraint More than 29.5 kg X ISOFIX Restraint System must be used with the top tether an- Your vehicle is equipped with the chorage to install the child restraint. child restraint anchorage system Locating The ISOFIX Anchorages called ISOFIX. The ISOFIX system has three vehicle anchor points for installing ISOFIX-equipped child The lower anchorages are seats. There are two lower anchorages round bars that are found at located at the back of the seat cushion the rear of the seat cushion where it meets the seatback and one where it meets the seatback, ISOFIX Anchorages top tether anchorage located behind below the anchorage symbols on the Locating The ISOFIX Anchorages the seating position. These anchor- seatback. They are just visible when you lean into the rear seat to install ages are used to install ISOFIX- In addition, there are tether equipped child seats without using the child restraint. You will easily feel them if you run your finger along the strap anchorages behind the vehicle’s seat belts. Some seating each rear seating position positions may have a top tether an- gap between the seatback and seat cushion. located in the panel be- chorage but no lower anchorages. In tween the rear seatback and the rear these seating positions, the seat belt

53 window. These tether strap anchor- Center Seat ISOFIX To Install An ISOFIX-compatible ages are under a plastic cover with the Child Restraint If a child restraint installed in the tether anchorage symbol on it. center position blocks the seat belt 1. If the selected seating position has webbing or buckle for the outboard a Switchable Automatic Locking Re- position, do not use that outboard po- tractor (ALR) seat belt, stow the seat sition. If a child seat in the center belt, following the instructions below. position blocks the outboard ISOFIX See the section “Installing Child Re- anchors or seat belt, do not install a straints Using the Vehicle Seat Belt” child seat in that outboard position. to check what type of seat belt each seating position has.

Tether Strap Anchorages WARNING! 2. Loosen the adjusters on the lower ISOFIX child restraint systems will be Never use the same lower anchor- connectors and on the tether strap of equipped with a rigid bar on each age to attach more than one child the child seat so that you can more side. Each will have a hook or connec- restraint. Please refer to “To Install easily attach the connectors to the ve- tor to attach to the lower anchorage a ISOFIX-Compatible Child Re- hicle anchorages. and a way to tighten the connection to straint” for typical installation in- 3. Place the child seat between the the anchorage. Forward-facing child structions. lower anchorages for that seating po- restraints and some rear-facing infant sition. For some second row seats, you Always follow the directions of the restraints may also be equipped with may need to recline the seat and / or child restraint manufacturer when in- a tether strap. The tether strap will raise the head restraint to get a better stalling your child restraint. Not all have a hook at the end to attach to the fit. If the rear seat can be moved for- child restraint systems will be in- top tether anchorage and a way to ward and rearward in the vehicle, you stalled as described here. tighten the strap after it is attached to may wish to move it to its rear-most the anchorage. position to make room for the child seat. You may also move the front seat forward to allow more room for the car seat.

54 4. Attach the connectors of the child WARNING! Remind all children in the vehicle that restraint to the lower anchorages in the seat belts are not toys and that the selected seating position. Child restraint anchorages are de- they should not play with them. signed to withstand only those 5. If the child restraint has a tether loads imposed by correctly-fitted strap, connect it to the top tether an- child restraints. Under no circum- WARNING! chorage. See the section “Installing stances are they to be used for adult Improper installation of a child re- Child Restraints Using the Top Tether seat belts, harnesses, or for attach- straint to the ISOFIX anchorages Anchorage” for directions to attach a ing other items or equipment to the can lead to failure of an infant or tether anchor. vehicle. child restraint. The child could be 6. Tighten all of the straps as you badly injured or killed. Follow the How To Stow An Unused ALR push the child restraint rearward and manufacturer's directions exactly Seatbelt downward into the seat. Remove when installing an infant or child slack in the straps according to the When using the ISOFIX attaching restraint. child restraint manufacturer’s in- system to install a child restraint, stow Installing Child Restraints Using structions. all ALR seat belts that are not being used by other occupants or being used The Vehicle Seat Belt 7. Test that the child restraint is in- to secure child restraints. An unused The seat belts in the passenger seating stalled tightly by pulling back and belt could injure a child if they play positions are equipped with either a forth on the child seat at the belt path. with it and accidentally lock the seat- Switchable Automatic Locking Re- It should not move more than 25.4 belt retractor. Before installing a child tractor (ALR) or a cinching latch mm in any direction. restraint using the ISOFIX system, plate or both. Both types of seat belts buckle the seat belt behind the child are designed to keep the lap portion of restraint and out of the child’s reach. the seat belt tight around the child If the buckled seat belt interferes with restraint so that it is not necessary to the child restraint installation, instead use a locking clip. The ALR retractor of buckling it behind the child re- can be “switched” into a locked mode straint, route the seat belt through the by pulling all of the webbing out of child restraint belt path and then buckle it. Do not lock the seatbelt. 55 the retractor and then letting the web- 2. Pull enough of the seat belt web- 7. Finally, pull up on any excess webbing retract back into the retractor. If bing from the retractor to pass it bing to tighten the lap portion around it is locked, the ALR will make a through the belt path of the child re- the child restraint while you push the clicking noise while the webbing is straint. Do not twist the belt webbing child restraint rearward and down- pulled back into the retractor. For in the belt path. ward into the vehicle seat. additional information on ALR, refer 3. Slide the latch plate into the 8. If the child restraint has a top to the “Automatic Locking Mode” de- buckle until you hear a “click.” tether strap and the seating position scription under “Occupant Re- has a top tether anchorage, connect straints.” The cinching latch plate is 4. Pull on the webbing to make the the tether strap to the anchorage and designed to hold the lap portion of the lap portion tight against the child tighten the tether strap. Refer to “In- seatbelt tight when webbing is pulled seat. stalling Child Restraints Using The tight and straight through a child re- 5. To lock the seat belt, pull down on Top Tether Anchorage” for directions straint’s belt path. the shoulder part of the belt until you to attach a tether anchor. Installing A Child Restraint With have pulled all the seat belt webbing 9. Test that the child restraint is in- A Switchable Automatic Locking out of the retractor. Then, allow the stalled tightly by pulling back and Retractor (ALR) webbing to retract back into the re- forth on the child seat at the belt path. tractor. As the webbing retracts, you 1. Place the child seat in the center of It should not move more than 25.4 will hear a clicking sound. This means the seating position. For some second mm in any direction. the seat belt is now in the Automatic row seats, you may need to recline the Locking mode. Any seat belt system will loosen with seat and/or raise the head restraint to time, so check the belt occasionally, get a better fit. If the rear seat can be 6. Try to pull the webbing out of the and pull it tight if necessary. moved forward and rearward in the retractor. If it is locked, you should vehicle, you may wish to move it to its not be able to pull out any webbing. If rear-most position to make room for the retractor is not locked, repeat step the child seat. You may also move the 5. front seat forward to allow more room for the car seat.

56 Child Restraint With A Cinching 5. If the child restraint has a top child restraint. Repeat steps 4 to 6, Latch Plate (CINCH) — (for tether strap and the seating position above, to complete the installation of versions/markets where provided) has a top tether anchorage, connect the child restraint. the tether strap to the anchorage and 1. Place the child seat in the center of If the belt still cannot be tightened tighten the tether strap. Refer to “In- the seating position. For some second after you shorten the buckle, discon- stalling Child Restraints Using The row seats, you may need to recline the nect the latch plate from the buckle, Top Tether Anchorage” for directions seat and / or raise the head restraint to turn the buckle around one half turn, to attach a tether anchor. get a better fit. If the rear seat can be and insert the latch plate into the moved forward and rearward in the 6. Test that the child restraint is in- buckle again. If you still cannot make vehicle, you may wish to move it to its stalled tightly by pulling back and the child restraint installation tight, rear-most position to make room for forth on the child seat at the belt path. try a different seating position. the child seat. You may also move the It should not move more than 25.4 Installing Child Restraints Using front seat forward to allow more room mm in any direction. The Top Tether Anchorage for the car seat. Any seat belt system will loosen with 2. Next, pull enough of the seat belt time, so check the belt occasionally, webbing from the retractor to pass it and pull it tight if necessary. 1. Look behind the seating through the belt path of the child re- position where you plan to If the buckle or the cinching latch straint. Do not twist the belt webbing install the child restraint to plate is too close to the belt path open- in the belt path. find the tether anchorage. ing of the child restraint, you may You may need to move the seat for- 3. Slide the latch plate into the have trouble tightening the seat belt. ward to provide better access to the buckle until you hear a “click.” If this happens, disconnect the latch tether anchorage. If there is no top plate from the buckle and twist the 4. Finally, pull up on any excess web- tether anchorage for that seating po- short buckle-end belt up to three full bing to tighten the lap portion around sition, move the child restraint to an- turns to shorten it. Insert the latch the child restraint while you push the other position in the vehicle if one is plate into the buckle with the release child restraint rearward and down- available. button facing out, away from the ward into the vehicle seat.

57 2. Rotate or lift the cover to access 5. Remove slack in the tether strap the anchor directly behind the seat according to the child restraint manu- where you are placing the child re- facturer’s instructions. straint. Transporting Pets 3. Route the tether strap to provide Air Bags deploying in the front seat the most direct path for the strap be- could harm your pet. An unrestrained tween the anchor and the child seat. If pet will be thrown about and possibly your vehicle is equipped with adjust- Adjustable Headrest Downward injured, or injure a passenger during able rear head restraints, raise the Position panic braking or in a collision. head restraint, and where possible, route the tether strap under the head Pets should be restrained in the rear restraint and between the two posts. If seat in pet harnesses or pet carriers not possible, lower the head restraint that are secured by seat belts. and pass the tether strap around the outboard side of the head restraint. ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS A long break-in period is not required Tether Strap Mounting for the engine and drivetrain (transmission and axle) in your vehicle. 1 — Cover A — Tether Strap Hook Drive moderately during the first 500 km. After the initial 100 km, 3 — Attaching B — Tether An- speeds up to 80 or 90 km/h are desir- Strap chor Adjustable Headrest Release Push able. Button 4. Attach the tether strap hook of the While cruising, brief full-throttle ac- child restraint to the top tether an- celeration within the limits of local chorage as shown in the diagram. traffic laws contributes to a good

58 break-in. Wide-open throttle accel- not exceed 2/3 of the maximum per- WARNING! (Continued) eration in low gear can be detrimental missible engine speed for each gear. and should be avoided. Change gear in good time. Do not shift • Do not allow people to ride in any down a gear manually in order to area of your vehicle that is not The engine oil installed in the engine brake. equipped with seats and seat at the factory is a high-quality energy belts. conserving type lubricant. Oil SAFETY TIPS • Be sure everyone in your vehicle is changes should be consistent with an- in a seat and using a seat belt ticipated climate conditions under TRANSPORTING properly. which vehicle operations will occur. PASSENGERS For the recommended viscosity and EXHAUST GAS quality grades, refer to “Maintenance NEVER TRANSPORT PASSEN- Procedures” in “Maintaining Your Ve- GERS IN THE CARGO AREA. hicle”. NON-DETERGENT OR WARNING! STRAIGHT MINERAL OILS MUST WARNING! Exhaust gases can injure or kill. NEVER BE USED. • Do not leave children or animals They contain carbon monoxide A new engine may consume some oil inside parked vehicles in hot (CO), which is colorless and odor- during its first few thousand kilome- weather. Interior heat build-up less. Breathing it can make you un- ters of operation. This should be con- may cause serious injury or conscious and can eventually poi- sidered a normal part of the break-in death. son you. To avoid breathing (CO), follow these safety tips: and not interpreted as an indication of • It is extremely dangerous to ride • Do not run the engine in a closed difficulty. in a cargo area, inside or outside garage or in confined areas any of a vehicle. In a collision, people ADDITIONAL longer than needed to move your riding in these areas are more vehicle in or out of the area. REQUIREMENTS FOR likely to be seriously injured or DIESEL ENGINE killed. (Continued) During the first 1500 km avoid heavy (Continued) loads, e.g. driving at full throttle. Do

59 Open seams or loose connections Air Bag Warning Light WARNING! (Continued) could permit exhaust fumes to seep • If you are required to drive with into the passenger compartment. In The light should come on the trunk/liftgate/rear doors addition, inspect the exhaust system and remain on for four to open, make sure that all windows each time the vehicle is raised for lu- eight seconds as a bulb are closed and the climate control brication or oil change. Replace as check when the ignition BLOWER switch is set at high required. speed. DO NOT use the recircula- switch is first turned ON. If the light is tion mode. SAFETY CHECKS YOU not lit during starting, see your authorized dealer. If the light stays on, • If it is necessary to sit in a parked SHOULD MAKE INSIDE flickers, or comes on while driving, vehicle with the engine running, THE VEHICLE have the system checked by an autho- adjust your heating or cooling Seat Belts rized dealer. controls to force outside air into the vehicle. Set the blower at high Inspect the belt system periodically, Defroster speed. checking for cuts, frays, and loose Check operation by selecting the de- parts. Damaged parts must be re- frost mode and place the blower con- The best protection against carbon placed immediately. Do not disas- trol on high speed. You should be able monoxide entry into the vehicle body semble or modify the system. is a properly maintained engine ex- to feel the air directed against the haust system. Front seat belt assemblies must be windshield. See your authorized replaced after a collision. Rear seat dealer for service if your defroster is Whenever a change is noticed in the belt assemblies must be replaced after inoperable. sound of the exhaust system, when a collision if they have been damaged Floor Mat Safety Information exhaust fumes can be detected inside (i.e., bent retractor, torn webbing, the vehicle, or when the underside or etc.). If there is any question regard- Always use floor mats designed to fit rear of the vehicle is damaged, have a ing belt or retractor condition, replace the footwell of your vehicle. Use only competent mechanic inspect the com- the belt. floor mats that leave the pedal area plete exhaust system and adjacent unobstructed and that are firmly se- body areas for broken, damaged, de- cured so that they cannot slip out of teriorated, or mispositioned parts.

60 position and interfere with the pedals WARNING! (Continued) PERIODIC SAFETY or impair safe operation of your ve- CHECKS YOU SHOULD hicle in other ways. • Check mounting of mats on a regular basis. Always properly re- MAKE OUTSIDE THE install and secure floor mats that VEHICLE WARNING! have been removed for cleaning. Tires Pedals that cannot move freely can • Always make sure that objects cause loss of vehicle control and cannot fall into the driver foot- Examine tires for excessive tread wear increase the risk of serious personal well while the vehicle is moving. and uneven wear patterns. Check for injury. Objects can become trapped un- stones, nails, glass, or other objects • Always make sure that floor mats der the brake pedal and accelera- lodged in the tread or sidewall. In- are properly attached to the floor tor pedal causing a loss of vehicle spect the tread for cuts and cracks. mat fasteners. control. Inspect sidewalls for cuts, cracks and bulges. Check the wheel nuts for • Never place or install floor mats • If required, mounting posts must tightness. Check the tires (including or other floor coverings in the ve- be properly installed, if not spare) for proper cold inflation pres- hicle that cannot be properly se- equipped from the factory. Fail- sure. cured to prevent them from mov- ure to properly follow floor mat in- ing and interfering with the stallation or mounting can cause Lights pedals or the ability to control the interference with the brake pedal Have someone observe the operation vehicle. and accelerator pedal operation of brake lights and exterior lights • Never put floor mats or other causing loss of control of the ve- while you work the controls. Check floor coverings on top of already hicle. turn signal and high beam indicator installed floor mats. Additional lights on the instrument panel. floor mats and other coverings will reduce the size of the pedal Door Latches area and interfere with the ped- Check for positive closing, latching, als. and locking. (Continued)

61 Fluid Leaks Check area under vehicle after over- night parking for fuel, engine coolant, oil, or other fluid leaks. Also, if gasoline fumes are detected or if fuel, power steering fluid (if equipped), or brake fluid leaks are suspected, the cause should be located and corrected immediately.

62 3

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

• MIRRORS ...... 70 • AUTOMATIC DIMMING MIRROR ...... 70 • OUTSIDE MIRRORS ...... 70 • OUTSIDE MIRRORS FOLDING FEATURE .....70 • DRIVER'S AUTOMATIC DIMMING MIRROR . . .70 • OUTSIDE MIRRORS WITH TURN SIGNAL AND APPROACH LIGHTING (for versions/markets, where provided) ...... 70 • TILT MIRRORS IN REVERSE (for versions/ markets, where provided)...... 71 • POWER MIRRORS ...... 71 • POWER FOLDING OUTSIDE MIRRORS...... 72 • HEATED MIRRORS ...... 72 • ILLUMINATED VANITY MIRRORS ...... 72 • “SLIDE-ON-ROD” AND EXTENDER FEATURES OFSUNVISOR...... 72 • BLIND SPOT MONITORING (BSM) (for versions/markets, where provided)...... 73 • REAR CROSS PATH (for versions/markets, where provided) ...... 75 • MODES OF OPERATION ...... 76

63 • Uconnect® PHONE (8.4/8.4N)...... 77 • Uconnect® 8.4/8.4 NAV ...... 77 • OPERATION...... 79 • PHONE CALL FEATURES ...... 84 • UCONNECT® PHONE FEATURES ...... 86 • ADVANCED PHONE CONNECTIVITY...... 89 • THINGS YOU SHOULD KNOW ABOUT YOUR Uconnect® PHONE...... 90 • GENERAL INFORMATION ...... 95 • VOICE COMMAND ...... 95 • Uconnect® 8.4/8.4 Nav ...... 95 • UCONNECT® VOICE COMMANDS ...... 96 • VOICE TREE ...... 97 • SEATS...... 103 • POWER SEATS ...... 103 • POWER LUMBAR (for versions/markets, where provided) ...... 104 • HEATED SEATS (for versions/markets, where provided) ...... 105 • VENTILATED SEATS (for versions/markets, where provided) ...... 106 • HEAD RESTRAINTS ...... 107 • FOLDING REAR SEAT ...... 108 • DRIVER MEMORY SEAT (for versions/markets, where provided) ...... 109 • PROGRAMMING THE MEMORY FEATURE . . .109

64 • LINKING AND UNLINKING THE REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY TRANSMITTER TO MEMORY ...... 110 • MEMORY POSITION RECALL ...... 110 • EASY ENTRY/EXIT SEAT (Available With Memory Seat Only) ...... 111 • TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD...... 111 • LIGHTS ...... 112 • HEADLIGHT SWITCH ...... 112 • AUTOMATIC HEADLIGHTS ...... 112 • HEADLIGHTS ON WITH WIPERS (Available With Automatic Headlights Only) ...... 113 • HEADLIGHT TIME DELAY ...... 113 • AUTOMATIC HIGH BEAM (for versions/ markets, where provided) ...... 113 • DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHTS (for versions/ markets, where provided)...... 114 • ADAPTIVE BI-XENON HIGH INTENSITY DISCHARGE HEADLIGHTS ...... 114 • LIGHTS-ON REMINDER ...... 114 • FOG LIGHTS ...... 115 • MULTIFUNCTION LEVER ...... 115 • TURN SIGNALS ...... 115 • LANE CHANGE ASSIST ...... 115 • HIGH/LOW BEAM SWITCH ...... 116 • FLASH-TO-PASS...... 116 • COURTESY LIGHTS ...... 116 • FRONT MAP/READING LIGHTS ...... 116

65 • AMBIENT LIGHT ...... 116 • INTERIOR LIGHTS ...... 116 • WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS ...... 117 • INTERMITTENT WIPER SYSTEM ...... 118 • MIST FEATURE ...... 118 • WINDSHIELD WASHERS ...... 118 • RAIN SENSING WIPERS (for versions/markets, where provided) ...... 119 • HEADLIGHT WASHERS ...... 120 • TILT/TELESCOPING STEERING COLUMN .....120 • POWER TILT/TELESCOPING STEERING COLUMN (for versions/markets, where provided) ...... 120 • HEATED STEERING WHEEL (for versions/markets, where provided) ...... 121 • ADJUSTABLE PEDALS (for versions/markets, where provided) ...... 122 • ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL ...... 123 • TO ACTIVATE...... 123 • TO SET A DESIRED SPEED ...... 123 • TO DEACTIVATE ...... 124 • TO RESUME SPEED...... 124 • TO VARY THE SPEED SETTING ...... 124 • TO ACCELERATE FOR PASSING ...... 124 • ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC) (for versions/markets, where provided) ...... 125 • ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC) OPERATION ...... 126

66 • ACTIVATING ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC) ...... 126 • TO ACTIVATE...... 127 • TO SET A DESIRED ACC SPEED ...... 127 • TO CANCEL ...... 128 • TO TURN OFF ...... 128 • TO RESUME SPEED...... 128 • TO VARY THE SPEED SETTING ...... 128 • SETTING THE FOLLOWING DISTANCE IN ACC...... 129 • OVERTAKE AID ...... 131 • ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC) MENU . .131 • DISPLAY WARNINGS AND MAINTENANCE . . .132 • PRECAUTIONS WHILE DRIVING WITH ACC...... 133 • NORMAL (FIXED SPEED) CRUISE CONTROL MODE...... 134 • FORWARD COLLISION WARNING (for versions/markets, where provided)...... 136 • PARKSENSE® PARK ASSIST ...... 137 • PARKSENSE® SENSORS ...... 137 • PARKSENSE® WARNING DISPLAY ...... 137 • PARKSENSE® DISPLAY ...... 138 • FRONT PARK ASSIST AUDIBLE ALERTS . . . .139 • ENABLING AND DISABLING PARKSENSE® . .139 • SERVICE THE PARKSENSE® PARK ASSIST SYSTEM...... 140 • CLEANING THE PARK ASSIST SYSTEM .....140

67 • PARKSENSE® SYSTEM USAGE PRECAUTIONS...... 140 • PARKVIEW® REAR BACK UP CAMERA (for versions/markets, where provided) ...... 142 • TURNING PARKVIEW® ON OR OFF — WITH TOUCH SCREEN ...... 143 • OVERHEAD CONSOLE ...... 143 • SUNGLASS BIN DOOR ...... 144 • COMMANDVIEW® SUNROOF WITH POWER SHADE — (for versions/markets, where provided) ...... 144 • OPENING SUNROOF — EXPRESS ...... 144 • OPENING SUNROOF — MANUAL MODE .....145 • CLOSING SUNROOF — EXPRESS ...... 145 • CLOSING SUNROOF — MANUAL MODE .....145 • VENTING SUNROOF — EXPRESS ...... 145 • OPENING POWER SHADE — EXPRESS .....145 • OPENING POWER SHADE — MANUAL MODE...... 145 • CLOSING POWER SHADE — EXPRESS...... 146 • CLOSING POWER SHADE — MANUAL MODE...... 146 • VENTING SUNROOF — EXPRESS ...... 146 • PINCH PROTECT FEATURE...... 146 • WINDBUFFETING...... 146 • SUNROOF MAINTENANCE...... 146 • IGNITION OFF OPERATION ...... 146 • ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLETS ...... 147

68 • CUPHOLDERS ...... 149 • FRONT SEAT CUPHOLDERS ...... 149 • REAR SEAT CUPHOLDERS ...... 150 • STORAGE...... 150 • GLOVEBOX STORAGE ...... 150 • CONSOLE FEATURES ...... 150 • DOOR STORAGE ...... 151 • REAR SEAT ARMREST STORAGE (for versions/markets, where provided)...... 151 • CARGO AREA — VEHICLES EQUIPPED WITH 60/40 SPLIT-FOLDING REAR SEAT...... 151 • CARGO AREA FEATURES ...... 152 • TRUNK MAT (for versions/markets, where provided) ...... 152 • GROCERY BAG HOOKS (for versions/markets where provided) ...... 153 • CARGO NET (for versions/markets where provided) ...... 153 • REAR WINDOW FEATURES ...... 153 • REAR WINDOW DEFROSTER ...... 153 • POWER SUNSHADE (for versions/markets, where provided) ...... 153 • LOAD LEVELING SYSTEM ...... 154

69 MIRRORS OUTSIDE MIRRORS OUTSIDE MIRRORS FOLDING FEATURE AUTOMATIC DIMMING To receive maximum benefit, adjust MIRROR the outside mirror(s) to center on the Vehicles are equipped with mirrors adjacent lane of traffic and a slight that are hinged. The hinge allows the This mirror automatically adjusts for overlap of the view obtained from the mirror to pivot forward and rearward headlight glare from vehicles behind inside mirror. to resist damage. The hinge has three you. NOTE: The passenger side con- detent positions: full forward, full NOTE: This feature is disabled vex outside mirror will give a rearward and normal. when the vehicle is moving in re- much wider view to the rear, and DRIVER'S AUTOMATIC verse. especially of the lane next to your DIMMING MIRROR vehicle. This feature is controlled by the inside automatic dimming mirror and will WARNING! automatically adjust for headlight Vehicles and other objects seen in glare when the inside mirror adjusts. the passenger side convex mirror NOTE: This feature is also avail- will look smaller and farther away able on the passenger's side when than they really are. Relying too equipped with turn signal and ap- much on your passenger side con- Automatic Dimming Mirror proach lighting. vex mirror could cause you to col- lide with another vehicle or other CAUTION! OUTSIDE MIRRORS WITH object. Use your inside mirror when TURN SIGNAL AND To avoid damage to the mirror dur- judging the size or distance of a APPROACH LIGHTING (for ing cleaning, never spray any vehicle seen in the passenger side cleaning solution directly onto the convex mirror. versions/markets, where mirror. Apply the solution onto a provided) clean cloth and wipe the mirror Driver and passenger outside mirrors clean. with turn signals located within the

70 mirror housing and approach lighting TILT MIRRORS IN • Refer to “Uconnect® Settings” in located within mirror glass contain REVERSE (for “Understanding Your Instru- five LEDs. versions/markets, where ment Panel” for further information. Three of the LEDs are turn signal provided) indicators, which flash with the corre- POWER MIRRORS sponding turn signal lights in the Tilt Mirrors in Reverse provides auto- front and rear of the vehicle. Turning matic outside mirror positioning The power mirror controls are located on the Hazard Warning flashers will which will aid the driver’s view of the on the driver's door trim panel. also activate these LEDs. ground rearward of the front doors. The outside mirrors will move slightly The other two LEDs supply illumi- downward from the present position nated entry lighting, which turns on when the vehicle is shifted into RE- in both mirrors when you use the Re- VERSE. The outside mirrors will then mote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmit- return to the original position when ter or open any door. These LEDs the vehicle is shifted out of the RE- shine outward to illuminate the front VERSE position. Each stored and rear door handles. They also memory setting will have an associ- Power Mirror Control shine downward to illuminate the ated Tilt Mirrors in Reverse position. area in front of the doors. The power mirror controls consist of NOTE: mirror select buttons and a four-way The Illuminated Entry lighting fades mirror control switch. To adjust a mir- to off after about 30 seconds or it will • The Tilt Mirrors in Reverse fea- ror, press either the L (left) or R fade to off immediately once the igni- ture is not turned on when deliv- (right) button to select the mirror that tion is placed into the RUN position. ered from the factory. The Tilt you want to adjust. Mirrors in Reverse feature can NOTE: The approach lighting be turned on and off using the NOTE: A light in the select button will not function when the shift Uconnect® System. will illuminate indicating the mir- lever is moved out of the PARK ror is activated and can be ad- position. justed.

71 Using the mirror control switch, press HEATED MIRRORS “SLIDE-ON-ROD” AND on any of the four arrows for the di- EXTENDER FEATURES OF rection that you want the mirror to These mirrors are heated to SUN VISOR move. melt frost or ice. This feature is To use the “Slide-On-Rod” feature of Power mirror preselected positions activated whenever you turn on the the sun visor, rotate the sun visor can be controlled by the optional rear window defroster. Refer to “Rear downward and swing the sun visor so Memory Seat Feature. Refer to Window Features” in “Understanding it is parallel to the side window, grab- “Driver Memory Seat” in “Under- The Features Of Your Vehicle” for bing the sun visor with your left hand standing The Features Of Your Ve- further information. pull rearwards until the sun visor is in hicle” for further information. ILLUMINATED VANITY the desired position. To use the ex- POWER FOLDING MIRRORS tender feature of the sun visor, grab OUTSIDE MIRRORS the extender which is located at the An illuminated vanity mirror is lo- rear of the visor and pull rearward. The switch for the power folding mir- cated on the sun visor. To use the rors is located between the power mir- mirror, rotate the sun visor downward ror switches L (left) and R (right). and swing the mirror cover upward. Press the switch once and the mirrors The light turns on automatically. will fold in, pressing the switch a sec- Closing the mirror cover turns off the ond time will return the mirrors to the light. normal driving position. NOTE: If the vehicle speed is greater than 16 km/h the folding Slide-On-Rod Feature feature will be disabled. If the mirrors are in the folded position, and vehicle speed is equal or greater than 16 km/h, they will automatically unfold. Illuminated Vanity Mirror

72 BLIND SPOT is in any forward gear or REVERSE • The BSM system detection zone MONITORING (BSM) (for and enters stand by mode when the DOES NOT change if your ve- vehicle is in PARK. hicle is towing a trailer. There- versions/markets, where fore, visually verify the adjacent provided) lane is clear for both your vehicle and trailer before making The Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) a lane change. If the trailer or system uses two radar-based sensors, other object (i.e., bicycle, sports located inside the rear bumper fascia, equipment) extends beyond the to detect highway licensable vehicles side of your vehicle, this may re- (automobiles, trucks, motorcycles, sult in the BSM warning light etc.) that enter the blind spot zones remaining illuminated the en- from the rear/front/side of the ve- BSM Warning Light tire time the vehicle is in a for- hicle. The BSM detection zone covers approximately one lane 3.8 m on both ward gear. sides of the vehicle. The zone starts at The area on the rear fascia where the the outside rear view mirror and ex- radar sensors are located must remain tends approximately 7 m to the rear of free of snow, ice, and dirt/road con- the vehicle. The BSM system monitors tamination so that the BSM system the detection zones on both sides of can function properly. Do not block the vehicle when the vehicle speed the area of the rear fascia where the reaches approximately 10 km/h or radar sensors are located with foreign Rear Detection Zones higher and will alert the driver of ve- objects (bumper stickers, bicycle When the vehicle is started, the BSM hicles in these areas. racks, etc.). warning light will momentarily illu- NOTE: minate in both outside rear view mir- • The BSM system does NOT alert rors to let the driver know that the the driver about rapidly ap- system is operational. The BSM sys- proaching vehicles that are out- tem sensors operate when the vehicle side the detection zones.

73 Entering From The Side Overtaking Traffic Vehicles that move into your adjacent If you pass another vehicle slowly lanes from either side of the vehicle. with a relative speed of less than 24 km/h and the vehicle remains in the blind spot for approximately 1.5 seconds, the warning light will be illuminated. If the difference in speed between the two vehicles is greater Sensor Location (Driver Side Shown) than 24 km/h, the warning light will The BSM system notifies the driver of not illuminate. objects in the detection zones by illu- minating the BSM warning light lo- Side Monitoring cated in the outside mirrors in addi- Entering From The Rear tion to sounding an audible (chime) alert and reducing the radio volume. Vehicles that come up from behind Refer to “Modes Of Operation” for your vehicle on either side and enter further information. the rear detection zone with a relative The BSM system monitors the detec- speed of less than 48 km/h. tion zone from three different entry Overtaking/Approaching points (side, rear, front) while driving The BSM system is designed not to to see if an alert is necessary. The BSM issue an alert on stationary objects system will issue an alert during these such as guardrails, posts, walls, foli- types of zone entries. age, berms, etc. However, occasionally the system may alert on such objects. This is normal operation and your vehicle does not require service. Rear Monitoring

74 backing out of parking spaces where their vision of oncoming vehicles may be blocked. Proceed slowly and cautiously out of the parking space until the rear end of the vehicle is exposed. The RCP system will then have a clear view of the cross traffic and if an oncoming vehicle is detected, alert the Overtaking/Passing Opposing Traffic driver. The BSM system will not alert you of WARNING! objects that are traveling in the opposite direction of the vehicle in adjacent The Blind Spot Monitoring system lanes. is only an aid to help detect objects in the blind spot zones. The BSM system is not designed to detect pedestrians, bicyclists, or animals. Even if your vehicle is equipped with the BSM system, always check RCP Detection Zones your vehicle's mirrors, glance over RCP monitors the rear detection your shoulder, and use your turn zones on both sides of the vehicle, for signal before changing lanes. Fail- objects that are moving toward the Stationary Objects ure to do so can result in serious side of the vehicle with a minimum injury or death. speed of approximately 5 km/h, to REAR CROSS PATH (for objects moving a maximum of approximately 32 km/h, such as in versions/markets, where parking lot situations. provided) The Rear Cross Path (RCP) feature is intended to aid the drivers when

75 NOTE: In a parking lot situation, MODES OF OPERATION view mirror based on a detected ob- oncoming vehicles can be object. However, when the system is op- Modes Of Operation With EVIC scured by vehicles parked on ei- erating in RCP, the system will re- ther side. If the sensors are Three selectable modes of operation spond with both visual and audible blocked by other structures or ve- are available in the Electronic Vehicle alerts when a detected object is pres- hicles, the system will not be able Information Center (EVIC). Refer to ent. Whenever an audible alert is re- to alert the driver. “Electronic Vehicle Information Cen- quested, the radio volume is reduced. ter (EVIC)/Personal Settings When RCP is on and the vehicle is in Blind Spot Alert Lights/Chime (Customer-Programmable Features)” REVERSE, the driver is alerted using in “Understanding Your Instrument When operating in Blind Spot Alert both the visual and audible alarms, Panel” for further information. Lights/Chime mode, the BSM system including reducing the radio volume. will provide a visual alert in the ap- Modes Of Operation With propriate side view mirror based on a Uconnect® System — (for WARNING! detected object. If the turn signal is versions/markets, where pro- then activated, and it corresponds to RCP is not a Back Up Aid system. It vided) is intended to be used to help a an alert present on that side of the driver detect an oncoming vehicle Three selectable modes of operation vehicle, an audible chime will also be in a parking lot situation. Drivers are available in the Uconnect® sys- sounded. Whenever a turn signal and must be careful when backing up, tem screen. Refer to “Customer- Pro- detected object are present on the even when using RCP. Always grammable Features — Uconnect® same side at the same time, both the check carefully behind your ve- Access settings ” in “Understanding visual and audio alerts will be issued. hicle, look behind you, and be sure Your Instrument Panel” for further In addition to the audible alert, the to check for pedestrians, animals, information. radio (if on) volume will be reduced. other vehicles, obstructions, and Blind Spot Alert NOTE: blind spots before backing up. Fail- When operating in Blind Spot Alert • Whenever an audible alert is re- ure to do so can result in serious mode, the BSM system will provide a quested by the BSM system, the injury or death. visual alert in the appropriate side radio volume is reduced.

76 • If the hazard flashers are on, the Uconnect® PHONE WARNING! system will request the appro- (8.4/8.4N) Any voice commanded system priate visual alert only. should be used only in safe driving When the system is in RCP,the system Uconnect® 8.4/8.4 NAV conditions following all applicable shall respond with both visual and Uconnect® Phone is a voice- laws, including laws regarding audible alerts when a detected object activated, hands-free, in-vehicle com- phone use. Your attention should be is present. Whenever an audible alert munications system. Uconnect® focused on safely operating the ve- is requested, the radio volume is re- Phone allows you to dial a phone hicle. Failure to do so may result in duced. Turn/hazard signal status is number with your mobile phone. an accident causing serious injury ignored; the RCP state always re- or death. Uconnect® Phone supports the fol- quests the audible chime. lowing features: The Uconnect® Phone is driven Blind Spot Alert Off (Lights Only) through your Bluetooth® “Hands- NOTE: Your phone must be ca- Free Profile” mobile phone. When the BSM system is turned off, pable of SMS messaging via Uconnect® features Bluetooth® tech- there will be no visual or audible Bluetooth® for messaging features nology - the global standard that en- alerts from either the BSM or RCP to work properly. ables different electronic devices to systems. Your mobile phone’s audio is trans- connect to each other without wires or NOTE: The BSM system will store mitted through your vehicle’s audio a docking station, so Uconnect® the current operating mode when system; the system will automatically Phone works no matter where you the vehicle is shut off. Each time mute your radio when using the stow your mobile phone (be it your the vehicle is started, the previ- Uconnect® Phone. purse, pocket, or briefcase), as long as ously stored mode will be recalled your phone is turned on and has been Uconnect® Phone allows you to and used. paired to the vehicle's Uconnect® transfer calls between the system and Phone. The Uconnect® Phone allows your mobile phone as you enter or exit up to ten mobile phones or audio de- your vehicle and enables you to mute vices to be linked to the system. Only the system's microphone for private one linked (or paired) mobile phone conversation. and one audio device can be used with the system at a time. 77 Uconnect® Phone Button radio volume control knob or from the Screen Activated Features: steering wheel radio control (right The Uconnect® Phone • Dialing via Keypad using touch- switch), if so equipped. Button is used to get into screen. the phone mode and make Voice Activated Features: • Viewing and Calling contacts from calls, show recent, incom- • Hands Free dialing via Voice (“Call Phonebooks displayed on the ing, outgoing calls, view phonebook John Smiths Mobile” or, “Dial 151- touchscreen. etc., When you press the button you 1234 -5555”). will hear a BEEP. The beep is your • Setting Favorite Contact Phone signal to give a command. • Hands Free text to speech listening numbers so the are easily accessible Uconnect® Voice Command Button of your incoming SMS messages. on the Main Phone screen. • Hands Free text messaging (“Send • Viewing and Calling contacts from The Uconnect® Voice Com- a message to John Smith Mobile”). Recent Call logs. mand Button is only used for “barge in” and • Redialing last dialed numbers • Reviewing your recent Incoming when you are already in a (“Redial”). SMS. call and you want to send Tones or • Calling Back the last incoming call • Sending a text message via the make another call. number (“Call Back”). touchscreen. The button is also used to access • View Call logs on screen (“Show • Listen to Music on your Bluetooth® the Voice Commands for the incoming calls,” “Show Outgoing Device via the touchscreen. Uconnect® Voice Command features calls,” “Show missed Calls,” “Show if your vehicle is equipped. Please see • Pairing up to 10 phones/audio de- Recent Calls”). the Uconnect® Voice Command sec- vices for easy access to connect to tion for direction on how to use the • Searching Contacts phone number them quickly. button. (“Search for John Smith Mobile”). The Uconnect® Phone is fully integrated with the vehicle's audio system. The volume of the Uconnect® Phone can be adjusted either from the

78 OPERATION • For each feature explanation in this sounds such as “ah” and “eh.” The Voice commands can be used to oper- section, only the compound com- system handles fill-in words such as “I ate the Uconnect® Phone and to navi- mand form of the voice command is would like to.” given. You can also break the com- gate through the Uconnect® Phone The system handles multiple inputs in mands into parts and say each part menu structure. Voice commands are the same phrase or sentence such as of the command when you are required after most Uconnect® Phone “make a phone call” and “to Kelly asked for it. For example, you can prompts. There are two general meth- Smith.” For multiple inputs in the use the compound command form ods for how Voice Command works: same phrase or sentence, the system voice command “Search for John identifies the topic or context and pro- 1. Say compound commands like Smith”, or you can break the com- vides the associated follow-up prompt “Call John Smith mobile”. pound command form into two such as “Who do you want to call?” in voice commands: “Search Contact” 2. Say the individual commands and the case where a phone call was re- and when asked “John Smith”. allow the system to guide you to com- quested but the specific name was not Please remember, the Uconnect® plete the task. recognized. Phone works best when you talk in You will be prompted for a specific a normal conversational tone, as if The system utilizes continuous dialog; command and then guided through speaking to someone sitting a few when the system requires more infor- the available options. meters away from you. mation from the user it will ask a question to which the user can re- • Prior to giving a voice command, Natural Speech one must wait for the beep, which spond without pressing the Voice follows the “Listen” prompt or an- Your Uconnect® Phone Voice system Command button on your steer- other prompt. uses a Natural Language Voice Rec- ing wheel. ognition (VR) engine. • For certain operations, compound Voice Command Tree Natural speech allows the user to commands can be used. For ex- Refer to “Voice Tree” in this section. ample, instead of saying “Call” and speak commands in phrases or com- then “John Smith” and then “mo- plete sentences. The system filters out bile”, the following compound certain non-word utterances and command can be said: “Call John Smith mobile”. 79 Help Command Pair (Link) Uconnect® Phone To A Mobile Phone If you need assistance at any prompt, or if you want to know your options at To begin using your Uconnect® any prompt, say “Help” following the Phone, you must pair your compat- beep. ible Bluetooth® enabled mobile phone. To activate the Uconnect® Phone from idle, simply press the button To complete the pairing process, you on your steering wheel and say a com- will need to reference your mobile 3. Select “Yes” to begin the pairing mand or say “help.” All Uconnect® phone Owner's Manual. The process. Then, search for available Phone sessions begin with a press of Uconnect® website may also provide devices on your Bluetooth® enabled the button on the radio control detailed instructions for pairing. mobile phone. When prompted on the head. NOTE: phone, enter the name and PIN shown Cancel Command on the Uconnect® screen. • You must have Bluetooth® en- • If “No” is selected, touch the At any prompt, after the beep, you abled on your phone to complete “Settings” soft-key from the can say “Cancel” and you will be re- this procedure. turned to the main menu. Uconnect® Phone main screen, • The vehicle must be in PARK. • Touch the “Add Device” soft- You can also press the or but- key, ton on your steering wheel when the 1. Press the “Phone” soft-key on the • Search for available devices on system is listening for a command and screen to begin. your Bluetooth® enabled mobile be returned to the main or previous 2. If there is no phone currently con- phone. When prompted on the menu. nected with the system, a pop-up will phone, enter the name and PIN appear. shown on the Uconnect® screen, • See Step 4 to complete the process.

80 4. Uconnect® Phone will display an 4. Uconnect® Phone will display an 2. Change the Source to Bluetooth®, in progress screen while the system is in process screen while the system is 3. Touch the “Bluetooth®” soft-key connecting. connecting, to display the Paired Audio Devices 5. When the pairing process has suc- screen, cessfully completed, the system will prompt you to choose whether or not 4. Touch the “Add Device” soft-key, this is your favorite phone. Selecting NOTE: If there is no device cur- Yes will make this phone the highest rently connected with the system, a priority. This phone will take prece- pop-up will appear. dence over other paired phones within range. 5. Search for available devices on 5. When the pairing process has suc- your Bluetooth® enabled audio de- NOTE: For phones which are not cessfully completed, the system will vice. When prompted on the device, made a favorite, the phone priority prompt you to choose whether or not enter the PIN shown on the is determined by the order in this is your favorite phone. Selecting Uconnect® screen, which it was paired. The latest Yes will make this phone the highest phone paired will have the higher 6. Uconnect® Phone will display an priority. This phone will take prece- priority. in process screen while the system is dence over other paired phones within connecting, range. You can also use the following VR commands to bring up the Paired 7. When the pairing process has suc- Pair Additional Mobile Phones Phone screen from any screen on the cessfully completed, the system will 1. Touch the “Settings” soft-key radio: prompt you to choose whether or not from the Phone main screen, • “Show Paired Phones” or this is your favorite device. Selecting Yes will make this device the highest 2. Touch the “Add Device” soft-key, • “Connect My Phone” priority. This device will take prece- 3. Search for available devices on Pair A Bluetooth® Streaming dence over other paired devices your Bluetooth® enabled mobile Audio Device within range. phone. When prompted on the phone, enter the name and PIN shown on the 1. Touch the “Player” soft-key to be- Uconnect® screen, gin, 81 NOTE: For devices which are not 4. Touch the X to exit out of the 4. The options pop-up will be dis- made a favorite, the device priority Settings screen. played, is determined by the order in Disconnecting A Phone or Audio 5. Touch the “Delete Device” soft- which it was paired. The latest de- Device key, vice paired will have the higher priority. 1. Touch the “Settings” soft-key, 6. Touch the X to exit out of the Settings screen. You can also use the following VR 2. Touch the paired phone or audio command to bring up a list of paired device soft-key, Making A Phone Or Audio Device audio devices: A Favorite 3. Touch the + soft-key located to the • “Show Paired Phones” right of the device name, 1. Touch the “Settings” soft-key, • “Connect My Phone” 4. The options pop-up will be dis- 2. Touch the “Phone/Bluetooth®” Connecting To A Particular played, soft-key, Mobile Phone Or Audio Device 5. Touch the “Disconnect Device” 3. Touch the + soft-key located to the After Pairing soft-key, right of the device name, Uconnect® Phone will automatically 6. Touch the X to exit out of the 4. The options pop-up will be disconnect to the highest priority paired Settings screen. played, phone and/or Audio Device within range. If you need to choose a particu- Deleting A Phone Or Audio 5. Touch the “Make Favorite” soft- lar phone or Audio Device follow Device key; you will see the chosen device move to the top of the list, these steps: 1. Touch the “Settings” soft-key, 6. Touch the X to exit out of the 1. Touch the “Settings” soft-key, 2. Touch the pair phone or audio de- Settings screen. 2. Touch the paired phone or audio vice soft-key, device soft-key, 3. Touch the + soft-key located to the 3. Touch to select the particular right of the device name for a different Phone or the “Paired Audio Sources” Phone or Audio Device than the cur- soft-key and then an Audio Device, rently connected device, 82 Phonebook Download — • Depending on the maximum num- 2. After loading the mobile phone- Automatic Phonebook Transfer ber of entries downloaded, there book, select phonebook from the From Mobile Phone (for may be a short delay before the Phone main screen, then select the versions/market, where provided) latest downloaded names can be appropriate number. Touch the + next If equipped and specifically sup- used. Until then, if available, the to the selected number to display the ported by your phone, Uconnect® previously downloaded phonebook options pop-up. In the pop-up select Phone automatically downloads is available for use. “Add to Favorites.” names (text names) and number en- • Only the phonebook of the cur- tries from the mobile phone’s phone- rently connected mobile phone is book. Specific Bluetooth® Phones accessible. with Phone Book Access Profile may support this feature. See Uconnect® • This downloaded phonebook can- website, www.UconnectPhone.com, not be edited or deleted on the for supported phones. Uconnect® Phone. These can only be edited on the mobile phone. The • To call a name from a downloaded changes are transferred and up- NOTE: If the Favorites list is full, mobile phone book, follow the pro- dated to Uconnect® Phone on the you will be asked to remove an cedure in the Voice Recognition next phone connection. existing favorite. Quick Reference section. Managing Your Favorite 3. From the Phone main screen, se- • Automatic download and update of Phonebook lect phonebook. From the phonebook a phone book, if supported, begins There are three ways you can add an screen, select the “Favorites” soft-key as soon as the Bluetooth® wireless entry to your Favorite Phonebook. and then select the + soft-key located phone connection is made to the to the right of the phonebook record. Uconnect® Phone, for example, af- 1. During an active call of a number Select an empty entry and touch the + ter you start the vehicle. to make a favorite, touch and hold a on that selected entry. When the Op- favorite button on the top of the • A maximum of 1000 entries per tions pop-up appears, touch “Add phone main screen. phone will be downloaded and up- from Mobile.” You will then be asked dated every time a phone is con- which contact and number to choose nected to the Uconnect® Phone. 83 from your mobile phonebook. When if the feature(s) are available and sup- • After the “Listening” prompt and complete the new favorite will be ported by Bluetooth® on your mobile the following beep, say “Dial 151- shown. service plan. For example, if your mo- 1234 -5555,” bile service plan provides three-way To Remove A Favorite • The Uconnect® Phone will dial the calling, this feature can be accessed number 151-1234 -5555. 1. To remove a Favorite, select through the Uconnect® Phone. Check phonebook from the Phone main with your mobile service provider for Call By Saying A Phonebook screen. the features that you have. Name 2. Next select Favorites on the left Ways To Initiate A Phone Call 1. Press the button on your steer- side of the screen and then touch the + Listed below are all the ways you can ing wheel to begin, Options soft-key. initiate a phone call with Uconnect® 2. After the “Listening” prompt and 3. Touch the + next to the Favorite Phone. the following beep, say “Call John you would like to remove. • Redial Doe Mobile,” • Dial by touching in the number 3. The Uconnect® Phone will dial the number associated with John Doe, • Voice Commands (Dial by Saying a or if there are multiple numbers it will Name, Call by Saying a Phonebook ask which number you want to call for Name, Redial, or Call Back) John Doe. • Favorites Call Controls • Mobile Phonebook The touchscreen allows you to control 4. The Options pop-up will display, the following call features: • Recent Call Log touch “Remove from Favs.” • Answer • SMS Message Viewer PHONE CALL FEATURES •End Dial By Saying A Number The following features can be ac- • Ignore cessed through the Uconnect® Phone • Press the button on your steering wheel to begin, • Hold/unhold

84 • Mute/unmute Answer Or Ignore An Incoming Call — No Call Currently In • Transfer the call to/from the phone Progress • Swap two active calls When you receive a call on your mo- • Join two active calls together bile phone, the Uconnect® Phone will interrupt the vehicle audio system. Touch-Tone Number Entry Press the button to accept the call. 1. Touch the “Phone” soft-key, You can also touch the “answer” soft- • Incoming Calls key or touch the caller ID box. 2. Touch the “Dial” soft-key, • Outgoing Calls Answer Or Ignore An Incoming 3. The Touch-Tone screen will be dis- Call — Call Currently In Progress played, • Missed Calls If a call is currently in progress and • All Calls 4. Use the numbered soft-keys to en- you have another incoming call, you ter the number and touch “Call.” These can be accessed by touching the will hear the same network tones for To send a touch tone using Voice Rec- “recent calls” soft-key on the Phone call waiting that you normally hear ognition (VR), press the button main screen. when using your mobile phone. Press the phone button, answer soft-key on your steering wheel while in a call You can also press the button and or caller ID box to place the current and say “Send 1234#” or you can say say “Show my incoming calls” from call on hold and answer the incoming “Send Voicemail Password” if Voice- any screen and the Incoming calls will call. mail password is stored in your mo- be displayed. bile phonebook. NOTE: The Uconnect® Phone You can also press the button and compatible phones in the market Recent Calls say “Show my recent calls” from any today do not support rejecting an You may browse up to 34 of the most screen and the All calls screen will be incoming call when another call is recent of each of the following call displayed. in progress. Therefore, the user types: NOTE: Incoming can also be re- can only answer an incoming call placed with “Outgoing,” “Recent” or ignore it. or “Missed.” 85 Making A Second Call While Join Calls NOTE: The call will remain Current Call Is In Progress within the vehicle audio system When two calls are in progress (one until the phone becomes out of You can place a call on hold by touch- active and one on hold), touch the range for the Bluetooth® connec- ing the Hold soft-key on the Phone “Join Calls” soft-key on the Phone tion. It is recommended to press main screen, then dial a number from main screen to combine all calls into a the “transfer” soft-key when leav- the dialpad, recent calls, SMS Inbox Conference Call. ing the vehicle. or from the phonebooks. To go back Call Termination to the first call, refer to “Toggling UCONNECT® PHONE Between Calls” in this section. To To end a call in progress, momentarily FEATURES combine two calls, refer to “Join press the button or the end soft- Calls” in this section. key. Only the active call(s) will be Language Selection terminated and if there is a call on Place/Retrieve A Call From Hold To change the language that the hold, it will become the new active Uconnect® Phone is using: During an active call, touch the call. “Hold” soft-key on the Phone main • Press the button to begin. Redial screen. • After the “Ready” prompt and the Press the “Redial” soft-key, or press Toggling Between Calls following beep, say the name of the the and after the “Listening” language you wish to switch to If two calls are in progress (one active prompt and the following beep, say (English, Dutch, French, German, and one on hold), touch the “Swap” “Redial.” Italian, or Spanish, if so equipped). soft-key on the Phone main screen. The Uconnect® Phone will call the Only one call can be placed on hold at • Continue to follow the system last number that was dialed from your a time. prompts to complete language se- mobile phone. lection. You can also press the button to Call Continuation toggle between the active and held After selecting one of the languages, phone call. Call continuation is the progression of all prompts and voice commands will a phone call on the Uconnect® Phone be in that language. after the vehicle ignition key has been switched to OFF.

86 NOTE: After every Uconnect® NOTE: Breakdown Service (for Phone language change operation, versions/markets, where • The Emergency call may also be only the language-specific 32- provided) initiated by using the touch- name phonebook is usable. The screen. If you need Breakdown service: paired phone name is not language-specific and is usable • The emergency number dialed is • Press the button to begin. across all languages. based on the country where the • After the “Ready” prompt and the vehicle is purchased. The num- Emergency Assistance following beep, say “Breakdown ber dialed may not be appli- service.” If you are in an emergency and the cable with the available mobile mobile phone is reachable: service and area. NOTE: The Breakdown service number has to be setup before us- • Pick up the phone and manually • The Uconnect® Phone does ing. To setup, press the button dial the emergency number for slightly lower your chances of and say “Setup, Breakdown Ser- your area. successfully making a phone vice” and follow prompts. call as to that for the mobile If the phone is not reachable and the phone directly. Paging Uconnect® Phone is operational, you may reach the emergency number as To learn how to page, refer to “Work- follows: WARNING! ing with Automated Systems.” Paging works properly except for pagers of button to begin. Your phone must be turned on and • Press the certain companies, which time out a connected to the Uconnect® Phone • After the “Listening” prompt and little too soon to work properly with to allow use of this vehicle feature the following beep, say “Call Emer- the Uconnect® Phone. in emergency situations, when the gency or Dial Emergency” and the mobile phone has network coverage Voice Mail Calling Uconnect® Phone will instruct the and stays connected to the paired mobile phone to call the To learn how to access your voice Uconnect® Phone. emergency number. This feature is mail, refer to “Working with Auto- supported in the U.S., Canada, and mated Systems.” Mexico.

87 Working With Automated Systems used for navigating through an auto- • Some paging and voice mail sys- mated customer service center menu tems have system time out set- This method is used in instances structure, and to leave a number on a tings that are too short and may where one generally has to press num- pager. not allow the use of this feature. bers on the mobile phone keypad while navigating through an auto- You can also send stored mobile • Pauses, wait or other characters mated telephone system. phonebook entries as tones for fast that are supported by some and easy access to voice mail and phones are not supported over You can use your Uconnect® Phone to pager entries. For example, if you pre- Bluetooth®. These additional access a voice mail system or an auto- viously created a Phonebook entry symbols will be ignored in the mated service, such as a paging ser- with First and/or Last Name as dialing a numbered sequence. vice or automated customer service “Voicemail Password”, then if you line. Some services require immediate Barge In — Overriding Prompts press the button and say “Send response selection. In some instances, Voicemail Password” the Uconnect® The button can be used when that may be too quick for use of the Phone will then send the correspond- you wish to skip part of a prompt and Uconnect® Phone. ing phone number associated with the issue your voice command immedi- When calling a number with your phonebook entry, as tones over the ately. For example, if a prompt is ask- Uconnect® Phone that normally re- phone. ing “There are two numbers with the quires you to enter in a touch-tone name John. Say the full name” you NOTE: sequence on your mobile phone key- could press the button and say, pad, you can utilize the touchscreen • The first number encountered “John Smith” to select that option or press the button and say the for that contact will be sent. All without having to listen to the rest of word “Send” then the sequence you other numbers entered for that the voice prompt. wish to enter. For example, if required contact will be ignored. to enter your PIN followed with a • You may not hear all of the tones pound, (3746#),youcanpressthe due to mobile phone network button and say, “Send3746#.” configurations. This is normal. Saying “Send” followed by a number, or sequence of numbers, is also to be

88 Voice Response Length Dialing Using The Mobile Phone NOTE: Certain brands of mobile Keypad phones do not send the dial ring to It is possible for you to choose be- the Uconnect® Phone to play it on tween Brief and Detailed Voice Re- the vehicle audio system, so you sponse Length. WARNING! will not hear it. Under this situa- 1. Touch the “More” soft-key (where Your new vehicle has many features tion, after successfully dialing a available), then touch the “Settings” for the comfort and convenience of number the user may feel that the soft-key, you and your passengers. Only use call did not go through even such features when it is safe to do though the call is in progress. Once 2. Touch the “Display” soft-key, then so. Failure to follow this Warning your call is answered, you will scroll down to Voice Response may result in an accident involving hear the audio. Length, serious injury or death. Mute/Un-Mute (Mute ON/OFF) 3. Select either “Brief” or “Detailed” You can dial a phone number with by touching the box next to the selec- When you mute the Uconnect® your mobile phone keypad and still tion. A check-mark will appear to Phone, you will still be able to hear use the Uconnect® Phone (while dial- show your selection. the conversation coming from the ing via the mobile phone keypad, the other party, but the other party will Phone And Network Status user must exercise caution and take not be able to hear you. To mute the Indicators precautionary safety measures). By Uconnect® Phone simply touch the dialing a number with your paired Uconnect® Phone will provide notifi- Mute button on the Phone main Bluetooth® mobile phone, the audio cation to inform you of your phone screen. and network status when you are at- will be played through your vehicle's tempting to make a phone call using audio system. The Uconnect® Phone ADVANCED PHONE Uconnect® Phone. The status is given will work the same as if you dial the CONNECTIVITY number using voice a command. for network signal strength and phone Transfer Call To And From battery strength. Mobile Phone The Uconnect® Phone allows ongoing calls to be transferred from your mobile phone to the Uconnect®

89 Phone without terminating the call. • Speak normally, without pausing, • Phonebook (Mobile and Favorites) To transfer an ongoing call from your just as you would speak to a person name recognition rate is optimized paired mobile phone to the sitting a few meters away from you. when the entries are not similar. Uconnect® Phone or vice versa, press • Make sure that no one other than • You can say “O” (letter “O”) for the Transfer button on the Phone you is speaking during a voice com- “0” (zero). main screen. mand period. • Even though international dialing Connect Or Disconnect Link • Performance is maximized under: for most number combinations is Between The Uconnect® Phone supported, some shortcut dialing And Mobile Phone • low-to-medium blower setting, • low-to-medium vehicle speed, number combinations may not be If you would like to connect or discon- supported. • low road noise, nect the Bluetooth® connection be- • In a convertible vehicle, system per- tween a Uconnect® Phone paired mo- • smooth road surface, formance may be compromised bile phone and the Uconnect® Phone, • fully closed windows, with the convertible top down. follow the instructions described in • dry weather condition. your mobile phone User's Manual. Far End Audio Performance • Even though the system is designed THINGS YOU SHOULD for several different accents, the • Audio quality is maximized under: KNOW ABOUT YOUR system may not always work for • low-to-medium blower setting. Uconnect® PHONE some. • low-to-medium vehicle speed. • low road noise. Voice Command • When navigating through an automated system such as voice mail, or • smooth road surface. • For best performance, adjust the when sending a page, before speak- • fully closed windows. rearview mirror to provide at least 1 ing the digit string, make sure to • dry weather conditions, and cm gap between the overhead con- say “Send”. sole (for versions/markets, where • operation from the driver's seat. provided) and the mirror. • Storing names in your favorites • Performance, such as audio clarity, phonebook when the vehicle is not echo, and loudness to a large degree • Always wait for the beep before in motion is recommended. rely on the phone and network, and speaking. not the Uconnect® Phone. 90 • Echo at the far end can sometimes Send Messages Using Soft-Keys: be reduced by lowering the in- You can send messages using vehicle audio volume. Uconnect® Phone. To send a new • In a convertible vehicle, system per- message: formance may be compromised 1. Touch the “Phone” soft-key, with the convertible top down. 2. Touch the “messaging” soft-key Voice Text Reply then “New Message,” Uconnect® Phone can read or send Read Messages: 3. Touch one of the 18 preset mes- new messages on your phone. If you receive a new text message sages and the person you wish to send while your phone is connected to Your phone must support SMS over the message to, Bluetooth® in order to use this fea- Uconnect® Phone, an announcement ture. If the Uconnect® Phone deter- will be made to notify you that you mines your phone is not compatible have a new text message. with SMS messaging over Bluetooth® the “Messaging” button will be grayed out and the feature will not be available for use. NOTE: Uconnect® Phone SMS is only available when the vehicle is 4. If multiple numbers are available not moving. for the contact select which number you would like to have the message Once a message is received and sent, viewed or listened to, you will have the following options: 5. Press “Send” or “Cancel.” • Send a Reply • Forward • Call

91 Send Messages Using Voice Com- List of Preset Messages: Bluetooth® Communication Link mands: 1. Yes. Mobile phones have been found to 1. Press the button, lose connection to the Uconnect® 2. No. Phone. When this happens, the con- 2. After the “Listening” prompt and 3. Okay. nection can generally be reestablished the following beep, say “Send mes- by switching the mobile phone OFF/ sage to John Smith mobile,” 4. I can't talk right now. ON. Your mobile phone is recom- 3. After the system prompts you for 5. Call me. mended to remain in Bluetooth® ON what message you want to send, say mode. 6. I'll call you later. the message you wish to send or say Power-Up “List.” There are 18 preset messages. 7. I'm on my way. After switching the ignition key from While the list of defined messages are 8. Thanks. OFF to either the ON or ACC position, being read, you can interrupt the sys- 9. I'll be late. or after a language change, you must tem by pressing the button and wait at least 15 seconds prior to using saying the message you want to send. 10. I will be minutes late. the system. After the system confirms that you 11. See you in minutes. want to send your message to John 12. Stuck in traffic. Smith, your message will be sent. 13. Start without me. 14. Where are you? 15. Are you there yet? 16. I need directions. 17. I'm lost. 18. See you later.

92 Voice Tree

93 94 GENERAL INFORMATION NOTE: Take care to speak into If a command is not spoken a second the Voice Command system as time, the system will respond with an This device complies with Part 15 of calmly and normally as possible. error and give some direction as what the FCC rules and RSS 210 of Indus- The ability of the Voice Command can be said based on the context you try Canada. Operation is subject to system to recognize user voice are in. After three consecutive failures the following conditions: commands may be negatively af- of a spoken command the VR session • Changes or modifications not ex- fected by rapid speaking or a with end. raised voice level. pressly approved by the party re- Pressing the Uconnect® Voice Com- sponsible for compliance could void mand button while the system is the user's authority to operate the WARNING! speaking is known as “barging in.” equipment. Any voice commanded system The system will be interrupted, and • This device may not cause harmful should be used only in safe driving after the beep, you can say a com- interference. conditions following all applicable mand. This will become helpful once you start to learn the options. • This device must accept any inter- laws, including laws regarding ference received, including interfer- phone use. Your attention should be NOTE: At any time, you can say ence that may cause undesired op- focused on safely operating the ve- the words “Cancel” or “Help”. hicle. Failure to do so may result in eration. These commands are universal and an accident causing serious injury can be used from any menu. All other or death. VOICE COMMAND commands can be used depending Uconnect® 8.4/8.4 Nav When you press the Uconnect® Voice upon the active application. Command button, you will hear When using this system, you should a beep. The beep is your signal to give speak clearly and at a normal speak- The Uconnect® Voice Com- a command. mand system allows you to ing volume. control your AM, FM radio, If no command is spoken the system The system will best recognize your disc player, SD Card or will say one of two responses: speech if the windows are closed, and USB/iPod. • I didn't understand the heater/air conditioning fan is set to low. • I didn't get that, etc., 95 At any point, if the system does not The system handles multiple inputs in UCONNECT® VOICE recognize one of your commands, you the same phrase or sentence such as COMMANDS will be prompted to repeat it. “make a phone call” and “to Kelly Smith”. For multiple inputs in the The Uconnect® Voice Command sys- To hear available commands, press same phrase or sentence, the system tem understands two types of com- the Uconnect® Voice Command mands. Universal commands are button and say “Help”. You will identifies the topic or context and provides the associated follow-up prompt available at all times. Local com- hear available commands for the mands are available if the supported screen displayed. such as “Who do you want to call?” in the case where a phone call was re- radio mode is active. Natural Speech quested but the specific name was not Start a dialogue by pressing the Natural speech allows the user to recognized. Uconnect® Voice Command speak commands in phrases or com- The system utilizes continuous dialog; button. plete sentences. The system filters out when the system requires more infor- certain non-word utterances and mation from the user it will ask a sounds such as “ah” and “eh”. The question to which the user can re- system handles fill-in words such as “I spond without pressing the would like to”. Uconnect® Voice Command button.

96 VOICE TREE

NOTE: 2. You can replace “iPod” with 4. Available Voice Commands are any of the player sources shown in bold face and shaded 1. You can replace “AM” with “USB”, “SD Card”, “AUX” or grey. “FM” or if equipped you can say “Bluetooth”. “SW” or “LW”. 3. You can replace “950 AM” with any other AM or FM frequency, such as “98.7”.

97 NOTE: 2. Available Voice Commands are shown in bold face and shaded 1. You can replace “950 AM” with grey. any other AM or FM frequency, such as “98.7 FM”. If the vehicle is equipped you can command for “SW”, “MW”, and “LW” fre- quencies as well.

98 NOTE: 2. You can replace “8” with any 4. VR commands, Albums, Artists, track on the CD that is currently and Genre names are based on 1. You can replace the album, art- playing. Command is only the music database provided by ist, song, genre, playlist, pod- available when CD is playing. Gracenote. cast and audio book names with any corresponding names 3. Playlist, Podcast and audio 5. Available Voice Commands are on the current device that is book commands are only avail- shown in bold face and shaded playing. able when the iPod is con- grey. nected and playing.

99 NOTE: 2. You can replace “Player” with 3. Navigation commands only “Radio”, “Navigation”, work if equipped with Naviga- 1. Only available with Navigation “Phone”, “Climate”, “More” or tion. equipped vehicles. “Settings”. 4. Available Voice Commands are shown in bold face and shaded grey.

100 NOTE: 2. You can say “Find Nearest” Services”, “Hospitals”, “Park- then “Restaurant”, “Fuel”, ing”, “Airport”, “Police Sta- 1. You can also say “Find City”, “Transit”, “Lodging”, “Shop- tions”, “Fire Stations”, or “Auto “Find Favorite”, “Find Play by ping”, “Bank”, “Entertain- Dealers”. Category”, “Find Play by ment”, “Recreation”, “Attrac- Name”, “Find Recently Found”, tions”, “Community”, “Auto “Where to?” or “Go Home”.

101 NOTE: Available Voice Com- mands are shown in bold face and shaded grey.

102 NOTE: The passenger's seat will SEATS WARNING! (Continued) move up or down, forward or rear- Seats are a part of the Occupant Re- ward. • Seats should be adjusted before straint System of the vehicle. fastening the seat belts and while the vehicle is parked. Serious in- WARNING! jury or death could result from a poorly adjusted seat belt. • It is dangerous to ride in a cargo • Do not ride with the seatback re- area, inside or outside of a ve- clined so that the shoulder belt is hicle. In a collision, people riding no longer resting against your in these areas are more likely to chest. In a collision you could be seriously injured or killed. Power Seat Switches slide under the seat belt, which • Do not allow people to ride in any could result in serious injury or 1 — Seat Control area of your vehicle that is not death. equipped with seats and seat 2 — Seatback Control belts. In a collision, people riding in these areas are more likely to CAUTION! WARNING! be seriously injured or killed. Do not place any article under a • Be sure everyone in your vehicle is • Adjusting a seat while driving power seat or impede its ability to in a seat and using a seat belt may be dangerous. Moving a seat move as it may cause damage to the properly. while driving could result in loss seat controls. Seat travel may be- of control which could cause a POWER SEATS come limited if movement is collision and serious injury or stopped by an obstruction in the On models equipped with power death. seat’s path. seats, the switch is located on the out- (Continued) board side of the seat near the floor. Use this switch to move the driver's seat up or down, forward or rearward or to recline the seatback.

103 Adjusting The Seat Forward Or Reclining The Seatback CAUTION! Rearward The angle of the seatback can be ad- Do not place any article under a The seat can be adjusted both forward justed forward or rearward. Push the power seat or impede its ability to and rearward. Push the seat switch seatback switch forward or rearward, move as it may cause damage to the forward or rearward, the seat will the seat will move in the direction of seat controls. Seat travel may be- move in the direction of the switch. the switch. Release the switch when come limited if movement is Release the switch when the desired the desired position is reached. stopped by an obstruction in the position has been reached. seat’s path. Adjusting The Seat Up Or Down WARNING! POWER LUMBAR (for The height of the seats can be ad- • Adjusting a seat while driving versions/markets, where justed up or down. Pull upward or may be dangerous. Moving a seat push downward on the seat switch, while driving could result in loss provided) the seat will move in the direction of of control which could cause a Vehicles equipped with power driver the switch. Release the switch when collision and serious injury or or passenger seats may be also be the desired position is reached. death. equipped with power lumbar. The • Seats should be adjusted before Tilting The Seat Up Or Down power lumbar switch is located on the fastening the seat belts and while outboard side of the power seat. Push The angle of the seat cushion can be the vehicle is parked. Serious in- the switch forward or rearward to in- adjusted in four directions. Pull up- jury or death could result from a crease or decrease the lumbar sup- ward or push downward on the front poorly adjusted seat belt. port. Push the switch upward or or rear of the seat switch, the front or • Do not ride with the seatback re- downward to raise or lower the lum- rear of the seat cushion will move in clined so that the shoulder belt is bar support. the direction of the switch. Release the no longer resting against your switch when the desired position has chest. In a collision you could been reached. slide under the seat belt, which could result in serious injury or death.

104 WARNING! • Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin because of advanced age, chronic illness, dia- betes, spinal cord injury, medica- tion, alcohol use, exhaustion or other physical condition must ex- Power Lumbar Switch ercise care when using the seat Controls Soft-Key heater. It may cause burns even at Press the “Driver” or “Pas- HEATED SEATS (for low temperatures, especially if senger” seat soft-key once versions/markets, where used for long periods of time. to select HI-level heating. provided) • Do not place anything on the seat Press the soft-key a second or seatback that insulates against On some models, the front and rear time to select LO-level heating. Press heat, such as a blanket or cush- seats may be equipped with heaters in the soft-key a third time to shut the ion. This may cause the seat both the seat cushions and seatbacks. heating elements OFF. heater to overheat. Sitting in a The front driver and passenger heated seat that has been overheated seats are operated using the could cause serious burns due to Uconnect® System. the increased surface temperature of the seat.

Front Heated Seat Operations — Uconnect® 8.4 and 8.4 N:

Press the “Controls” soft-key located Heated Seats Soft-Keys on the bottom of the Uconnect® display. NOTE: Once a heat setting is selected, heat will be felt within two to five minutes.

105 When the HI-level setting is selected, You can choose from HI, LO or OFF the number of illuminated LEDs the heater will provide a boosted heat heat settings. Amber indicator lights changes from two to one, indicating level during the first four minutes of in each switch indicate the level of the change. The LO-level setting will operation. Then, the heat output will heat in use. Two indicator lights will turn OFF automatically after a maxi- drop to the normal HI-level. If the illuminate for HI, one for LO and mum of 45 minutes. HI-level setting is selected, the system none for OFF. will automatically switch to LO-level VENTILATED SEATS (for Press the switch once to se- after a maximum of 60 minutes of versions/markets, where lect HI-level heating. Press continuous operation. At that time, provided) the switch a second time to the display will change from HI to LO, select LO-level heating. On some models, both the driver and indicating the change. The LO-level Press the switch a third time to shut passenger seats are ventilated. Lo- setting will turn OFF automatically the heating elements OFF. cated in the seat cushion and seatback after a maximum of 45 minutes. are small fans that draw air from the NOTE: Rear Heated Seats seat surface through fine perforations • Once a heat setting is selected, in the seat cover to help keep the On some models, the two outboard heat will be felt within two to driver and front passenger cooler in seats are equipped with heated seats. five minutes. higher ambient temperatures. The heated seat switches for these seats are located on the rear of the • The engine must be running for The ventilated seats can be operated center console. There are two heated the heated seats to operate. using the Uconnect® System. seat switches that allow the rear pas- When the HI-level setting is selected, NOTE: The engine must be run- sengers to operate the seats indepen- ning for the ventilated seats to op- dently. the heater will provide a boosted heat level during the first four minutes of erate. operation. Then, the heat output will Front Ventilated Seat Operation drop to the normal HI-level. If the — Uconnect® 8.4/8.4N: HI-level setting is selected, the system will automatically switch to LO-level Press the “Controls” soft-key located after a maximum of 60 minutes of on the bottom of the Uconnect® dis- continuous operation. At that time, play.

106 movement in the event of a rear im- The AHRs will automatically return pact. Head restraints should be ad- to their normal position following a justed so that the top of the head rear impact. If the AHRs do not return restraint is located above the top of to their normal position see your au- your ear. thorized dealer immediately. To raise the head restraint, pull up- WARNING! ward on the head restraint. To lower the head restraint, press the push but- Controls Soft-Key The head restraints for all occupants must be properly adjusted ton, located at the base of the head Press the “Driver” or “Passenger” prior to operating the vehicle or restraint, and push downward on the seat soft-key once to select HI-level occupying a seat. Head restraints head restraint. ventilation. Press the soft-key a sec- should never be adjusted while the ond time to select LO-level ventila- vehicle is in motion. Driving a ve- tion. Press the soft-key a third time to hicle with the head restraints im- shut off the seat ventilation. properly adjusted or removed could cause serious injury or death in the event of a collision.

Active Head Restraints — Front Seats Push Button The front driver and passenger seats NOTE: The head restraints are equipped with Active Head Re- should only be removed by qualified technicians, for service pur- Ventilated Seats Soft-Keys straints (AHR). In the event of a rear impact the AHRs will automatically poses only. If either of the head HEAD RESTRAINTS extend forward minimizing the gap restraints require removal, see Head restraints are designed to reduce between the back of the occupants your authorized dealer. the risk of injury by restricting head head and the AHR.

107 WARNING! Do not place items over the top of the Active Head Restraint, such as coats, seat covers or portable DVD players. These items may interfere with the operation of the Active Head Restraint in the event of a collision and could result in serious Push Button Rear Seatback Loop injury or death. NOTE: The outboard head re- After releasing the seatback, it can be Rear Head Restraints straints are not adjustable. Refer folded forward. to “Occupant Restraints” in The center head restraint has two po- “Things To Know Before Starting sitions, up or down. When the center Your Vehicle” for tether routing. seat is being occupied the head restraint should be in the raised posi- FOLDING REAR SEAT tion. When there are no occupants in The rear seatbacks can be folded for- the center seat the head restraint can ward to provide an additional storage be lowered for maximum visibility for area. To fold the rear seatback, pull on the driver. the loops located on the upper seat- Folded Rear Seatback To raise the head restraint, pull up- back. When the seatback is folded to the ward on the head restraint. To lower NOTE: These loops can be tucked upright position, make sure it is the head restraint, press the push but- away when not in use. latched by strongly pulling on the top ton, located at the base of the head of the seatback above the seat strap. restraint, and push downward on the head restraint.

108 WARNING! seat, side mirrors, adjustable pedals and (2) buttons which are used to (for versions/markets, where pro- recall either of two pre-programmed • Be certain that the seatback is vided), and power tilt and telescopic memory profiles. securely locked into position. If steering column (for versions/ the seatback is not securely markets, where provided) and a set of locked into position, the seat will desired radio station presets. Your Re- not provide the proper stability mote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmit- for child seats and/or passengers. ter can also be programmed to recall An improperly latched seat could the same positions when the UN- cause serious injury. LOCK button is pressed. • The cargo area in the rear of the NOTE: vehicle (with the rear seatbacks Memory Seat Switch in the locked-up or folded down • Only one RKE transmitter can PROGRAMMING THE position) should not be used as a be linked to each of the memory play area by children when the positions. MEMORY FEATURE vehicle is in motion. They could • Passive Entry door handles can- To create a new memory profile, per- be seriously injured in a collision. form the following: Children should be seated and us- not be linked to the memory ing the proper restraint system. function. Use either the memory 1. Cycle the ignition to the RUN po- recall switch or the RKE trans- sition. DRIVER MEMORY SEAT mitter (if linked to the memory feature) to recall memory posi- 2. Adjust all memory profile settings (for versions/markets, tions 1 or 2. to desired preferences (i.e., seat, side where provided) mirror, adjustable pedals [for The memory seat switch is located on versions/markets, where provided], This feature allows the driver to store the driver's door trim panel. The power tilt and telescopic steering col- up to two different memory profiles switch consists of three buttons: The umn [for versions/markets, where for easy recall through a memory (S) button, which is used to activate provided], and radio station presets). switch. Each memory profile contains the memory save function and the (1) desired position settings for the driver 3. Press and release the SET (S) button on the memory switch.

109 4. Within five seconds, press and re- NOTE: Before programming your NOTE: Your RKE transmitters lease the MEMORY button 1 or 2. The RKE transmitters you must select can be unlinked to your memory Electronic Vehicle Information Center the “Memory To FOB” feature settings by pressing the SET (S) will display which memory position through the Uconnect® system button followed by the UNLOCK has been set. screen. Refer to “Customer- Pro- button on the RKE transmitter in grammable Features — Step 4 above. NOTE: Uconnect® Access 8.4 Settings ” in • Memory profiles can be set with- “Understanding Your Instrument MEMORY POSITION out the vehicle in PARK, but the Panel” for further information. RECALL vehicle must be in PARK to re- To program your RKE transmitters, NOTE: The vehicle must be in call a memory profile. perform the following: PARK to recall memory positions. • The Recall Memory with Remote If a recall is attempted when the 1. Cycle the ignition to the OFF posi- Key Unlock feature can be vehicle is not in PARK, a message tion. turned on and off using the will display in the EVIC. Uconnect® System, refer to 2. Select desired memory profile (1) To recall the memory settings for “Uconnect® Settings” in “Un- or (2). driver, press MEMORY button num- derstanding Your Instrument 3. Once the profile has been recalled, ber (1) on the driver's door or the Panel” for further information. press and release the SET (S) button UNLOCK button on the RKE trans- LINKING AND UNLINKING on the memory switch, then press and mitter linked to memory position 1. THE REMOTE KEYLESS release button (1) or (2) accordingly. To recall the memory setting for ENTRY TRANSMITTER TO “Memory Profile Set” (1 or 2) will driver, press MEMORY button num- display in the instrument cluster on MEMORY ber (2) on the driver's door or the vehicles equipped with the EVIC. UNLOCK button on the RKE trans- Your RKE transmitters can be pro- 4. Press and release the LOCK but- mitter linked to memory position 2. grammed to recall one of two pre- ton on the RKE transmitter within 10 A recall can be cancelled by pressing programmed memory profiles by seconds. any of the MEMORY buttons (S, 1, or pressing the UNLOCK button on the 2) on the driver's door during a recall. RKE transmitter. When a recall is cancelled, the driver

110 seat, side mirror, adjustable pedals • When you cycle the ignition to the TO OPEN AND CLOSE (for versions/markets, where pro- OFF position, the driver seat will THE HOOD vided), and power tilt and telescopic move to a position 8 mm forward of steering column (for versions/ the rear stop if the driver seat posi- Two latches must be released to open markets, where provided) stop mov- tion is between 23 mm and 68 mm the hood. ing. A delay of one second will occur forward of the rear stop. The seat 1. Pull the hood release lever located before another recall can be selected. will return to its previously set po- under the left side of the instrument sition when you place the ignition panel. EASY ENTRY/EXIT SEAT to the ACC or RUN position. (Available With Memory Seat Only) • The Easy Entry/Easy Exit feature is disabled when the driver seat po- This feature provides automatic sition is less than 23 mm forward of driver seat positioning to enhance the rear stop. At this position, there driver mobility when entering and ex- is no benefit to the driver by moving iting the vehicle. the seat for Easy Exit or Easy En- try. The distance the driver seat moves Hood Release Lever depends on where you have the driver Each stored memory setting will have 2. Move to the outside of the vehicle seat positioned when you place the an associated Easy Entry and Easy and push the safety catch to the left. ignition to the OFF position. Exit position. The safety catch is located under the • When you cycle the ignition to the NOTE: The Easy Entry/Easy Exit center front edge of the hood. OFF position, the driver seat will feature can be enabled or disabled move about 60 mm rearward if the using the Uconnect® System, refer driver seat position is greater than to “Uconnect® Settings” in “Un- or equal to 68 mm forward of the derstanding Your Instrument rear stop. The seat will return to its Panel” for further information. previously set position when you place the ignition into the ACC or RUN position. Hood Safety Latch 111 NOTE: Your vehicle may be LIGHTS Rotate the headlight switch clockwise equipped with an Active Hood Sys- to the first detent for parking light tem. Refer to “Occupant Re- HEADLIGHT SWITCH and instrument panel light operation. straints” in “Things To Know Be- Rotate the headlight switch to the sec- fore Starting Your Vehicle” for The headlight switch is located ond detent for headlight, parking further information. on the left side of the instru- light and instrument panel light op- ment panel. This switch con- eration. CAUTION! trols the operation of the headlights, AUTOMATIC HEADLIGHTS parking lights, instrument panel To prevent possible damage, do not lights, instrument panel light dim- This system automatically turns the slam the hood to close it. Lower the ming, interior lights and fog lights. headlights on or off according to am- hood until it is open approximately bient light levels. To turn the system 15 cm, and then drop it. This NOTE: In certain European on, rotate the headlight switch coun- should secure both latches. Never countries, the parking light feature terclockwise to the AUTO position. drive your vehicle unless the hood is will only operate with the ignition When the system is on, the headlight fully closed, with both latches en- OFF, or with either the fog lamps or time delay feature is also on. This gaged. headlights also ON. Regardless of means the headlights will stay on for ignition switch position, the park- up to 90 seconds after you place the ing lights will remain ON as long as ignition into the OFF position. To turn WARNING! the switch is in this first detent. the automatic system off, move the Be sure the hood is fully latched headlight switch out of the AUTO po- before driving your vehicle. If the sition. hood is not fully latched, it could open when the vehicle is in motion NOTE: The engine must be run- and block your vision. Failure to ning before the headlights will follow this warning could result in come on in the automatic mode. serious injury or death.

Headlight Switch

112 HEADLIGHTS ON WITH The delay interval begins when the night by automating high beam con- WIPERS (Available With headlight switch is turned off. trol through the use of a digital camera mounted on the inside rearview Automatic Headlights Only) If you turn the headlights or parking mirror. This camera detects vehicle lights on, or place the ignition in ACC When this feature is active, the head- specific light and automatically or RUN, the system will cancel the lights will turn on approximately 10 switches from high beams to low delay. seconds after the wipers are turned on beams until the approaching vehicle if the headlight switch is placed in the If you turn the headlights off before is out of view. AUTO position. In addition, the head- the ignition, they will turn off in the NOTE: lights will turn off when the wipers are normal manner. turned off if they were turned on by NOTE: • The Automatic High Beam sys- this feature. tem can be turned on or off using • The lights must be turned off the Uconnect® System, refer to NOTE: The Headlights On with within 45 seconds of placing the “Uconnect® Settings” in “Un- Wipers feature can be turned on or ignition in the OFF position to derstanding Your Instrument off using the Uconnect® System, activate this feature. Panel” for further information. refer to “Uconnect® Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument • The headlight delay time is pro- • Broken, muddy, or obstructed Panel” for further information. grammable using the headlights and taillights of ve- Uconnect® System, refer to HEADLIGHT TIME DELAY hicles in the field of view will “Uconnect® Settings” in “Un- cause the high beams to remain This feature provides the safety of derstanding Your Instrument on longer and not automatically headlight illumination for up to 90 Panel” for further information. switch to low beams until you seconds (programmable) when leav- AUTOMATIC HIGH BEAM are closer to the approaching ve- ing your vehicle in an unlit area. hicle. Also, dirt, film, and other (for versions/markets, obstructions on the windshield To activate the delay feature, place where provided) or camera lens will cause the the ignition in the OFF position while system to function improperly. the headlights are still on. Then, turn The Automatic High Beam system off the headlights within 45 seconds. provides increased forward lighting at

113 If the windshield or Automatic High DAYTIME RUNNING to provide increased illumination in Beam mirror is replaced, the Auto- LIGHTS (for versions/ the direction the vehicle is steering. matic High Beam mirror must be re- markets, where provided) NOTE: aimed to ensure proper performance. See your local authorized dealer. DRLs come ON when the vehicle is • Each time the Adaptive Head- running and shifted out of park, the light System is turned on, the To Activate headlights are OFF and the parking headlights will initialize by per- 1. Turn the headlight switch to the brake is OFF. The headlight switch forming a brief sequence of rota- AUTO headlight position. must be used for normal nighttime tions. driving. If a turn signal is activated, • The Adaptive Headlight System 2. Push the multifunction lever away the DRL lamp on the same side of the is active only when the vehicle is from you (toward front of vehicle) to vehicle will turn off for the duration of moving forward. engage the high beam mode. the turn signal activation. Once the The Adaptive Headlight System NOTE: This system will not acti- turn signal is no longer active, the can be turned On or Off using the vate until the vehicle is at or above DRL lamp will illuminate. Uconnect® System, refer to 32 km/h. NOTE: Depending on your area's “Uconnect® Settings” in “Under- To Deactivate regulations, DRLs may be able to standing Your Instrument Panel” be turned on and off. The DRLs for further information. 1. Pull the multifunction lever to- can be turned on and off using the ward you (or rearward in car) to Uconnect® System, refer to LIGHTS-ON REMINDER manually deactivate the system (nor- “Uconnect® Settings” in “Under- If the headlights or parking lights are mal operation of low beams). standing Your Instrument Panel” on after the ignition is placed in the 2. Push back on the multifunction for further information. OFF position, a chime will sound to lever once again to reactivate the sys- ADAPTIVE BI-XENON alert the driver when the driver's door tem. is opened. HIGH INTENSITY DISCHARGE HEADLIGHTS This system automatically swivels the headlight beam pattern horizontally 114 FOG LIGHTS MULTIFUNCTION LEVER NOTE: The multifunction lever controls the • If either light remains on and The fog light switch is built operation of the turn signals, head- does not flash, or there is a very into the headlight switch. light beam selection and passing fast flash rate, check for a defec- To activate the fog lights, lights. The multifunction lever is lo- tive outside light bulb. If an in- turn the headlamp switch to cated on the left side of the steering dicator fails to light when the the park lamp or headlamp position. column. lever is moved, it would suggest Press the headlight switch once for that the indicator bulb is defec- front fog lights, press the switch a tive. second time for front and rear fog • A “Turn Signal On” message will lights. Pressing the switch a third time appear in the EVIC (for will deactivate the rear fog lights, and versions/markets, where pro- a fourth time will deactivate the front vided) and a continuous chime fog lights. Turning the headlight will sound if the vehicle is driven switch off will also deactivate the fog more than 1.6 km with either lights. Multifunction Lever turn signal on. An indicator light in the instrument TURN SIGNALS cluster illuminates when the fog lights LANE CHANGE ASSIST Move the multifunction lever up or are turned on. Tap the lever up or down once, with- down and the arrows on each side of out moving beyond the detent, and NOTE: The front fog lights will the instrument cluster flash to show the turn signal (right or left) will flash activate automatically when turn- proper operation of the front and rear three times then automatically turn ing on the position lights or the low turn signal lights. beam headlights if previously de- off. activated by turning the headlight switch off. The rear fog lights will only turn on by operating the switch as previously described.

115 HIGH/LOW BEAM SWITCH FRONT MAP/READING Push the multifunction lever away LIGHTS from you to switch the headlights to The front map/reading lights are high beam. Pull the multifunction le- mounted in the overhead console. ver toward you to switch the headlights back to low beam. FLASH-TO-PASS Front Map/Reading Light Switches You can signal another vehicle with your headlights by lightly pulling the AMBIENT LIGHT multifunction lever toward you. This The overhead console is equipped will turn on the high beams headlights with an ambient light feature. This until the lever is released. Front Map/Reading Lights light casts illumination for improved COURTESY LIGHTS Each light can be turned on by press- visibility of the floor center console ing a switch on either side of the con- and PRNDL area. The courtesy lights can be turned on sole. These switches are backlit for by pressing the top corner of the lens. night time visibility. To turn the lights To turn the lights off, press the lens a off, press the switch a second time. second time. The lights will also turn on when the UNLOCK button on the Remote Key- less Entry (RKE) is pressed.

Ambient Light INTERIOR LIGHTS The interior lights come on when a Courtesy Lights door is opened.

116 To protect the battery, the interior upward will increase the brightness of Dome Light Position lights will turn off automatically 10 the instrument panel lights and Rotate the left dimmer control com- minutes after the ignition switch is lighted cupholders. pletely upward to the second detent to moved to the LOCK position. This turn on the interior lights. The inte- will occur if the interior lights were rior lights will remain on when the switched on manually or are on be- dimmer control is in this position. cause a door is open. This includes the glove box light, but not the trunk Interior Light Defeat (OFF) light. To restore interior light opera- Rotate the left dimmer control to the tion, either turn the ignition switch extreme bottom OFF position. The ON or cycle the light switch. interior lights will remain off when Dimmer Controls Instrument Panel Dimmer the doors are open. Ambient Light Control The dimmer control is part of the Parade Mode (Daytime Brightness headlight switch and is located on the Rotate the right dimmer control up- Feature) ward or downward to increase or de- left side of the instrument panel. Rotate the left dimmer control up- crease the brightness of the door ward to the first detent. This feature handle lights and ambient light lo- brightens all text displays such as the cated in the overhead console. odometer, EVIC (for versions/ markets, where provided), and radio when the parking lights or headlights are on. WINDSHIELD WIPERS Dimmer Controls AND WASHERS With the parking lights or headlights on, rotating the left dimmer control The multifunction lever operates the Door Handle/Ambient Light Dimmer windshield wipers and washer when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN

117 or ACC position. The multifunction delay interval. There are four delay CAUTION! (Continued) lever is located on the left side of the settings, which allow you to regulate steering column. • In cold weather, always turn off the wipe interval from a minimum of the wiper switch and allow the one cycle every second to a maximum wipers to return to the “Park” of approximately 18 seconds between position before turning off the en- cycles. The delay intervals will double gine. If the wiper switch is left on in duration when the vehicle speed is and the wipers freeze to the wind- 16 km/h or less. shield, damage to the wiper motor may occur when the vehicle is MIST FEATURE restarted. Rotate the end of the lever downward Windshield Wiper/Washer Control • Always remove any buildup of to the Mist position to activate a single snow that prevents the wind- Rotate the end of the multifunction wipe cycle to clear off road mist or shield wiper blades from return- lever to the first detent, past the inter- spray from a passing vehicle. The ing to the off position. If the wind- mittent settings for low-speed wiper wipers will continue to operate until shield wiper control is turned off operation, or to the second detent past you release the multifunction lever. and the blades cannot return to the intermittent settings for high- the off position, damage to the NOTE: The mist feature does not speed wiper operation. wiper motor may occur. activate the washer pump; therefore, no washer fluid will be CAUTION! INTERMITTENT WIPER sprayed on the windshield. The SYSTEM wash function must be used in or- • Turn the windshield wipers off der to spray the windshield with when driving through an auto- Use the intermittent wiper when washer fluid. matic car wash. Damage to the weather conditions make a single windshield wipers may result if wiping cycle with a variable pause WINDSHIELD WASHERS the wiper control is left in any between cycles desirable. Rotate the To use the washer, push the multi- position other than off. end of the multifunction lever to the function lever inward (toward the first detent position, and then turn the (Continued) steering column) and hold it for as end of the lever to select the desired long as washer spray is desired.

118 If you activate the washer while the feature is especially useful for road NOTE: windshield wiper control is in the de- splash or over spray from the wind- • The Rain Sensing feature will lay range, the wipers will operate for shield washers of the vehicle ahead. not operate when the wiper two wipe cycles after releasing the Rotate the end of the multifunction speed is in the low or high posi- lever and then resume the intermit- lever to one of four settings to activate tion. tent interval previously selected. this feature. • The Rain Sensing feature may If you activate the washer while the The sensitivity of the system can be not function properly when ice windshield wiper is turned off, the adjusted with the multifunction lever. or dried salt water is present on wipers will operate for three wipe Wiper delay position 1 is the least the windshield. cycles and then turn off. sensitive, and wiper delay position 4 is the most sensitive. Setting 3 should be • The use of products containing used for normal rain conditions. Set- WARNING! wax or silicone may reduce rain tings 1 and 2 can be used if the driver sensor performance. Sudden loss of visibility through desires less wiper sensitivity. Settings The Rain Sensing system has protec- the windshield could lead to a col- 4 can be used if the driver desires tive features for the wiper blades and lision. You might not see other ve- more sensitivity. The rain sense wip- arms. It will not operate under the hicles or other obstacles. To avoid ers will automatically change between following conditions: sudden icing of the windshield dur- an intermittent wipe, slow wipe and a ing freezing weather, warm the fast wipe depending on the amount of • Low Temperature Wipe Inhibit windshield with the defroster be- moisture that is sensed on the wind- — The Rain Sensing feature will fore and during windshield washer shield. Place the wiper switch in the not operate when the ignition is use. OFF position when not using the sys- placed in the RUN position, the ve- tem. hicle is stationary and the outside RAIN SENSING WIPERS temperature is below 0°C, unless (for versions/markets, The Rain Sensing feature can be turned on and off using the the wiper control on the multifunc- where provided) Uconnect® System, refer to tion lever is moved, the vehicle speed becomes greater than 0 km/h This feature senses moisture on the “Uconnect® Settings” in “Under- or the outside temperature rises windshield and automatically acti- standing Your Instrument Panel” for above freezing. vates the wipers for the driver. The further information. 119 • Neutral Wipe Inhibit — The Rain NOTE: After turning the ignition wheel upward or downward as de- Sensing feature will not operate switch and headlights ON, the sired. To lengthen or shorten the when the ignition is placed in the headlight washers will operate on steering column, pull the steering RUN position, the transmission the first spray of the windshield wheel outward or push it inward as shift lever is in the NEUTRAL po- washer and then every eleventh desired. To lock the steering column sition and the vehicle speed is less spray after that. in position, push the control handle than 8 km/h, unless the wiper con- inward until fully engaged. trol on the multifunction lever is TILT/TELESCOPING moved or the shift lever is moved STEERING COLUMN WARNING! out of the NEUTRAL position. This feature allows you to tilt the Do not adjust the steering column HEADLIGHT WASHERS steering column upward or down- while driving. Adjusting the steer- ward. It also allows you to lengthen or ing column while driving or driving The multifunction lever operates the shorten the steering column. The tilt/ with the steering column unlocked, headlight washers when the ignition telescoping control handle is located could cause the driver to lose con- switch is in the ON position and the below the steering wheel at the end of trol of the vehicle. Failure to follow headlights are turned on. The multi- the steering column. this warning may result in serious function lever is located on the left injury or death. side of the steering column. To use the headlight washers, push POWER TILT/ the multifunction lever inward (to- TELESCOPING ward the steering column) and release it. The headlight washers will spray a STEERING COLUMN (for timed high-pressure spray of washer versions/markets, where fluid onto each headlight lens. In ad- provided) dition, the windshield washers will Tilt/Telescoping Control Handle This feature allows you to tilt the spray the windshield and the wind- To unlock the steering column, pull steering column upward or down- shield wipers will cycle. the control handle outward. To tilt the ward. It also allows you to lengthen or steering column, move the steering shorten the steering column. The

120 power tilt/telescoping steering col- WARNING! The heated steering wheel can be umn switch is located below the mul- turned on and off using the tifunction lever on the steering col- Do not adjust the steering column Uconnect® System. umn. while driving. Adjusting the steering column while driving or driving Touch the “Controls” soft-key then with the steering column unlocked, touch the “Heated Steering Wheel” could cause the driver to lose con- soft-key to turn on the heated steering trol of the vehicle. Failure to follow wheel. Press the “Heated Steering this warning may result in serious Wheel” soft-key a second time to turn injury or death. the heated steering wheel off.

HEATED STEERING Power Tilt/Telescoping Steering WHEEL (for Switch versions/markets, where To tilt the steering column, move the provided) switch up or down as desired. To lengthen or shorten the steering col- The steering wheel contains a heating element that helps warm your hands umn, pull the switch toward you or Controls Soft-Key push the switch away from you as in cold weather. The heated steering desired. wheel has only one temperature setting. Once the heated steering wheel NOTE: For vehicles equipped with has been turned on it will operate for Driver Memory Seat, you can use approximately 80 minutes before au- your Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) tomatically shutting off. The heated transmitter or the memory switch steering wheel can shut off early or on the driver's door trim panel to may not turn on when the steering return the tilt/telescopic steering wheel is already warm. column to pre-programmed posi- Heated Steering Wheel Soft-Key tions. Refer to “Driver Memory Seat” in this section. 121 NOTE: The engine must be run- ADJUSTABLE PEDALS Press the switch rearward to move the ning for the heated steering wheel (for versions/markets, pedals rearward (toward the driver). to operate. where provided) • The pedals can be adjusted with the ignition OFF. The adjustable pedals system is de- WARNING! cannot signed to allow a greater range of • The pedals be adjusted • Persons who are unable to feel driver comfort for steering wheel tilt when the vehicle is in REVERSE or pain to the skin because of ad- and seat position. This feature allows when the Electronic Speed Control vanced age, chronic illness, dia- the brake and accelerator pedals to System is on. The following mes- betes, spinal cord injury, medica- move toward or away from the driver sages will be displayed on vehicles tion, alcohol use, exhaustion or to provide improved position with the equipped with the Electronic Ve- other physical condition must ex- steering wheel. hicle Information System (EVIC) if ercise care when using the seat the pedals are attempted to be ad- heater. It may cause burns even at The switch is located on the front side justed when the system is locked low temperatures, especially if of the driver's seat cushion side shield. out :Adjustable Pedal Disabled — used for long periods of time. Cruise Control Engaged or Adjust- • Do not place anything on the seat able Pedal Disabled — Vehicle In or seatback that insulates against Reverse. heat, such as a blanket or cush- NOTE: ion. This may cause the seat heater to overheat. Sitting in a • Always adjust the pedals to a po- seat that has been overheated sition that allows full pedal could cause serious burns due to travel. Adjustable Pedals Switch the increased surface tempera- • Further small adjustments may ture of the seat. Press the switch forward to move the be necessary to find the best pos- pedals forward (toward the front of sible seat/pedal position. the vehicle).

122 NOTE: For vehicles equipped ELECTRONIC SPEED TO ACTIVATE with Driver Memory Seat, you can CONTROL use your Remote Keyless Entry Push the ON/OFF button. The Cruise (RKE) transmitter or the memory When engaged, the Electronic Speed Indicator Light in the Electronic Ve- switch on the driver's door trim Control takes over accelerator opera- hicle Information Center (EVIC) will panel to return the adjustable ped- tions at speeds greater than 40 km/h. illuminate. To turn the system off, als to pre-programmed positions. push the ON/OFF button a second Refer to “Driver Memory Seat” in time. The Cruise Indicator Light will “Understanding The Features Of turn off. The system should be turned Your Vehicle” for further informa- off when not in use. tion. WARNING! CAUTION! Leaving the Electronic Speed Con- trol system on when not in use is Do not place any article under the Electronic Speed Control Buttons adjustable pedals or impede its dangerous. You could accidentally 1 — ON/OFF 2 — RES + set the system or cause it to go ability to move as it may cause 4 — CANCEL 3 — SET - damage to the pedal controls. Pedal faster than you want. You could travel may become limited if move- lose control and have an accident. ment is stopped by an obstruction NOTE: In order to ensure proper Always leave the system OFF when in the adjustable pedal's path. operation, the Electronic Speed you are not using it. Control System has been designed to shut down if multiple Speed TO SET A DESIRED SPEED WARNING! Control functions are operated at Turn the Electronic Speed Control the same time. If this occurs, the Do not adjust the pedals while the ON. When the vehicle has reached the Electronic Speed Control System vehicle is moving. You could lose desired speed, press the SET (-) but- can be reactivated by pushing the control and have an accident. Al- ton and release. Release the accelera- Electronic Speed Control ON/OFF ways adjust the pedals while the tor and the vehicle will operate at the button and resetting the desired vehicle is parked. selected speed. vehicle set speed.

123 NOTE: The vehicle should be continue to increase until the button is Each subsequent tap of the button traveling at a steady speed and on released, then the new set speed will results in a decrease of 2.0 km/h level ground before pressing the be established. (3.0L Diesel Engine) or 1.6 km/h SET button. Pressing the RES (+) button once will (3.6L Engine) TO DEACTIVATE result in the following set speeds: TO ACCELERATE FOR A soft tap on the brake pedal, pushing • 2.0 km/h (3.0L Diesel Engine) PASSING the CANCEL button, or normal brake • 1.6 km/h (3.6L Engine) Press the accelerator as you would pressure while slowing the vehicle will normally. When the pedal is released, Each subsequent tap of the button deactivate Electronic Speed Control the vehicle will return to the set speed. without erasing the set speed memory. results in an increase of 2.0 km/h Pressing the ON/OFF button or turn- (3.0L Diesel Engine) or 1.6 km/h Using Electronic Speed Control ing the ignition switch OFF erases the (3.6L Engine). On Hills set speed memory. To decrease speed while the Elec- The transmission may downshift on TO RESUME SPEED tronic Speed Control is set, push the hills to maintain the vehicle set speed. SET (-) button. If the button is con- NOTE: The Electronic Speed To resume a previously set speed, tinually held in the SET (-) position, Control system maintains speed up push the RES (+) button and release. the set speed will continue to decrease and down hills. A slight speed Resume can be used at any speed until the button is released. Release change on moderate hills is nor- above 32 km/h. the button when the desired speed is mal. TO VARY THE SPEED reached, and the new set speed will be established. On steep hills, a greater speed loss or SETTING gain may occur so it may be prefer- Pressing the SET (-) button once will able to drive without Electronic Speed When the Electronic Speed Control is result in the following decrease in set Control. set, you can increase speed by pushing speed: the RES (+) button. If the button is continually pressed, the set speed will • 2.0 km/h (3.0L Diesel Engine) • 1.6 km/h (3.6L Engine)

124 WARNING! ACC utilizes a radar sensor designed WARNING! to detect a vehicle directly ahead of Electronic Speed Control can be you. • Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) is dangerous where the system cannot a convenience system. It is not a maintain a constant speed. Your ve- NOTE: substitute for active driving in- hicle could go too fast for the con- • If the sensor does not detect a volvement. It is always the driv- ditions, and you could lose control vehicle ahead of you, ACC will er’s responsibility to be attentive and have an accident. Do not use maintain a fixed set speed. of road, traffic, and weather con- Electronic Speed Control in heavy ditions, vehicle speed, distance to traffic or on roads that are winding, • If the ACC sensor detects a ve- the vehicle ahead; and, most im- icy, snow-covered or slippery. hicle ahead, ACC will apply lim- portantly, brake operation to en- ited braking or acceleration (not sure safe operation of the vehicle ADAPTIVE CRUISE to exceed the original set speed) under all road conditions. Your automatically to maintain a pre- CONTROL (ACC) (for complete attention is always reset following distance, while quired while driving to maintain versions/markets, where matching the speed of the ve- safe control of your vehicle. Fail- provided) hicle ahead. ure to follow these warnings can Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) in- result in a collision and death or creases the driving convenience pro- serious personal injury. vided by cruise control while traveling • The ACC system: on highways and major roadways. • Does not react to pedestrians, on- However, it is not a safety system and coming vehicles, and stationary not designed to prevent collisions. objects (e.g., a stopped vehicle in a traffic jam or a disabled ve- ACC will allow you to keep cruise hicle). control engaged in light to moderate traffic conditions without the con- (Continued) stant need to reset your cruise control.

125 The Cruise Control system has two WARNING! (Continued) control modes: • Cannot take street, traffic, and weather conditions into account, • Adaptive Cruise Control mode for and may be limited upon adverse maintaining an appropriate dis- sight distance conditions. tance between vehicles. • Does not always fully recognize • Normal (fixed speed) cruise control complex driving conditions, mode is for cruising at a constant which can result in wrong or preset speed. For additional infor- Adaptive Cruise Control Buttons missing distance warnings. mation, refer to “Normal (Fixed 1 — DISTANCE SETTING • Can only apply a maximum of Speed) Cruise Control Mode” in 2 — RES + 40% of the vehicle’s braking ca- this section. 3—SET- pability, and will not bring the 4 — CANCEL NOTE: The system will not react vehicle to a complete stop. You 5 — ON/OFF to preceding vehicles. Always be 6 — MODE should switch off the ACC system: aware of the mode selected. • When driving in fog, heavy rain, heavy snow, sleet, heavy traffic, You can change the mode by using the NOTE: Any chassis/suspension and complex driving situations Cruise Control buttons. The two con- modifications to the vehicle will (i.e., in highway construction trol modes function differently. Al- effect the performance of the zones). ways confirm which mode is selected. Adaptive Cruise Control. • When entering a turn lane or ADAPTIVE CRUISE ACTIVATING ADAPTIVE highway off ramp; when driving CRUISE CONTROL (ACC) on roads that are winding, icy, CONTROL (ACC) snow-covered, slippery, or have OPERATION You can only activate ACC if the ve- steep uphill or downhill slopes. The speed control buttons (located on hicle speed is above 30 km/h. • When towing a trailer up or down the right side of the steering wheel) When the system is turned on and in steep slopes. operates the ACC system. the READY state, the Electronic Ve- • When circumstances do not allow hicle Information Center (EVIC) dis- safe driving at a constant speed. plays “Adaptive Cruise Ready.”

126 When the system is OFF, the EVIC To turn the system OFF, push and TO SET A DESIRED ACC displays “Adaptive Cruise Control release the ON/OFF button again. At SPEED Off.” this time, the system will turn off and the EVIC will display “Adaptive When the vehicle reaches the speed NOTE: You cannot enable ACC Cruise Control (ACC) OFF.” desired, push the SET - button and under the following conditions: release. The message “ACC Set” will • When you apply the brakes. display in the EVIC and then will display the set speed. • When the parking brake is set. • When the automatic transmission is in PARK, REVERSE or NEUTRAL. • When pushing the RES + button without a previously set speed in Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) OFF memory. TO ACTIVATE WARNING! ACC Set Leaving the Adaptive Cruise Con- Push and release the ON/OFF button. Remove your foot from the accelera- trol (ACC) system on when not in The ACC menu in the EVIC displays tor pedal. If you do not, the vehicle use is dangerous. You could acci- “Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) may continue to accelerate beyond dentally set the system or cause it to Ready.” the set speed. If this occurs: go faster than you want. You could lose control and have a collision. • The message “DRIVER OVER- Always leave the system off when RIDE” will display in the EVIC. you are not using it. • The system will not be controlling the distance between your vehicle and the vehicle ahead. The vehicle

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Ready 127 speed will only be determined by NOTE: If ACC is resumed or set WARNING! the position of the accelerator with the ESC/TCS off, ESC will au- pedal. tomatically be re-engaged. The Resume function should only be used if traffic and road conditions permit. Resuming a set speed that is too high or too low for prevailing traffic and road conditions could cause the vehicle to accelerate or decelerate too sharply for safe operation. Failure to follow these warnings can result in a colli- Driver Override Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) sion and death or serious personal injury. TO CANCEL Cancelled TO TURN OFF The system will disable ACC without TO VARY THE SPEED erasing the memory if: The system will turn off and erase the SETTING set speed in memory if: • You softly tap the brake pedal. While ACC is set, you can increase the • You push and release the ON/OFF set speed by pressing and holding the • You depress the brake pedal. button. RES + button. The increase in set speed is reflected in the EVIC display: • You press the CANCEL switch. • You turn OFF the ignition. While in US Mode, if the button is • An Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) TO RESUME SPEED event occurs. continually pressed, the set speed will Press the RES + button and release. continue to increase in 8 km/h incre- • If the transmission is shifted into Then remove your foot from the ac- ments. While in Metric Mode, if the NEUTRAL. celerator pedal. The EVIC will dis- button is continually pressed, the set • The Electronic Stability Control/ play the last set speed. speed will continue to increase in Traction Control System (ESC/ 10 km/h increments. NOTE: You can resume ACC from TCS) activates. a minimum of 30 km/h.

128 While in US Mode, pressing the RES + 1.0 km/h decrease in set speed. Each SETTING THE button once will result in a 1.6 km/h subsequent tap of the button results in FOLLOWING DISTANCE IN increase in set speed. Each subse- decrease of 1.0 km/h. ACC quent tap of the button results in in- NOTE: crease of 1.6 km/h. While in Metric The specified following distance for Mode, pressing the RES + button once • When you use the SET - button ACC can be set by varying the distance setting between 3 (long), 2 (me- will result in a 1.0 km/h increase in set to decelerate, if the engine’s dium), and 1 (short). Using this dis- speed. Each subsequent tap of the braking power does not slow the tance setting and the vehicle speed, button results in increase of 1.0 km/h. vehicle sufficiently to reach the ACC calculates and sets the distance set speed, the brake system will While ACC is set, the set speed can be to the vehicle ahead. This distance automatically slow the vehicle. decreased by pressing and holding the setting displays in the EVIC. SET - button. • The ACC system can only apply a If the button is held while in US Mode, maximum of 25% of the vehi- the set speed will continue to decrease cle's braking capability and will in 8 km/h increments. not bring the vehicle to a complete stop. If the button is held while in Metric Mode, the set speed will continue to • The ACC system maintains set decrease in 10 km/h increments. speed when driving up hill and down hill. However, a slight Distance Set 3 (long) While in US Mode, pressing the SET - speed change on moderate hills button once will result in a 1.6 km/h is normal. In addition, down- decrease in set speed. Each subse- shifting may occur while climb- quent tap of the button results in de- ing uphill or descending down- crease of 1.6 km/h. hill. This is normal operation While in Metric Mode, pressing the and necessary to maintain set SET - button once will result in a speed.

Distance Set 2 (medium)

129 • The vehicle ahead moves out of your lane or view of the sensor. • The vehicle ahead slows to a speed below 25 km/h and the system automatically disengages itself. • The distance setting is changed. • The system disengages. (Refer to Distance Set 1 (short) Brake Alert 3 the information on ACC Activa- To change the distance setting, press tion). the Distance button and release. Each time the button is pressed, the dis- The maximum braking applied by tance setting adjusts between 3 ACC is limited; however, the driver (long), 2 (medium), and 1 (short). can always apply the brakes manually, if necessary. If there is no vehicle ahead, the vehicle will maintain the set speed. If a slower NOTE: The brake lights will illu- moving vehicle is detected in the same minate whenever the ACC system lane, the EVIC displays the “Sensed applies the brakes. Brake Alert 2 Vehicle Indicator” icon, and the sys- A Proximity Warning will alert the tem adjusts vehicle speed automati- driver if ACC predicts that its maxi- cally to maintain the distance setting, mum braking level is not sufficient to regardless of the set speed. maintain the set distance. If this oc- The vehicle will then maintain the set curs, a visual alert “BRAKE” will flash distance until: in the EVIC and a chime will sound while ACC continues to apply its maxi- • The vehicle ahead accelerates to a mum braking capacity. When this oc- speed above the set speed. curs, you should immediately apply Brake Alert 1 the brakes as needed to maintain a safe distance from the vehicle ahead. 130 OVERTAKE AID ADAPTIVE CRUISE ACC SET When driving with ACC engaged and CONTROL (ACC) MENU • When ACC is set, the set speed will following a target vehicle, the system The EVIC displays the current ACC display. will provide an additional accelera- system settings. The EVIC is located • The set speed will continue to dis- tion to assist in passing vehicles in in the upper part of the instrument play in place of the odometer read- front. This additional acceleration is cluster between the speedometer and ing when changing the EVIC dis- triggered when the driver utilizes the the tachometer. The information it play while ACC is set. left turn signal. In locations with left displays depends on ACC system sta- hand drive traffic, Overtake Aid is tus. The ACC screen will display once active only when passing on the left again if any ACC activity occurs, UP and DOWN Buttons hand side of the Target vehicles. which may include any of the follow- Press the MENU button (located on ing: When a vehicle goes from a location the steering wheel) repeatedly until with left hand drive traffic to a loca- • Set Speed Change one of the following displays in the tion with right hand drive traffic, the EVIC: • Distance Setting Change ACC system will automatically detect traffic direction. In this condition, Adaptive Cruise Control Off • System Cancel Overtake Aid is active only when • When ACC is deactivated, the dis- • Driver Override passing on the right side of the Target play will read “Adaptive Cruise vehicle. This additional acceleration • System Off Control Off.” is triggered when the driver utilizes • ACC Proximity Warning the right turn signal. In this condition Adaptive Cruise Control Ready • ACC Unavailable Warning the ACC system will no longer provide • When ACC is activated but the ve- Overtake Aid on the left side until it hicle speed setting has not been se- • The EVIC will return to the last determines that the vehicle has moved lected, the display will read “Adap- display selected after five seconds back to a location with left hand drive tive Cruise Control Ready.” of no ACC display activity. traffic.

131 DISPLAY WARNINGS AND NOTE: If the ACC “Clean Radar • Do not attach or install any acces- MAINTENANCE Sensor In Front Of Vehicle” warn- sories near the sensor, including ing is active Normal (Fixed Speed) transparent material or aftermar- “Clean Radar Sensor In Front Of Cruise Control is still available. ket grilles. Doing so could cause an Vehicle” Warning For additional information refer to ACC system failure or malfunction. The ACC “Clean Radar Sensor In “Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control Mode” in this section. Front Of Vehicle” warning will dis- When the condition that deactivated play when conditions temporarily If weather conditions are not a factor, the system is no longer present, the limit system performance. This most the driver should examine the sensor. system will return to the “Adaptive often occurs at times of poor visibility, It may require cleaning or removal of Cruise Control Off” state and will re- such as in snow or heavy rain. The an obstruction. The sensor is located sume function by simply reactivating ACC system may also become tempo- in the center of the vehicle behind the it. rarily blinded due to obstructions, lower grille. such as mud, dirt or ice. In these NOTE: Installing a vehicle front- cases, the EVIC will display “Clean To keep the ACC System operating end protector or an aftermarket Radar Sensor In Front Of Vehicle” properly, it is important to note the grille or modifying the grille is not and the system will deactivate. following maintenance items: recommended. Doing so may block the sensor and inhibit ACC • Always keep the sensor clean. Care- The “Clean Radar Sensor In Front Of operation. Vehicle” message can sometimes be fully wipe the sensor lens with a soft displayed while driving in highly re- cloth. Be cautious not to damage ACC Unavailable Warning the sensor lens. flective areas (i.e. tunnels with reflec- If the system turns off, and the EVIC tive tiles, or ice and snow). The ACC • Do not remove any screws from the displays “Adaptive Cruise Control system will recover after the vehicle sensor. Doing so could cause an (ACC) Unavailable”, there may be a has left these areas. Under rare condi- ACC system malfunction or failure temporary malfunction that limits tions, when the radar is not tracking and require a sensor realignment. ACC functionality. Although the ve- any vehicles or objects in its path this hicle is still drivable under normal • If the sensor is damaged due to a warning may temporarily occur. conditions, ACC will be temporarily collision, see your authorized dealer for service.

132 unavailable. If this occurs, try activat- Adding A Trailer Hitch Turns And Bends ing ACC again later, following a key The weight of a trailer/hitch may af- In turns or bends, ACC may detect a cycle. If the problem persists, see your fect the performance of ACC. If there vehicle ahead too late or too early. authorized dealer. is a noticeable change in performance This may cause your vehicle to brake following the installation of a trailer/ late or unexpectedly. Give extra atten- hitch, or if the ACC performance does tion in curves and be ready to apply not return to normal after removing the brakes if necessary. Be sure to the trailer/hitch see your authorized select an appropriate speed while dealer. driving in curves. Offset Driving ACC may not detect a vehicle in the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) same lane that is offset from your Unavailable Warning direct line of travel, or a vehicle merg- PRECAUTIONS WHILE ing in from a side lane. There may not DRIVING WITH ACC be sufficient distance to the vehicle ahead. The offset vehicle may move in In certain driving situations, ACC and out of the line of travel, which can ACC may occasionally provide brak- may have detection issues. In these cause your vehicle to brake or accel- ing and/or a driver alert that you con- cases, ACC may brake late or unex- erate unexpectedly. pectedly. The driver needs to stay sider unnecessary. This may be the alert and may need to intervene. system’s response to signs, guardrails, and other stationary objects in a curve. This may also occur at the base of steep hills. This is normal operation and your vehicle does not require service.

133 Using ACC On Hills be sufficient distance to the lane- Stationary Objects And Vehicles changing vehicle. Always be attentive When driving on hills, ACC may not ACC does not react to stationary ob- and ready to apply the brakes if nec- detect a vehicle in your lane. Depend- jects and stationary vehicles. For ex- essary. ing on the speed, vehicle load, traffic ample, ACC will not react in situa- conditions, and the steepness of the tions where the vehicle you are hills, ACC performance may be lim- following exits your lane and the ve- ited. hicle ahead is stopped in your lane. Always be attentive and ready to apply the brakes if necessary.

Narrow Vehicles Some narrow vehicles traveling near the outer edges of the lane or edging Lane Changing into the lane are not detected until ACC may not detect a vehicle until it they have moved fully into the lane. is completely in the lane in which you There may not be sufficient distance NORMAL (FIXED SPEED) are traveling. In the illustration to the vehicle ahead. CRUISE CONTROL MODE shown, ACC has not yet detected the In addition to Adaptive Cruise Con- vehicle changing lanes and it may not trol mode, a normal (fixed speed) detect the vehicle until it's too late for Cruise Control mode is available for the ACC system to take action. ACC cruising at fixed speeds. The normal may not detect a vehicle until it is Cruise Control mode is designed to completely in the lane. There may not maintain a set cruising speed without requiring the driver to operate the

134 accelerator. Cruise Control can only To Set A Desired Speed • You press the CANCEL button. be operated if the vehicle speed is When the vehicle reaches the speed • The Electronic Stability Control/ above 30 km/h. desired, press the SET - button and Traction Control System (ESC/ To change modes, press the MODE release. The EVIC will display the set TCS) activates. button when the system is in either the speed. To Resume OFF, READY, or SET position. NOTE: You must observe the dis- “Cruise Ready” will be displayed if Press the RES + button and then re- play when setting or changing the system was in ACC READY or move your foot from the accelerator speed, not the speedometer. ACC SET position. “Cruise Off” will pedal. The EVIC will display the last be displayed if the system was in the To Vary The Speed Setting set speed. ACC OFF position. To switch back to There are two ways to change the set To Turn Off Adaptive Cruise Control mode, press speed: the MODE button a second time. The system will turn off and erase the • Use the accelerator pedal to adjust set speed in memory if: the vehicle to the desired speed and • You push and release the ON/OFF WARNING! press the SET - button. In the normal Cruise Control mode, button. • Tap the RES + or SET - button to the system will not react to vehicles • You turn off the ignition. ahead. In addition, the proximity increase or decrease the set speed in warning does not activate and no 1.6 km/h increments respectively. • You switch off ESC. Hold the RES + or SET - button for alarm will sound even if you are too If the Cruise Control system is turned 10 km/h increments. close to the vehicle ahead since nei- off and reactivated, the system will ther the presence of the vehicle To Cancel return to the last driver setting (ACC ahead nor the vehicle-to vehicle The system will disable normal Cruise or Normal Cruise Control). distance is detected. Be sure to Control without erasing the memory maintain a safe distance between if: your vehicle and the vehicle ahead. Always be aware which mode is • You softly tap or depress the brake selected. pedal.

135 FORWARD COLLISION WARNING! warn you of a possible collision with WARNING (for the vehicle in front of you when you Forward Collision Warning (FCW) versions/markets, where are much closer. This setting provides is not intended to avoid a collision less reaction time than the “Far” set- provided) on its own, nor can FCW detect ting, which allows for a more dynamic Forward Collision Warning (FCW) every type of potential collision. driving experience. warns the driver of a potential colli- The driver has the responsibility to Changing the FCW status to “Off” sion with the vehicle in front of you avoid a collision by controlling the prevents the system from warning you and prompts the driver to take action vehicle via braking and steering. of a possible collision with the vehicle in order to avoid the collision. Failure to follow this warning could lead to serious injury or death. in front of you. FCW monitors the information from NOTE: the forward looking sensor as well as Changing FCW Status the Electronic Brake Controller • In the “Off” setting FCW OFF The FCW feature can be set to far, set (EBC), wheel speed sensors, i.e., to will be displayed on the to near or turned off using the calculate a probable rear-end colli- Uconnect® display. Uconnect® System, refer to sion. When the system determines “Uconnect® Settings” in “Under- • The system will retain the last that a rear-end collision is probable a standing Your Instrument Panel” for setting selected by the driver af- warning message (both audible and further information. The FCW Status ter ignition shut down. visual) will be displayed on the EVIC. Off, Near or Far will be displayed in When the system determines a colli- • FCW will not react to irrelevant the Uconnect® display. sion with the vehicle in front of you is objects such as overhead ob- no longer probable, the warning mes- The default status of FCW is the jects, ground reflections, objects sage will be deactivated. “Far” setting, this allows the system not in the path of the car, sta- to warn you of a possible collision tionary objects that are far away, NOTE: The minimum speed for with the vehicle in front of you when oncoming traffic, or leading ve- FCW activation is 16 km/h. you are farther away. This gives you hicles with the same or higher the most reaction time. rate of speed. Changing the FCW status to the “Near” setting, allows the system to 136 • If the FCW becomes disabled PARKSENSE® PARK PARKSENSE® SENSORS then a warning will display on ASSIST the EVIC screen. The four ParkSense® sensors, located The ParkSense® Park Assist system in the rear fascia/bumper, monitor the FCW Unavailable Warning provides visual and audible indica- area behind the vehicle that is within If the system turns off, and the EVIC tions of the distance between the rear the sensors’ field of view. The sensors displays “ACC/FCW Unavailable, and/or front fascia and a detected ob- can detect obstacles up to approxi- Service Required”, there may be a stacle when backing up or moving mately 150 cm from the rear fascia/ temporary malfunction that limits forward, e.g. during a parking ma- bumper in the horizontal direction, FCW functionality. Although the ve- neuver. Refer to ParkSense® System depending on the location, type and hicle is still drivable under normal Usage Precautions for limitations of orientation of the obstacle. conditions, FCW will be temporarily this system and recommendations. The six ParkSense® sensors, located unavailable. If this occurs, try activat- ParkSense® will retain the last sys- in the front fascia/bumper, monitor ing FCW again later, following a key tem state (enabled or disabled) from the area in front of the vehicle that is cycle. If the problem persists, see your the last ignition cycle when the igni- within the sensors’ field of view. The authorized dealer. tion is changed to the ON/RUN posi- sensors can detect obstacles up to ap- tion. proximately 120 cm from the front fascia/bumper in the horizontal direc- ParkSense® can be active only when tion, depending on the location, type the shift lever is in REVERSE or and orientation of the obstacle. DRIVE. If ParkSense® is enabled at one of these shift lever positions, the PARKSENSE® WARNING system will remain active until the DISPLAY vehicle speed is increased to approxi- The ParkSense® Warning screen will ACC/FCW Unavailable, Service mately 11 km/h or above. The system only be displayed if Sound and Dis- Required Warning will become active again if the vehicle play is selected from the Uconnect® speed is decreased to speeds less than approximately 9 km/h.

137 System. Refer to “Uconnect® Set- tings” in “Understanding Your In- strument Panel” for further information. The ParkSense® Warning screen is located within the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC). It provides visual warnings to indicate the distance between the rear fascia/ Park Assist System ON Slow Tone bumper and/or front fascia/bumper and the detected obstacle.

Park Assist System Off Fast Tone The system will indicate a detected Park Assist Display obstacle by showing three solid arcs PARKSENSE® DISPLAY and will produce a one-half second tone. As the vehicle moves closer to The warning display will turn ON in- the object the EVIC display will show dicating the system status when the fewer, flashing arcs and the sound vehicle is in REVERSE or when the tone will change from slow, to fast, to vehicle is in DRIVE and an obstacle continuous. has been detected. Continuous Tone

138 The vehicle is close to the obstacle when the EVIC display shows one flashing arc and sounds a continuous tone. The following chart shows the warning alert operation when the system is detecting an obstacle: WARNING ALERTS Rear Distance Greater than 150-100 cm 100-65 cm 65-30 cm Less than 30 cm (cm) 150 cm Front Distance Greater than 120-100 cm 100-65 cm 65-30 cm Less than 30 cm (cm) 120 cm Single 1/2 sec- Audible Alert Slow (for rear None ond tone (for Fast Continuous (Chime) only) rear only) 3 Solid Arc None 3 Slow Flashing 2 Slow Flashing 1 Slow Flashing (Continuous) FRONT PARK ASSIST ENABLING AND will display the “PARK ASSIST SYS- AUDIBLE ALERTS DISABLING PARKSENSE® TEM OFF” message for approximately five seconds. Refer to “Electronic Ve- ParkSense® will turn off the Front ParkSense® can be enabled and dis- hicle Information Center (EVIC)” in Park Assist audible alert (chime) after abled using the Uconnect® System. “Understanding Your Instrument approximately 3 seconds when an ob- The available choices are: Off, Sound Panel” for further information. When stacle has been detected, the vehicle is Only, or Sound and Display. Refer to the shift lever is moved to REVERSE stationary, and brake pedal is applied. “Uconnect® Settings” in “Under- position and ParkSense® is turned off, standing Your Instrument Panel” for the instrument cluster will display further information. “PARK ASSIST SYSTEM OFF” mes- When the ParkSense® soft-key is sage for as long as the vehicle is in pressed to disable the system, the EVIC REVERSE at or below 11 km/h.

139 SERVICE THE CLEANING THE PARK • When you move the shift lever to PARKSENSE® PARK ASSIST SYSTEM the REVERSE position and ASSIST SYSTEM ParkSense® is turned off, the Clean the sensors with water, car EVIC will display “PARK AS- During vehicle start up, when the wash soap and a soft cloth. Do not use SIST SYSTEM OFF” message for ParkSense® Park Assist system has rough or hard cloths. Do not scratch as long as the vehicle is in RE- detected a fault condition, the Elec- or poke the sensors. Otherwise, you VERSE at or below 11 km/h. tronic Vehicle Information Center could damage the sensors. • ParkSense®, when on, will (EVIC) will actuate a single chime, PARKSENSE® SYSTEM MUTE the radio when it is once per ignition cycle, and it will sounding a tone. display the “CLEAN PARK ASSIST”, USAGE PRECAUTIONS “SERVICE PARK ASSIST” or the NOTE: • Clean the ParkSense® sensors “SERVICE PARK ASSIST SYSTEM” regularly, taking care not to • Ensure that the front and rear message. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle scratch or damage them. The bumper are free of snow, ice, Information Center (EVIC)” in “Un- sensors must not be covered mud, dirt and debris to keep the derstanding Your Instrument Panel” with ice, snow, slush, mud, dirt ParkSense® system operating for further information. When the or debris. Failure to do so can properly. shift lever is moved to REVERSE and result in the system not working the system has detected a fault condi- • Jackhammers, large trucks, and properly. The ParkSense® sys- tion, the EVIC will display the other vibrations could affect the tem might not detect an obstacle "CLEAN PARK ASSIST", "SERVICE performance of ParkSense®. behind or in front of the fascia/ PARK ASSIST", or "SERVICE PARK bumper, or it could provide a • When you turn ParkSense® off, ASSIST SYSTEM" message for as false indication that an obstacle the EVIC will display “PARK long as the vehicle is in REVERSE. is behind or in front of the ASSIST SYSTEM OFF.” Further- Under this condition, ParkSense® fascia/bumper. will not operate. more, once you turn ParkSense® off, it remains off • Objects such as bicycle carriers, until you turn it on again, even if trailer hitches, etc., must not be you cycle the ignition key. placed within 30 cm from the

140 rear fascia/bumper while driv- WARNING! WARNING! (Continued) ing the vehicle. Failure to do so can result in the system misin- • Drivers must be careful when • Before using the ParkSense® terpreting a close object as a backing up even when using the Park Assist system, it is strongly sensor problem, causing the ParkSense® Park Assist system. recommended that the ball “SERVICE PARK ASSIST” mes- Always check carefully behind mount and hitch ball assembly is sage to be displayed in the EVIC. your vehicle, look behind you, disconnected from the vehicle and be sure to check for pedestri- when the vehicle is not used for ans, animals, other vehicles, ob- towing. Failure to do so can result structions, and blind spots before in injury or damage to vehicles or CAUTION! backing up. You are responsible obstacles because the hitch ball • ParkSense® is only a parking aid for safety and must continue to will be much closer to the obstacle and it is unable to recognize every pay attention to your surround- than the rear fascia when the obstacle, including small ob- ings. Failure to do so can result in warning display turns on the stacles. Parking curbs might be serious injury or death. single flashing arc and sounds the temporarily detected or not de- continuous tone. Also, the sensors (Continued) tected at all. Obstacles located could detect the ball mount and above or below the sensors will hitch ball assembly, depending on not be detected when they are in its size and shape, giving a false close proximity. indication that an obstacle is be- • The vehicle must be driven slowly hind the vehicle. when using ParkSense® in order to be able to stop in time when an obstacle is detected. When backing up, it is recommended that the driver looks over his/her shoulder when using ParkSense®.

141 PARKVIEW® REAR display along with a caution note to When displayed, static grid lines will BACK UP CAMERA (for “check entire surroundings” across illustrate the width of the vehicle and the top of the screen. After five sec- will show separate zones that will help versions/markets, where onds this note will disappear. The indicate the distance to the rear of the provided) ParkView® camera is located on the vehicle. The following table shows the Your vehicle may be equipped with rear of the vehicle above the rear Li- approximate distances for each zone: the ParkView® Rear Back Up Cam- cense plate. era that allows you to see an on-screen When the vehicle is shifted out of RE- image of the rear surroundings of VERSE, the rear camera mode is ex- your vehicle whenever the shift lever ited and the navigation or audio is put into REVERSE. The image will screen appears again. be displayed on the radio touchscreen

Zone Distance to the rear of the vehicle Red 0-30cm Yellow 30 cm - 1 m Green 1 m or greater

142 4. Press the check box soft key next WARNING! CAUTION! (Continued) to “Parkview® Backup Camera” to Drivers must be careful when back- • To avoid vehicle damage, the ve- enable/disable. ing up even when using the hicle must be driven slowly when ParkView® Rear Back Up Camera. using ParkView® to be able to OVERHEAD CONSOLE Always check carefully behind your stop in time when an obstacle is The overhead console contains vehicle, and be sure to check for seen. It is recommended that the courtesy/reading lights and storage pedestrians, animals, other ve- driver look frequently over his/ for sunglasses. Power sunroof hicles, obstructions, or blind spots her shoulder when using switches may also be included, (for before backing up. You are respon- ParkView®. sible for the safety of your sur- versions/markets, where provided). roundings and must continue to NOTE: If snow, ice, mud, or any Refer to your “Lights” section for pay attention while backing up. foreign substance builds up on the more information. Failure to do so can result in serious camera lens, clean the lens, rinse injury or death. with water, and dry with a soft cloth. Do not cover the lens.

CAUTION! TURNING PARKVIEW® ON OR OFF — WITH TOUCH • To avoid vehicle damage, ParkView® should only be used SCREEN as a parking aid. The ParkView® Perform the following steps on the Overhead Console camera is unable to view every touch screen to turn the Parkview® obstacle or object in your drive Backup Camera ON or OFF: path. 1. Press the “More” soft-key. (Continued) 2. Press the “Settings” soft-key. 3. Press the “Safety & Driving Assis- tance” soft-key.

143 The power shade switch is located to SUNGLASS BIN DOOR WARNING! (Continued) the right between the sun visors on the At the front of the console a compart- overhead console. • In a collision, there is a greater ment is provided for the storage of a risk of being thrown from a ve- pair of sunglasses. The storage com- hicle with an open sunroof. You partment access is a “push/push” de- could also be seriously injured or sign. Push the chrome pad on the door killed. Always fasten your seat to open. Push the chrome pad on the belt properly and make sure all door to close. passengers are properly secured too. • Do not allow small children to CommandView® Sunroof And Power operate the sunroof. Never allow Shade Switches your fingers, other body parts, or WARNING! any object to project through the sunroof opening. Injury may re- • Never leave children unattended in a vehicle, and do not let chil- sult. Sunglass Bin Door dren play with the sun roof. Do not leave the key fob in or near OPENING SUNROOF — COMMANDVIEW® the vehicle, or in a location acces- EXPRESS SUNROOF WITH POWER sible to children, and do not leave Press the switch rearward and release the ignition of a vehicle equipped it within one-half second and the sun- SHADE — (for with Keyless Enter-N-Go in the versions/markets, where ACC or ON/RUN mode. Occu- roof will open automatically from any position. The sunroof will open fully provided) pants, particularly unattended children, can become entrapped and stop automatically. This is called The CommandView® sunroof switch by the power sunroof while oper- “Express Open”. During Express is located to the left between the sun ating the power sunroof switch. Open operation, any movement of the visors on the overhead console. Such entrapment may result in sunroof switch will stop the sunroof. serious injury or death.

(Continued) 144 NOTE: If the sunshade is in the Close operation, any movement of the NOTE: If the sunshade is in the closed position it will automati- switch will stop the sunroof. closed position when the vent cally open halfway prior to the switch is pressed, the sunshade glass cycling open. CLOSING SUNROOF — will automatically cycle to the MANUAL MODE halfway open position prior to the OPENING SUNROOF — sunroof opening to the Vent posi- MANUAL MODE To close the sunroof, press and hold the switch in the forward position. tion. To open the sunroof, press and hold Any release of the switch will stop the OPENING POWER SHADE the switch rearward to full open. Any movement and the sunroof will re- — EXPRESS release of the switch will stop the main in a partially closed condition movement and the sunroof will re- until the switch is pushed and held Press the shade switch rearward and main in a partially opened condition forward again. release it within one-half second and until the switch is pushed and held the shade will open automatically rearward again. VENTING SUNROOF — from any position. The shade will EXPRESS open fully and stop automatically. NOTE: If the sunshade is in the This is called “Express Open”. During closed position it will automati- Press and release the "Vent" button Express Open operation, any move- cally open halfway prior to the within one-half second and the sun- ment of the shade switch will stop the glass cycling open. roof will open to the vent position. This is called “Express Vent”, and it shade. CLOSING SUNROOF — will occur regardless of sunroof posi- OPENING POWER SHADE EXPRESS tion. During Express Vent operation, — MANUAL MODE any movement of the switch will stop Press the switch forward and release it the sunroof. To open the shade, press and hold the within one-half second and the sun- switch rearward to full open. Any re- roof will close automatically from any lease of the switch will stop the move- position. The sunroof will close fully ment and the shade will remain in a and stop automatically. This is called partially opened condition until the “Express Close”. During Express switch is pushed and held rearward again.

145 CLOSING POWER SHADE will occur regardless of sunroof posi- WIND BUFFETING — EXPRESS tion. During Express Vent operation, any movement of the switch will stop Wind buffeting can be described as Press the switch forward and release it the sunroof. the perception of pressure on the ears within one-half second and the shade or a helicopter-type sound in the ears. will close automatically from any po- NOTE: If the sunshade is in the Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffet- sition. The shade will close fully and closed position when the vent ing with the windows down, or the stop automatically. This is called “Ex- switch is pressed, the sunshade sunroof (for versions/markets, where press Close”. During Express Close will automatically cycle to the provided) in certain open or partially operation, any movement of the halfway open position prior to the open positions. This is a normal oc- switch will stop the shade. sunroof opening to the Vent posi- currence and can be minimized. If the tion. buffeting occurs with the rear win- CLOSING POWER SHADE PINCH PROTECT FEATURE dows open, open the front and rear — MANUAL MODE windows together to minimize the To close the shade, press and hold the This feature will detect an obstruction buffeting. If the buffeting occurs with switch in the forward position. Any in the opening of the sunroof during the sunroof open, adjust the sunroof release of the switch will stop the Express Close operation. If an ob- opening to minimize the buffeting or movement and the shade will remain struction in the path of the sunroof is open any window. detected, the sunroof will automati- in a partially closed condition until SUNROOF MAINTENANCE the switch is pushed and held forward cally retract. Remove the obstruction again. if this occurs. Next, press the switch Use only a non-abrasive cleaner and a forward and release to Express Close. soft cloth to clean the glass panel. VENTING SUNROOF — NOTE: If three consecutive sun- IGNITION OFF OPERATION EXPRESS roof close attempts result in Pinch For vehicles not equipped with the Press and release the "Vent" button Protect reversals, the fourth close Electronic Vehicle Information Center within one-half second and the sun- attempt will be a Manual Close (EVIC), the power sunroof switch will roof will open to the vent position. movement with Pinch Protect dis- remain active for 45 seconds after the This is called “Express Vent”, and it abled.

146 ignition switch is turned to the LOCK Insert cigar lighter or accessory plug position. Opening either front door into the power outlets for use to en- will cancel this feature. sure proper operation. NOTE: CAUTION! • For vehicles equipped with the EVIC, the power sunroof switch • Do not exceed the maximum will remain active for up to ap- power of 160 Watts (13 Amps) at proximately ten minutes after 12 Volts. If the 160 Watts (13 Front Power Outlet the ignition switch is turned to Amps) power rating is exceeded, the LOCK position. Opening ei- the fuse protecting the system will WARNING! ther front door will cancel this need to be replaced. Do not place ashes inside the cubby feature. • Power outlets are designed for ac- bin located on the center console on cessory plugs only. Do not insert vehicle's not equipped with the ash • The Ignition Off time is pro- any other object in the power out- receiver tray. A fire leading to grammable using the lets as this will damage the outlet bodily injury could result. Uconnect® System. Refer to and blow the fuse. Improper use “Uconnect® Settings” in “Un- of the power outlet can cause The center console outlet is powered derstanding Your Instrument damage not covered by your New directly from the battery (power Panel” for further information. Vehicle Limited Warranty. available at all times). Items plugged into this outlet may discharge the bat- ELECTRICAL POWER The front 12 Volt power outlet has tery and/or prevent the engine from OUTLETS power available only when the igni- starting. tion is placed in the ACC or RUN There are three 12 Volt (13 Amp) position. electrical power outlets on this vehicle. The power outlets are protected by a fuse.

147 CAUTION! • Many accessories that can be plugged in draw power from the vehicle's battery even when not in use (i.e., cellular phones, etc.). Eventually, if plugged in long enough, the vehicle's battery will Center Console Power Outlet Power Outlet Fuse Locations discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life and/or prevent the There is also a 12 volt power outlet 1 — #12 Fuse 20 A Yellow Cigar engine from starting. located on the back of the center con- Lighter Instrument Panel And Power • Accessories that draw higher sole for rear passengers. This power Outlet Console Rear power (i.e., coolers, vacuum outlet has power available only when 2 — #38 Fuse 20 A Yellow Power cleaners, lights, etc.) will degrade the ignition is placed in the ACC or Outlet Inside Arm Rest the battery even more quickly. RUN position. Only use these intermittently and WARNING! with greater caution. To avoid serious injury or death: • After the use of high power draw • Only devices designed for use in accessories or long periods of the this type of outlet should be in- vehicle not being started (with serted into any 12 Volt outlet. accessories still plugged in), the • Do not touch with wet hands. vehicle must be driven a sufficient length of time to allow the • Close the lid when not in use and alternator to recharge the vehi- Rear Center Console Power Outlet while driving the vehicle. cle's battery. • If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an electric shock and fail- (Continued) ure.

148 Press the “Cold” symbol once to turn CAUTION! (Continued) on the cupholder; press the symbol a • Power outlets are designed for ac- second time to turn the cupholder off. cessory plugs only. Do not hang Press the “Hot” symbol once to acti- any type of accessory or accessory vate the cupholder; press the symbol a bracket from the plug. Improper second time to turn off the cupholder. use of the power outlet can cause damage. WARNING! Front Cupholders When using the cupholder in the CUPHOLDERS Heated and Cooled Cupholders “Hot” position, avoid contact with (for versions/markets, where FRONT SEAT the heated portion of the cupholder provided) CUPHOLDERS in order to reduce the possibility of Your vehicle may be equipped with burns. Persons who are unable to The cupholders are located in the for- heated and cooled cupholders. The feel pain to the skin because of ad- ward edge of the center console. cupholders are designed to help keep vanced age, chronic illness, diabe- warm beverages warm and cold bev- tes, spinal cord injuries, medica- erages cool. tion, alcohol use, exhaustion or other physical condition must exercise particular care in order to prevent serious burn injury. Keep the cupholder free of debris or stray objects when operated in the Heat position. Retractable Cover

Heated And Cooled Cupholder Switches

149 REAR SEAT CUPHOLDERS The rear seat cupholders are located in the center armrest between the rear seats. The cupholders are positioned forward in the armrest and side-by- side to provide convenient access to beverage cans or bottles while maintaining a resting place for the rear Light Ring In Rear Cupholder Opened Glovebox Storage occupant's elbows. STORAGE Compartment CONSOLE FEATURES GLOVEBOX STORAGE There is a cubby bin located forward of The glovebox storage compartment is the shift lever. The cubby bin is cov- located on the passenger side of the ered with a push-push actuated door. instrument panel. Push inward on the door to open it, push the door a second time to close it. Two separate storage compartments Rear Seat Cupholders are also located underneath the center Lighted Cupholders console armrest. On some vehicles the rear cupholders are equipped with a light ring that illuminates the cupholders for the rear passengers. The light ring is con- Glovebox Storage Compartment trolled by the Dimmer Control. Refer to “Lights” in “Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle” for further information. Center Console

150 Inside the center console armrest, WARNING! REAR SEAT ARMREST there is a removable upper storage STORAGE (for Do not operate this vehicle with a tray that can be slid forward/ versions/markets, where rearward on rails for access to the console compartment lid in the lower storage area. This tray has an open position. Cellular phones, mu- provided) integrated coin holder, along with ad- sic players, and other handheld For rear passengers there is a storage ditional area for small items like an electronic devices should be stowed bin located in the armrest. Lift up- ipod or phone. Below the upper tray, while driving. Use of these devices ward on the latch to open the storage the lower storage compartment is while driving can cause an accident compartment. made for larger items, like CDs and due to distraction, resulting in tissue boxes. In addition, the 12 volt death or injury. power outlet, USB and Aux jack are located here. DOOR STORAGE The door panels contain storage areas.

Rear Armrest Storage CARGO AREA — VEHICLES EQUIPPED WITH 60/40 Upper Storage Tray SPLIT-FOLDING REAR SEAT Front Door Trim Storage The 60/40 split-folding rear seat provides cargo-carrying versatility. The seatbacks fold down easily by pulling nylon tabs between the seatbacks and the bolsters. When the seats are folded

151 down, they provide a continuous, WARNING! (Continued) WARNING! (Continued) nearly-flat extension of the load floor. • To help protect against personal • Place as much cargo as possible in When the seatback is folded to the injury, passengers should not be front of the rear axle. Too much upright position, make sure it is seated in the rear cargo area. The weight or improperly placed latched by strongly pulling on the top rear cargo space is intended for weight over or behind the rear of the seatback above the seat strap. load carrying purposes only, not axle can cause the rear of the ve- for passengers, who should sit in hicle to sway. WARNING! seats and use seat belts. • Do not pile luggage or cargo • Be certain that the seatback is higher than the top of the seatback. This could impair visibility securely locked into position. If WARNING! the seatback is not securely or become a dangerous projectile locked into position, the seat will The weight and position of cargo in a sudden stop or collision. not provide the proper stability and passengers can change the ve- for child seats and/or passengers. hicle center of gravity and vehicle CARGO AREA FEATURES handling. To avoid loss of control An improperly latched seat could TRUNK MAT (for cause serious injury. resulting in personal injury, follow these guidelines for loading your • The cargo area in the rear of the versions/markets, where vehicle: vehicle (with the rear seatbacks provided) • Always place cargo evenly on the in the locked-up or folded down cargo floor. Put heavier objects as A trunk mat covers the bottom of the position) should not be used as a low and as far forward as pos- cargo area. The trunk mat is used to play area by children when the sible. protect the interior of the trunk from vehicle is in motion. They could mud, snow, and debris. be seriously injured in a collision. (Continued) Children should be seated and using the proper restraint system.

(Continued)

152 GROCERY BAG HOOKS (for CAUTION! versions/markets where Failure to follow these cautions can provided) cause damage to the heating ele- The rear cargo area is equipped with ments: grocery bag hooks, located on either • Use care when washing the inside side of the rear cargo area. of the rear window. Do not use abrasive window cleaners on the Rear Cargo Net interior surface of the window. Use a soft cloth and a mild wash- REAR WINDOW ing solution, wiping parallel to FEATURES the heating elements. Labels can be peeled off after soaking with REAR WINDOW warm water. DEFROSTER • Do not use scrapers, sharp instru- Grocery Bag Hooks ments, or abrasive window clean- The rear window defroster ers on the interior surface of the window. CAUTION! button is located on the climate control. Press this button to turn • Keep all objects a safe distance Do not exceed the maximum weight on the rear window defroster and the from the window. limit 22 kg of the grocery bag hook. heated outside mirrors (for versions/ Damage may occur to hook and markets, where provided). An indica- POWER SUNSHADE (for mounting surface. tor in the button will illuminate when versions/markets, where CARGO NET (for the rear window defroster is on. The provided) rear window defroster automatically Your vehicle may be equipped with a versions/markets where turns off after approximately 10 min- power sunshade that will reduce the provided) utes. For an additional five minutes of amount of sunlight that will shine operation, press the button a second The rear cargo area is equipped with a through the rear windshield. cargo net. time.

153 The power sunshade can be operated using the Uconnect® System. Press the “Controls” soft-key and then press the “Sunshade” soft-key to raise the power sunscreen. Press the “Sunshade” soft-key a second time to lower the sunshade.

If the sunshade is in the raised posi- Controls Soft-Key Power Sunshade Switch tion and the vehicle is placed in RE- VERSE, the sunshade will automati- LOAD LEVELING cally fully lower. When the SYSTEM transmission is shifted out of RE- The automatic load leveling system VERSE the sunshade will automati- will provide a level-riding vehicle un- cally return to the fully raised position der most passenger and cargo loading after approximately five seconds. conditions. NOTE: The rear sunshade control A hydraulic pump contained within switch can be locked out with the Power Sunshade Soft-Key the shock absorbers raises the rear of rear passenger window controls The power sunshade can also be oper- the vehicle to the correct height. It from the driver switch window ated by passengers in the rear seats. takes approximately 1.6 km of driv- lockout switch. The power sunshade switch is located ing for the leveling to complete de- on the back of the center console be- pending on road surface conditions. tween the heated seat switches. Press the switch once to raise the sunshade. If the leveled vehicle is not moved for Press the switch a second time to approximately 15 hours, the leveling lower the sunshade. system will bleed itself down. The vehicle must be driven to reset the system.

154 4

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

• INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES ...... 158 • INSTRUMENT CLUSTER ...... 159 • INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTIONS .....160 • ELECTRONIC VEHICLE INFORMATION CENTER (EVIC) ...... 165 • ELECTRONIC VEHICLE INFORMATION CENTER (EVIC) DISPLAYS ...... 166 • EVIC WHITE TELLTALES ...... 167 • EVIC AMBER TELLTALES ...... 168 • EVIC RED TELLTALES ...... 169 • GEAR SHIFT INDICATOR (GSI) — If Equipped ...... 170 • OIL CHANGE DUE ...... 171 • DIESEL PARTICULATE FILTER (DPF) MESSAGES...... 171 • FUEL ECONOMY ...... 172 • CRUISE CONTROL...... 173 • VEHICLE SPEED ...... 173 • TRIPINFO...... 173 • TIREBAR...... 174

155 • VEHICLE INFO (CUSTOMER INFORMATION FEATURES) (for versions/markets, where provided) ...... 174 • MESSAGES # ...... 174 • TURN MENU OFF...... 174 • Uconnect® SETTINGS ...... 174 • HARD-KEYS ...... 175 • SOFT-KEYS ...... 175 • CUSTOMER PROGRAMMABLE FEATURES — Uconnect® 8.4 SETTINGS ...... 175 • SOUND SYSTEMS ...... 183 • NAVIGATION SYSTEM (for versions/markets, where provided) ...... 183 • SETTING THE ANALOG CLOCK ...... 184 • iPod®/USB/MP3 CONTROL (for vehicles/markets, where provided) ...... 184 • HARMAN KARDON® Logic7® HIGH PERFORMANCE MULTICHANNEL SURROUND SOUND SYSTEM WITH DRIVER-SELECTABLE SURROUND (DSS) (for versions/markets, where required) ...... 184 • STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS ...... 185 • RADIO OPERATION ...... 185 • CDPLAYER...... 185 • CD/DVD DISC MAINTENANCE ...... 186 • RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES . . . .186 • CLIMATE CONTROLS ...... 186

156 • GENERAL OVERVIEW ...... 186 • CLIMATE CONTROL FUNCTIONS ...... 190 • AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROL (ATC)...... 190 • OPERATING TIPS ...... 191

157 INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES

1 — Air Outlet 7 — ESC Off Switch 13 — Engine Start/Stop Button 2 — Instrument Cluster 8 — Uconnect® System Hard Controls 14 — Trunk Release Button 3 — Hazard Switch 9 — SD Memory Card Slot 15 — Dimmer Controls 4 — Uconnect® System 10 — Power Outlet 16 — Hood Release 5 — Climate Control Hard Controls 11 — CD/DVD Slot 17 — Headlight Switch 6 — Glove Compartment 12 — Storage Compartment 18 — Analog Clock

158 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER

159 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER 4. Front Fog Light Indicator Electronic Vehicle Information Cen- ter (EVIC) Display DESCRIPTIONS This indicator will illumi- The Electronic Vehicle Information 1. Tachometer nate when the front fog lights are on. Center (EVIC) features a driver- This gauge measures engine interactive display that is located in 5. Rear Fog Light Indicator revolutions-per-minute (RPM x the instrument cluster. For further in- 1000). This indicator will illuminate formation, refer to “Electronic Ve- hicle Information Center (EVIC)”. 2. Park/Headlight ON Indicator when the rear fog lights are on. The Shift Lever Indicator is self- This indicator will illumi- contained within the EVIC display. It 6. High Beam Indicator nate when the park lights or displays the gear position of the auto- headlights are turned on. This indicator shows that the matic transmission. high beam headlights are on. NOTE: 3. Turn Signal Indicators Push the multifunction lever forward • You must apply the brakes be- The arrow will flash with to switch the headlights to high beam, fore shifting from PARK. the exterior turn signal and pull toward yourself (normal po- when the turn signal lever is sition) to return to low beam. • The highest available transmis- operated. 7. Odometer Display / Electronic sion gear is displayed in the lower right corner of the Elec- If the vehicle electronics sense that the Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) tronic Vehicle Information Cen- vehicle is driven more than 1.6 km Display ter (EVIC) whenever the Elec- with either turn signal on, a continu- Odometer Display tronic Range Select (ERS) ous chime will sound to alert you to feature is active. Use the +/- se- turn the signals off. If either indicator The odometer display shows the total lector on the shift lever to acti- flashes at a rapid rate, check for a distance the vehicle has been driven. vate ERS (for versions/markets, defective outside light bulb. where provided). Refer to “Auto- matic Transmission” in “Start- ing And Operating” for further information.

160 8. Tire Pressure Monitoring Tell- Please note that the TPMS is not a check the TPMS malfunction telltale tale Light substitute for proper tire mainte- after replacing one or more tires or nance, and it is the driver’s responsi- wheels on your vehicle, to ensure that Each tire, including the bility to maintain correct tire pres- the replacement or alternate tires and spare (if provided), should sure, even if under-inflation has not wheels allow the TPMS to continue to be checked monthly when reached the level to trigger illumina- function properly. cold and inflated to the in- tion of the TPMS low tire pressure flation pressure recommended by the telltale. vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle CAUTION! placard or tire inflation pressure la- Your vehicle has also been equipped The TPMS has been optimized for bel. with a TPMS malfunction indicator to the original equipment tires and As an added safety feature, your ve- indicate when the system is not oper- wheels. TPMS pressures and warn- hicle has been equipped with a Tire ating properly. The TPMS malfunc- ing have been established for the Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) tion indicator is combined with the tire size equipped on your vehicle. that illuminates a low tire pressure low tire pressure telltale. When the Undesirable system operation or telltale when one or more of your tires system detects a malfunction, the tell- sensor damage may result when us- is significantly under-inflated. Ac- tale will flash for approximately one ing replacement equipment that is cordingly, when the low tire pressure minute and then remain continuously not of the same size, type, and/or telltale illuminates, you should stop illuminated. This sequence will con- style. Aftermarket wheels can cause and check your tires as soon as pos- tinue upon subsequent vehicle start- sensor damage. Do not use tire seal- sible, and inflate them to the proper ups as long as the malfunction exists. ant from a can or balance beads if pressure. Driving on a significantly When the malfunction indicator is il- your vehicle is equipped with a under-inflated tire causes the tire to luminated, the system may not be TPMS, as damage to the sensors overheat and can lead to tire failure. able to detect or signal low tire pres- may result. Under-inflation also reduces fuel effi- sure as intended. TPMS malfunctions ciency and tire tread life, and may may occur for a variety of reasons, affect the vehicle’s handling and stop- including the installation of replace- ping ability. ment or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly. Always

161 9. Malfunction Indicator Light CAUTION! 11. Fuel Door Reminder (MIL) Prolonged driving with the Mal- The arrow in this symbol is The Malfunction Indicator function Indicator Light (MIL) on a reminder that the Fuel Light (MIL) is part of an on- could cause damage to the engine Filler Door is located on the board diagnostic system, control system. It also could affect left side of the vehicle. called OBD, that monitors engine and fuel economy and driveability. If 12. Fuel Gauge automatic transmission control sys- the MIL is flashing, severe catalytic tems. The light will illuminate when converter damage and power loss The pointer shows the level of fuel in the key is in the ON/RUN position, will soon occur. Immediate service the fuel tank when the ignition switch before engine start. If the bulb does is required. is in the ON/RUN position. not come on when turning the key 13. Air Bag Warning Light from OFF to ON/RUN, have the condition checked promptly. WARNING! This light will turn on for four to eight seconds as a Certain conditions, such as poor fuel A malfunctioning catalytic con- bulb check when the igni- quality, etc., may illuminate the MIL verter, as referenced above, can tion switch is first turned to after engine start. The vehicle should reach higher temperatures than in ON/RUN. If the light is either not on be serviced if the light stays on normal operating conditions. This during starting, stays on, or turns on through several of your typical driv- can cause a fire if you drive slowly while driving, have the system in- ing cycles. In most situations, the ve- or park over flammable substances spected at an authorized dealer as hicle will drive normally and will not such as dry plants, wood, card- soon as possible. Refer to “Occupant require towing. board, etc. This could result in Restraints” in “Things To Know Be- death or serious injury to the driver, fore Starting Your Vehicle” for further occupants or others. information. 10. Speedometer Indicates vehicle speed.

162 14. Brake Warning Light The dual brake system provides a re- Vehicles equipped with the Anti-Lock serve braking capacity in the event of Brake System (ABS), are also This light monitors various a failure to a portion of the hydraulic equipped with Electronic Brake Force brake functions, including system. A leak in either half of the Distribution (EBD). In the event of an brake fluid level and park- dual brake system is indicated by the EBD failure, the Brake Warning Light ing brake application. If the Brake Warning Light, which will turn will turn on along with the ABS Light. brake light turns on it may indicate on when the brake fluid level in the Immediate repair to the ABS system is that the parking brake is applied, that master cylinder has dropped below a required. the brake fluid level is low, or that specified level. there is a problem with the anti-lock Operation of the Brake Warning Light brake system reservoir. The light will remain on until the can be checked by turning the ignition switch from the OFF position to the If the light remains on when the park- cause is corrected. ON/RUN position. The light should ing brake has been disengaged, and NOTE: The light may flash mo- illuminate for approximately two sec- the fluid level is at the full mark on the mentarily during sharp cornering onds. The light should then turn off master cylinder reservoir, it indicates maneuvers, which change fluid unless the parking brake is applied or a possible brake hydraulic system level conditions. The vehicle a brake fault is detected. If the light malfunction or that a problem with should have service performed, does not illuminate, have the light the Brake Booster has been detected and the brake fluid level checked. inspected by an authorized dealer. by the Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) If brake failure is indicated, immedi- / Electronic Stability Control (ESC) The light also will turn on when the ate repair is necessary. system. In this case, the light will re- parking brake is applied with the ig- main on until the condition has been nition switch in the ON/RUN posi- corrected. If the problem is related to WARNING! tion. the brake booster, the ABS pump will Driving a vehicle with the red brake NOTE: This light shows only run when applying the brake and a light on is dangerous. Part of the that the parking brake is applied. brake pedal pulsation may be felt dur- brake system may have failed. It It does not show the degree of ing each stop. will take longer to stop the vehicle. brake application. You could have a collision. Have the vehicle checked immediately.

163 15. Anti-Lock Brake (ABS) Light 16. Vehicle Security Light been detected in the ESC system. If this light remains on after several ig- This light monitors the This light will flash at a fast nition cycles, and the vehicle has been Anti-Lock Brake System rate for approximately 15 driven several kilometers at speeds (ABS). The light will turn seconds, when the vehicle greater than 48 km/h, see your autho- on when the ignition switch security alarm is arming, rized dealer as soon as possible to is turned to the ON/RUN position and and then will flash slowly until the have the problem diagnosed and may stay on for as long as four sec- vehicle is disarmed. corrected. onds. 17. Electronic Stability Control If the ABS light remains on or turns on (ESC) OFF Indicator Light (for NOTE: while driving, it indicates that the versions/markets, where provided) • The “ESC Off Indicator Light” Anti-Lock portion of the brake sys- and the “ESC Activation/ This light indicates the tem is not functioning and that service Malfunction Indicator Light” Electronic Stability Control is required. However, the conven- come on momentarily each time (ESC) is off. tional brake system will continue to the ignition switch is turned to operate normally if the BRAKE warn- 18. Electronic Stability Control ON/RUN. ing light is not on. (ESC) Activation/Malfunction Indi- • Each time the ignition is turned If the ABS light is on, the brake sys- cator Light (for versions/markets, to ON/RUN, the ESC system will tem should be serviced as soon as where provided) be ON, even if it was turned off possible to restore the benefits of The “ESC Activation/ previously. Anti-Lock brakes. If the ABS light Malfunction Indicator does not turn on when the ignition • The ESC system will make buzz- Light” in the instrument switch is turned to the ON/RUN posi- ing or clicking sounds when it is cluster will come on when tion, have the light inspected by an active. This is normal; the the ignition switch is turned to the authorized dealer. sounds will stop when ESC be- ON/RUN position. It should go out comes inactive following the with the engine running. If the “ESC maneuver that caused the ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator activation. Light” comes on continuously with the engine running, a malfunction has

164 19. Seat Belt Reminder Light CAUTION! 21. AWD (All Wheel Drive) Indica- tor (for versions/ markets, where When the ignition switch is Driving with a hot engine cooling provided) first turned to ON/RUN, this system could damage your vehicle. light will turn on for four to If the temperature gauge reads “H” The AWD indicator will illuminate eight seconds as a bulb check. During pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle when All Wheel Drive (AWD) is the bulb check, if the driver's seat belt the vehicle with the air conditioner activated. is unbuckled, a chime will sound. Af- turned off until the pointer drops ter the bulb check or when driving, if back into the normal range. If the ELECTRONIC VEHICLE the driver or passenger's (for pointer remains on the “H” and you INFORMATION CENTER versions/markets, where provided) hear continuous chimes, turn the (EVIC) seat belt remains unbuckled, the Seat engine off immediately and call an Belt Reminder Light will illuminate authorized dealer for service. The Electronic Vehicle Information and the chime will sound. Refer to Center (EVIC) features a driver- “Occupant Restraints” in “Things To interactive display that is located in Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” WARNING! the instrument cluster. for further information. A hot engine cooling system is dan- 20. Temperature Gauge gerous. You or others could be badly burned by steam or boiling The temperature gauge shows engine coolant. You may want to call an coolant temperature. Any reading authorized dealer for service if your within the normal range indicates vehicle overheats. If you decide to that the engine cooling system is op- look under the hood yourself, see erating satisfactorily. “Maintaining Your Vehicle”. Fol- The gauge pointer will likely indicate low the warnings under the Cooling Electronic Vehicle Information a higher temperature when driving in System Pressure Cap paragraph. Center (EVIC) hot weather, up mountain grades, or This system allows the driver to select when towing a trailer. It should not be a variety of useful information by allowed to exceed the upper limits of the normal operating range. 165 pressing the switches mounted on the UP Button BACK Button steering wheel. The EVIC consists of Press and release the UP Press the BACK button to the following: button to scroll upward return to the main menu • Radio Info through the main menu and from an info screen or sub- • Fuel Economy Info Vehicle Info and Trip Info menu item. sub-menus (Fuel Economy, Vehicle • Cruise Control Info Info, Tire BAR, Cruise, Messages, Trip ELECTRONIC VEHICLE INFORMATION CENTER • Digital Vehicle Speed Info, Vehicle Speed, and Turn Menu OFF) and sub-menus. (EVIC) DISPLAYS • Trip Info DOWN Button The EVIC display consists of three • Tire Pressure sections: Press and release the • Vehicle Info DOWN button to scroll 1. The top line where compass direction, odometer line and outside tem- • Stored Warning Messages downward through the main menu and Vehicle Info perature are displayed. • Turn Menu OFF and Trip Info sub-menus (Fuel NOTE: The system will display Economy, Vehicle Info, Tire BAR, The system allows the driver to select the last known outside tempera- Cruise, Messages, Trip Info, Vehicle information by pressing the following ture when starting the vehicle and Speed, and Turn Menu OFF) and buttons mounted on the steering may need to be driven several min- sub-menus. wheel: utes before the updated tempera- SELECT Button ture is displayed. Engine temperature can also affect the displayed Press and release the SE- temperature; therefore, tempera- LECT button to access the ture readings are not updated information screens or sub- when the vehicle is not moving. menu screens of a main menu item. Press and hold the SELECT button for 2. The main display area where the two seconds to reset displayed/selected menus and pop up messages are dis- features that can be reset. played. EVIC Steering Wheel Buttons 166 3. The reconfigurable telltales sec- • Unstored Messages EVIC WHITE TELLTALES tion. This message type is displayed indefi- This area will show reconfigurable The main display area will normally nitely or until the condition that acti- white caution telltales. These telltales display the main menu or the screens vated the message is cleared. Ex- include: of a selected feature of the main amples of this message type are "Turn • Shift Lever Status — Diesel Only menu. The main display area also dis- Signal On" (if a turn signal is left on) plays "pop up" messages that consist and "Lights On" (if driver leaves the The selected AutoStick gear is dis- of approximately 60 possible warning vehicle). played as D1, D2, D3, D4, D5 and or information messages. These pop indicate the Electronic Range Select • Unstored Messages Until RUN up messages fall into several catego- (ERS) feature has been engaged and ries: This message type is displayed until the gear selected is displayed. For fur- • Five Second Stored Messages the ignition is in the RUN state. An ther information on Autostick, refer example of this message type is "Press to “Starting And Operating”. When the appropriate conditions oc- Brake Pedal and Push Button to • Electronic Speed Control ON cur, this type of message takes control Start". of the main display area for five sec- This telltale will illuminate • Five Second Unstored Messages onds and then returns to the previous when the electronic speed screen. Most of the messages of this When the appropriate conditions oc- control is ON. For further type are then stored (as long as the cur, this type of message takes control information, refer to “Elec- condition that activated it remains ac- of the main display area for five sec- tronic Speed Control” in “Under- tive) and can be reviewed from the onds and then returns to the previous standing The Features Of Your "Messages" main menu item. As long screen. Examples of this message type Vehicle.” as there is a stored message, an "i" are "Memory System Unavailable - • Electronic Speed Control SET will be displayed in the EVIC's Not in Park" and "Automatic High compass/outside temp line. Examples Beams On". This telltale will illuminate of this message type are "Right Front when the electronic speed The Reconfigurable Telltales section Turn Signal Lamp Out" and "Low control is SET. For further is divided into the white telltales area Tire Pressure". on the right, amber telltales in the middle, and red telltales on the left. 167 information, refer to “Electronic • Forward Collision Warning • Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Speed Control” in “Understanding (FCW) OFF (for versions/markets, Malfunction (for versions/markets, The Features Of Your Vehicle.” where equipped) where equipped) • Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) This telltale informs the This light will turn on when ON (for versions/markets, where driver that the Forward a ACC is not operating and equipped) Collision Warning feature is needs service. For further Off. The telltale is On when information, refer to This telltale will illuminate the front radar sensor is blocked and “Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)” in when the ACC is ON. For requires cleaning, the ACC/FCW sen- “Understanding The Features Of further information, refer sors require service, or the ACC/FCW Your Vehicle.” to “Adaptive Cruise Control system is unavailable because of a (ACC)” in “Understanding The Fea- • Wait To Start Light — Diesel system error. For further information, tures Of Your Vehicle.” Engines Only refer to “Adaptive Cruise Control • Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) (ACC)” in “Understanding The Fea- The Wait To Start Light will SET (for versions/markets, where tures Of Your Vehicle.” turn on when the ignition key equipped) is first turned to the ON/RUN posi- • Low Fuel Telltale tion. Wait until the Wait To Start This telltale will illuminate When the fuel level reaches Light turns OFF to start the engine. when the ACC is SET. For approximately 11.0 L this (Refer to “Starting Procedures” in further information, refer light will turn on, and remain on until “Starting And Operating” for further to “Adaptive Cruise Control fuel is added. information). (ACC)” in “Understanding The Fea- tures Of Your Vehicle.” • Windshield Washer Fluid Low • Water In Fuel Indicator Light — Indicator Diesel Engines Only EVIC AMBER TELLTALES This telltale will turn on to Indicates there is water de- This area will show reconfigurable indicate the windshield tected in the fuel filter. If amber caution telltales. These tell- washer fluid is low. this light remains on, DO tales include: NOT start the vehicle before you drain the water from the fuel

168 filter to prevent engine damage. Refer • Oil Pressure Warning Telltale If jump starting is required, refer to to “Maintenance Procedures/ Drain- “Jump Starting Procedures” in “What This telltale indicates low en- ing Fuel/Water Separator Filter” in To Do In Emergencies”. gine oil pressure. If the light “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for water turns on while driving, stop the ve- • Electronic Throttle Control drain procedure. hicle and shut off the engine as soon (ETC) Telltale • SERV AWD (Service All Wheel as possible. A chime will sound for This telltale informs you of Drive) Indicator (for versions/ four minutes when this light turns on. a problem with the Elec- markets, where provided) Do not operate the vehicle until the tronic Throttle Control This light will turn on when cause is corrected. This light does not (ETC) system. If the telltale the All Wheel Drive feature show how much oil is in the engine. comes on while driving, have the sys- requires service. For further The engine oil level must be checked tem checked by an authorized dealer. information, refer to “All under the hood. If a problem is detected, the telltale Wheel Drive” in “Starting And • Charging System Telltale will come on while the engine is run- Operating.” ning. Cycle the ignition key when the This telltale shows the status vehicle has completely stopped and EVIC RED TELLTALES of the electrical charging sys- the shift lever is placed in the PARK This area will show reconfigurable red tem. If the telltale stays on or comes position. The telltale should turn off. telltales. These telltales include: on while driving, turn off some of the • Door Ajar vehicle's non-essential electrical de- If the telltale remains lit with the en- vices or increase engine speed (if at gine running, your vehicle will usually This telltale turns on when idle). If the charging system telltale be drivable. However, see an autho- one or more doors are ajar. remains on, it means that the vehicle rized dealer for service as soon as pos- The telltale will show which is experiencing a problem with the sible. If the telltale is flashing when doors are ajar. charging system. Obtain SERVICE the engine is running, immediate ser- • Trunk Ajar IMMEDIATELY. See an authorized vice is required. You may experience dealer. reduced performance, an elevated/ This light will turn on to rough idle or engine stall and your indicate that the trunk lid is vehicle may require towing. ajar. 169 • Engine Temperature Warning This may occur with severe usage, • Electric Power Steering Telltale such as trailer towing. If this telltale Malfunction turns on, safely pull over and stop the This telltale warns of an over- This telltale is on when the vehicle. Then, shift the transmission heated engine condition. As Electric Power Steering is into PARK and run the engine at idle temperatures rise and the gauge ap- not operating and needs or faster until the light turns off. proaches H, this telltale will illumi- service. nate and a single chime will sound after reaching a set threshold. Further CAUTION! GEAR SHIFT INDICATOR (GSI) — If Equipped overheating will cause the tempera- Continuous driving with the Trans- ture gauge to pass H, the telltale will mission Temperature Warning Tell- The Gear Shift Indicator (GSI) system continuously flash and a continuous tale illuminated will eventually is enabled on vehicles with a manual chime will occur until the engine is cause severe transmission damage transmission, or when a vehicle with allowed to cool. or transmission failure. an automatic transmission is in If the telltale turns on while driving, manual shift mode. The GSI provides safely pull over and stop the vehicle. If the driver with a visual indication the A/C system is on, turn it off. Also, WARNING! within the EVIC when the recom- shift the transmission into NEUTRAL If the Transmission Temperature mended gear shift point has been and idle the vehicle. If the tempera- Warning Telltale is illuminated and reached. This indication notifies the ture reading does not return to nor- you continue operating the vehicle, driver that changing gear will allow a mal, turn the engine off immediately in some circumstances you could reduction in fuel consumption. and call for service. Refer to “If Your cause the fluid to boil over, come in When the shift up indicator (+) is Engine Overheats” in “What To Do In contact with hot engine or exhaust shown on the display, the GSI is ad- Emergencies” for more information. components and cause a fire. vising the driver to engage a higher • Transmission Temperature gear. Warning Telltale This telltale indicates that the transmission fluid temperature is running hot. 170 OIL CHANGE DUE DIESEL PARTICULATE Your vehicle is equipped with an en- FILTER (DPF) MESSAGES gine oil change indicator system. The • Exhaust System — Regeneration “Oil Change Due” message will flash Required Now. Under conditions of in the EVIC display for approxi- exclusive short duration and low mately 10 seconds after a single chime speed driving and low speed driv- has sounded to indicate the next ing cycles, the engine and exhaust scheduled oil change interval. The en- GSI Shift Up (+) Indicator after-treatment system may never gine oil change indicator system is reach the conditions required to re- When the shift down indicator (-) is duty cycle based, which means the move the trapped PM. If this occurs shown on the display, the GSI is ad- engine oil change interval may fluctu- the “Exhaust System Regeneration vising the driver to engage a lower ate dependent upon your personal Required Now” message will be gear. driving style. displayed on the EVIC. By driving Unless reset, this message will con- your vehicle at highway speeds for tinue to display each time you cycle as little as 30 minutes, you can rem- the ignition to the ON/RUN position. edy the condition in the particulate To turn off the message temporarily, filter system by allowing the press and release the BACK button. trapped PM to be removed to re- To reset the oil change indicator sys- store the system to normal operat- tem please refer to a Lancia Dealer- ing condition. GSI Shift Down (-) Indicator ship. • Exhaust Service Require — See The GSI indicator in the EVIC re- Dealer Now. The engine will be de- mains illuminated until the driver rated to prevent permanent dam- changes gear, or the driving condi- age to the after-treatment system. If tions return to a situation where this condition occurs, it is necessary changing gear is not required to im- to have your vehicle serviced by prove fuel consumption. your local authorized dealer.

171 FUEL ECONOMY erased, and the averaging will con- fuel tank level. DTE cannot be reset tinue from the last fuel average read- through the SELECT button. Press and release the UP or DOWN ing before the reset. button until "Fuel Economy" is high- NOTE: Significant changes in lighted. Press the SELECT button Press the SELECT button to reset the driving style or vehicle loading and the next screen will display the Average Fuel Economy. Press the will greatly affect the actual driv- following: BACK button to return to the main able distance of the vehicle, re- menu. gardless of the DTE displayed • Average Fuel Economy value. There is an ECO icon in the lower • Distance To Empty (DTE) portion of the EVIC display. This icon When the DTE value is less than • Instantaneous Liters Per 100km will appear whenever the Multi- 50 km estimated driving distance, the (L/100km) Displacement System (MDS) (for DTE display will change to a “LOW versions/markets, where provided) FUEL” message. This display will allows the engine to operate on four continue until the vehicle runs out of cylinders, or if you are driving in a fuel. Adding a significant amount of fuel efficient manner. fuel to the vehicle will turn off the “LOW FUEL” message and a new This feature allows you to monitor DTE value will display. Press the when you are driving in a fuel efficient BACK button to return to the main manner, and it can be used to modify menu. driving habits in order to increase fuel Fuel Economy economy. Liters Per 100km (L/100km) Average Fuel Economy / ECO Fuel Distance To Empty (DTE) The Liters Per 100km (L/100km) Saver Mode (for versions/ feature displays instantaneous fuel markets, where provided) Shows the estimated distance that can economy in a bar graph below the be traveled with the fuel remaining in Shows the average fuel economy since DTE, this function cannot be reset. the tank. This estimated distance is the last reset. When the fuel economy Press the BACK button to return to determined by a weighted average of is reset, the display will read “RE- the main menu. the instantaneous and average fuel SET” or show dashes for two seconds. economy, according to the current Then, the history information will be 172 CRUISE CONTROL display, the Cruise status will be SELECT button to display the follow- displayed in place of the EVIC ing three trip features in the next Press and release the UP or DOWN odometer line. screen: button until "ACC" (for versions/ markets, where provided with Adap- Press and release the BACK button to • Trip A return to the main menu. tive Cruise Control) or "Cruise" is • Trip B highlighted in the EVIC. Status of the VEHICLE SPEED ACC or Cruise is displayed in the • Elapsed Time menu line also. Press and release the Press and release the UP or DOWN Press the UP/DOWN buttons to cycle SELECT (right arrow) button to dis- button until "Vehicle Speed" is high- through all the Trip Computer func- play the following information: lighted in the EVIC. Press the SE- tions or press the BACK button to LECT button to view a digital display return to the main menu. • For versions/markets, where pro- of the current speed in km/h or mph. vided with ACC, one of several Pressing the SELECT button a sec- The Trip Functions mode displays the messages will be displayed giving a ond time will toggle the unit of mea- following information: dynamic update of the status of the sure between km/h or mph. Press the Trip A feature as the driver changes fea- BACK button to return to the main ture status or following conditions menu. Shows the total distance traveled for change. If ACC is active and a Trip A since the last reset. warning or other feature is in the NOTE: Changing the unit of mea- EVIC main display, the ACC status sure in the Vehicle Speed menu Trip B will be displayed in place of the will not change the unit of measure Shows the total distance traveled for EVIC odometer line. in the EVIC. Trip B since the last reset. • For vehicles with Cruise, one of sev- TRIP INFO Elapsed Time eral messages will be displayed giv- Press and release the UP or DOWN Shows the total elapsed time of travel ing a dynamic update of the status button until "Trip Info" is highlighted since the last reset. Elapsed time will of the feature as the driver changes in the EVIC. Press and release the increment when the ignition is in the feature status or conditions change. ON/RUN position. If Cruise is active and a warning or other feature is in the EVIC main

173 Resetting A Trip Info Function Tire pressure is an information only • Engine Hours function and cannot be reset. Press To Reset any of the three Trip Info Displays the number of hours of en- and release the BACK button to re- functions, select the function you gine operation. turn to the main menu. want to reset using the UP or DOWN MESSAGES # buttons. Push the SELECT button VEHICLE INFO until the feature displays zero. (CUSTOMER Select from Main Menu using the UP TIRE BAR INFORMATION FEATURES) or DOWN buttons. This feature shows (for versions/markets, the number of stored warning mes- Press and release the UP or DOWN sages (in the # place holder). Pressing button until “Tire BAR” is high- where provided) the SELECT button will allow you to lighted in the EVIC. Press and release Press and release the UP or DOWN see what the stored messages are. the SELECT button and one of the button until "Vehicle Info" is high- Pressing the BACK button takes you following will be displayed: lighted in the EVIC. Press and release back to the Main Menu. • If tire pressure is OK for all tires a the SELECT button and Coolant TURN MENU OFF vehicle ICON is displayed with tire Temp will be displayed. Press the UP pressure values in each corner of or DOWN button to scroll through the Select from Main Menu using the the ICON. following information displays. DOWN button. Pressing the SELECT • Coolant Temp button blanks the menu display. • If one or more tires have low pres- Pressing any one of the four steering sure, "Inflate to XXX" is displayed Displays the actual coolant tempera- wheel buttons brings the menu back. with the vehicle ICON and the tire ture. pressure values in each corner of • Oil Pressure Uconnect® SETTINGS the ICON. The Uconnect® system uses a combi- Displays the actual oil pressure. • If the Tire Pressure system requires nation of soft and hard keys located service, "Service Tire Pressure Sys- • Trans Temperature on the center of the instrument panel tem" is displayed. Displays the actual transmission that allows you to access and change temperature. the customer programmable features.

174 HARD-KEYS Safety/Assistance, Lights, Doors & allow you to toggle up or down Locks, Engine Off Operation, Com- through the available settings. Hard-Keys are located below the pass Settings, Audio, and Phone/ Display Uconnect® system in the center of the Bluetooth. instrument panel. In addition, there is After pressing the Display soft-key NOTE: Only one touchscreen a Scroll/Enter control knob located on the following settings will be avail- area may be selected at a time. the right side of the Climate Controls able. in the center of the instrument panel. Turn the control knob to scroll • Display Mode through menus and change settings When in this display you may select (i.e., 30, 60, 90), press the center of one of the auto display settings. To the control knob one or more times to change Mode status, touch and re- select or change a setting (i.e., ON, lease the Day, Night or Auto soft-key. OFF). Then touch the arrow back soft-key. • Display Brightness With Head- SOFT-KEYS Uconnect® 8.4 Soft-Keys lights ON Soft-Keys are accessible on the When making a selection, press the Uconnect® touchscreen. soft-key to enter the desired mode. When in this display, you may select Once in the desired mode press and the brightness with the headlights on. CUSTOMER Adjust the brightness with the + and – PROGRAMMABLE release the preferred setting until a check-mark appears next to the set- setting soft-keys or by selecting any FEATURES — Uconnect® ting, showing that setting has been point on the scale between the + and – 8.4 SETTINGS selected. soft-keys. Then touch the arrow back soft-key. Press the More soft-key, then press the Once the setting is complete press the Settings soft-key to display the menu Back Arrow soft-key to return to the • Display Brightness With Head- setting screen. In this mode the previous menu or press the X soft-key lights OFF Uconnect® system allows you to ac- to close out of the settings screen. When in this display, you may select cess programmable features that may Pressing the Up or Down Arrow soft- the brightness with the headlights off. be equipped such as Display, Clock, keys on the right side of the screen will Adjust the brightness with the + and –

175 setting soft-keys or by selecting any selected. Touch the back arrow soft- the display as the vehicle approaches point on the scale between the + and – key to return to the previous menu. a designated turn within a pro- soft-keys. Then touch the arrow back • Voice Response Length grammed route. To make your selec- soft-key. tion, touch the Navigation Turn-By- When in this display, you may change • Language Turn In Cluster soft-key, until a the Voice Response Length settings. check-mark appears next to the set- Press the Language soft-key to To change the Voice Response Length, ting, showing that setting has been change this display. When in this dis- touch the Brief or Detailed soft-key selected. Touch the back arrow soft- play you may select a different lan- until a check-mark appears next to key to return to the previous menu. guage for all display nomenclature, the setting, showing that setting has • Fuel Saver Display In Cluster including the trip functions and the been selected. Touch the back arrow navigation system (for versions/ soft-key to return to the previous The “ECO” message is located in the markets, where provided). Press the menu. instrument cluster display, this mes- German, French, Spanish, Italian, • Touchscreen Beep sage can be turned on or off. To make Dutch or English button to select the your selection, touch the Fuel Saver language preferred followed by press- When in this display, you may turn on Display soft-key, until a check-mark ing the arrow back soft-key. Then, as or shut off the sound heard when a appears next to the setting, showing you continue, the information will touch screen button (soft-key) is that setting has been selected. Touch display in the selected language. pressed. Touch the Touchscreen Beep the back arrow soft-key to return to soft-key until a check-mark appears • Units the previous menu. next to the setting, showing that set- Clock When in this display, you may select ting has been selected. Touch the back to have the EVIC, odometer, and arrow soft-key to return to the previ- After pressing the Clock soft-key the navigation system (for versions/ ous menu. following settings will be available. markets, where provided) changed • Navigation Turn-By-Turn In • Sync Time With GPS (for between US and Metric units of mea- Cluster (for versions/markets, versions/markets, where provided) sure. Touch US or Metric until a where provided) check-mark appears next to the set- When in this display, you may auto- ting, showing that setting has been When this feature is selected, the matically have the radio set the time. turn-by-turn directions will appear in To change the Sync Time setting

176 touch the Sync with GPS Time soft- • Time Format • Front Collision Sensitivity (for key until a check-mark appears next versions/markets, where provided) When in this display, you may select to the setting, showing that setting has the time format display setting. Touch The Front Collision Warning (FCW) been selected. Touch the back arrow the Time Format soft-key until a feature can be can be set to Far, set to soft-key to return to the previous check-mark appears next to the 12hrs Near or turned Off. The default status menu. or 24hrs setting, showing that setting of FCW is the Far setting. This means • Set Time Hours has been selected. Touch the back ar- the system will warn you of a possible When in this display, you may adjust row soft-key to return to the previous collision with the vehicle in front of the hours. The Sync with GPS Time menu. you when you are farther away. This soft-key must be unchecked. To make • Show Time In Status Bar gives you the most reaction time. To your selection touch the + or - soft- change the setting for more dynamic When in this display, you may turn on keys to adjust the hours up or down. driving, select the Near setting. This or shut off the digital clock in the Touch the back arrow soft-key to re- warns you of a possible collision when status bar. To change the Show Time turn to the previous menu or touch the you are much closer to the vehicle in Status setting touch the Show Time in X soft-key to close out of the settings front of you. This allows for a more Status Bar soft-key until a check- screen. dynamic driving experience. To mark appears next to setting, showing change the FCW status, touch and • Set Time Minutes that setting has been selected. Touch release the OFF, Near or Far button. When in this display, you may adjust the back arrow soft-key to return to Then touch the arrow back soft-key. the previous menu. the minutes. The Sync with GPS Time For further information, refer to soft-key must be unchecked. To make Safety / Assistance “Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)” in your selection touch the + or - soft- After pressing the Safety / Assistance “Understanding The Features Of keys to adjust the minutes up or soft-key the following settings will be Your Vehicle”. down. Touch the back arrow soft-key available. • Park Assist to return to the previous menu or touch the X soft-key to close out of the The Rear Park Assist system will scan settings screen. for objects behind the vehicle when the transmission shift lever is in RE- VERSE and the vehicle speed is less 177 than 18 km/h. The system can be • Blind Spot Alert (for versions/ Having a sensor that is misaligned enabled with Sound Only, Sound and markets, where provided) will result in the BSM not operat- Display, or turned OFF. To change the ing to specification. When this feature is selected, the Park Assist status, touch and release Blind Spot Alert feature can be set to • ParkView® Backup Camera (for the OFF, Sound Only or Sounds and Off, Lights or Lights and Chime. The versions/markets, where provided) Display button. Then touch the arrow Blind Spot Alert feature can be acti- back soft-key. Refer to “ParkSense® Your vehicle may be equipped with vated in “Lights” mode. When this Rear Park Assist” in “Understanding the ParkView® Rear Back Up Cam- mode is selected, the Blind Spot Moni- The Features Of Your Vehicle” for era that allows you to see an on-screen tor (BSM) system is activated and will system function and operating image of the rear surroundings of only show a visual alert in the outside information. your vehicle whenever the shift lever mirrors. When “Lights & Chime” is put into REVERSE. The image will • Tilt Mirrors In Reverse (for mode is activated, the Blind Spot be displayed on the radio touchscreen versions/markets, where provided) Monitor (BSM) will show a visual display along with a caution note to alert in the outside mirrors as well as When this feature is selected, the out- “check entire surroundings” across an audible alert when the turn signal side sideview mirrors will tilt down- the top of the screen. After five sec- is on. When “Off” is selected, the ward when the ignition is in the RUN onds, this note will disappear. The Blind Spot Monitor (BSM) system is position and the transmission shift le- ParkView® camera is located on the deactivated. To change the Blind Spot ver is in the REVERSE position. The rear of the vehicle above the rear Li- Alert status, touch the Off, Lights or mirrors will move back to their previ- cense plate. To make your selection, Lights & Chime soft-key. Then touch ous position when the transmission is touch the ParkView® Backup Cam- the arrow back soft-key. shifted out of REVERSE. To make era soft-key, until a check-mark ap- your selection, touch the Tilt Mirrors NOTE: If your vehicle has expe- pears next to setting, showing that In Reverse soft-key, until a check- rienced any damage in the area setting has been selected. Touch the mark appears next to setting, showing where the sensor is located, even if back arrow soft-key to return to the that setting has been selected. Touch the fascia is not damaged, the sen- previous menu. the back arrow soft-key to return to sor may have become misaligned. the previous menu. Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer to verify sensor alignment.

178 • Rain Sensing Auto Wipers (for • Headlight Off Delay also turn off when the wipers are versions/markets, where provided) turned off if they were turned on by When this feature is selected, the this feature. To make your selection, When this feature is selected, the sys- driver can choose to have the head- touch the Headlights With Wipers tem will automatically activate the lights remain on for 0, 30, 60, or 90 soft-key, until a check-mark appears windshield wipers if it senses moisture seconds when exiting the vehicle. To next to setting, showing that setting on the windshield. To make your se- change the Headlight Off Delay status has been selected. Touch the back ar- lection, touch the Rain Sensing soft- touch the 0, 30, 60 or 90 soft-key. row soft-key to return to the previous key, until a check-mark appears next Then touch the arrow back soft-key. menu. to setting, showing that setting has • Headlight Illumination On Ap- • Auto Dim High Beams “Smart- been selected. Touch the back arrow proach soft-key to return to the previous Beam™” (for versions/markets, menu. When this feature is selected, the where provided) headlights will activate and remain on • Hill Start Assist When this feature is selected, the high for 0, 30, 60, or 90 seconds when the beam headlights will deactivate auto- When this feature is selected, the Hill doors are unlocked with the Remote matically under certain conditions. To Start Assist (HSA) system is active. Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter. To make your selection, touch the Auto Refer to “Electronic Brake Control change the Illuminated Approach sta- High Beams soft-key, until a check- System” in “Starting And Operating” tus, touch the + or - soft-key to select mark appears next to setting, showing for system function and operating in- your desired time interval. Touch the that setting has been selected. Touch formation. To make your selection, back arrow soft-key to return to the the back arrow soft-key to return to touch the Hill Start Assist soft-key, previous menu. the previous menu. Refer to “Lights/ until a check-mark appears next to • Headlights With Wipers (for SmartBeam™ (for versions/markets, setting, showing that setting has been versions/markets, where provided) where provided)” in “Understanding selected. Touch the back arrow soft- The Features Of Your Vehicle” for key to return to the previous menu. When this feature is selected, and the headlight switch is in the AUTO posi- further information. Lights tion, the headlights will turn on ap- After pressing the Lights soft-key the proximately 10 seconds after the wip- following settings will be available. ers are turned on. The headlights will

179 • Daytime Running Lights (for their light downward and either to the Exit soft-key, until a check-mark ap- versions/markets, where provided) left for right hand drive countries or to pears next to setting, showing that the right for left hand drive countries setting has been selected. Touch the When this feature is selected, the to provide safe forward visibility back arrow soft-key to return to the headlights will turn on whenever the without excessive glare. previous menu. engine is running. To make your selection, touch the Daytime Running Doors & Locks • 1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks Lights soft-key, until a check-mark After pressing the Doors & Locks soft- When 1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks is appears next to setting, showing that key the following settings will be selected, only the driver's door will setting has been selected. Touch the available. unlock on the first press of the Remote back arrow soft-key to return to the Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter UN- previous menu. • Auto Lock LOCK button. When 1st Press Of Key • Steering Directed Lights (for When this feature is selected, all doors Fob Unlocks is selected, you must versions/markets, where provided) will lock automatically when the ve- press the RKE transmitter UNLOCK hicle reaches a speed of 24 km/h. To button twice to unlock the passenger's When this feature is selected, the make your selection, touch the Auto doors. When Unlock All Doors On 1st headlights turn relative to a change in Lock soft-key, until a check-mark ap- Press is selected, all of the doors will direction of the steering wheel. To pears next to setting, showing that unlock on the first press of the RKE make your selection, touch the Steer- setting has been selected. Touch the transmitter UNLOCK button. ing Directed Lights soft-key, until a back arrow soft-key to return to the check-mark appears next to setting, previous menu. NOTE: If the vehicle is pro- showing that setting has been se- grammed 1st Press Of Key Fob Un- lected. Touch the back arrow soft-key • Auto Unlock On Exit locks, all doors will unlock no to return to the previous menu. When this feature is selected, all doors matter which Passive Entry equipped door handle is grasped. • Headlight Dipped Beam (Traffic will unlock when the vehicle is If 1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks is Changeover) (for versions/markets, stopped and the transmission is in the PARK or NEUTRAL position and the programmed, only the driver’s where provided) door will unlock when the driver’s driver's door is opened. To make your door is grasped. With Passive En- Low beam headlights have more con- selection, touch the Auto Unlock On trol of upward light and direct most of try, if 1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks

180 is programmed touching the Linked To FOB soft-key, until a been selected. Touch the back arrow handle more than once will only check-mark appears next to setting, soft-key to return to the previous result in the driver’s door opening. showing that setting has been se- menu. If driver door first is selected, once lected. Touch the back arrow soft-key • Engine Off Power Delay (for the driver door is opened, the inte- to return to the previous menu. versions/markets, where provided) rior door lock/unlock switch can NOTE: The seat will return to the be used to unlock all doors (or use When this feature is selected, the memorized seat location (if Recall RKE transmitter). power window switches, radio, Memory with Remote Key Unlock Uconnect® phone system (for • Passive Entry is set to ON) when the Remote Key- versions/markets, where provided), This feature allows you to lock and less Entry (RKE) transmitter is DVD video system (for versions/ unlock the vehicle’s door(s) without used to unlock the door. Refer to markets, where provided), power having to press the Remote Keyless “Driver Memory Seat” in “Under- sunroof (for versions/markets, where Entry (RKE) transmitter lock or un- standing The Features Of Your Ve- provided), and power outlets will re- lock buttons. To make your selection, hicle” for further information. main active for up to 10 minutes after touch the Passive Entry soft-key, until Engine Off Options the ignition is cycled to OFF. Opening a check-mark appears next to setting, either front door will cancel this fea- showing that setting has been selected. After pressing the Engine Off Options ture. To change the Engine Off Power Touch the back arrow soft-key to re- soft-key the following settings will be Delay status touch the 0 seconds, 45 turn to the previous menu. Refer to available. seconds, 5 minutes or 10 minutes “Keyless Enter-N-Go” in “Things To • Easy Exit Seat (for versions/ soft-key. Then touch the arrow back Know Before Starting Your Vehicle”. markets, where provided) soft-key. • Personal Settings Linked To FOB (for versions/markets, where pro- This feature provides automatic • Headlight Off Delay vided) driver seat positioning to enhance driver mobility when entering and ex- When this feature is selected, the This feature provides automatic iting the vehicle. To make your selec- driver can choose to have the head- driver seat positioning to enhance tion, touch the Easy Exit Seats soft- lights remain on for 0, 30, 60, or 90 driver mobility when entering and ex- key, until a check-mark appears next seconds when exiting the vehicle. To iting the vehicle. To make your selec- to setting, showing that setting has change the Headlight Off Delay status tion, touch the Personal Settings touch the + or - soft-key to select your 181 desired time interval. Touch the back • Variance NOTE: Keep magnetic materials arrow soft-key to return to the previ- away from the top of the instru- Compass Variance is the difference ous menu. ment panel, such as iPod's, Mobile between Magnetic North and Geo- Phones, Laptops and Radar Detec- Compass Settings graphic North. To compensate for the tors. This is where the compass differences the variance should be set After pressing the Compass Settings module is located, and it can cause for the zone where the vehicle is soft-key the following settings will be interference with the compass sen- driven, per the zone map. Once prop- available: sor, and it may give false readings. erly set, the compass will automatically compensate for the differences, and provide the most accurate compass heading.

Compass Variance Map

182 • Perform Compass Calibration point on the scale between the + and – • Surround Sound (for versions/ soft-keys. Then touch the arrow back markets, where provided) Touch the Calibration soft-key to soft-key. change this setting. This compass is This feature provides simulated sur- self-calibrating, which eliminates the NOTE: Bass/Mid/Treble allow round sound mode. To make your se- need to manually reset the compass. you to simply slide your finger up lection, touch the Surround Sound When the vehicle is new, the compass or down to change the setting as soft-key, select On or Off followed by may appear erratic until the compass well as touch directly on the depressing the arrow back soft-key. is calibrated. You may also calibrate sired setting. Phone/Bluetooth the compass by pressing the ON soft- • Speed Adjusted Volume key and completing one or more 360- After pressing the Phone/Bluetooth degree turns, in an area free from This feature increases or decreases soft-key the following settings will be large metal or metallic objects. The volume relative to vehicle speed. To available. compass will now function normally. change the Speed Adjusted Volume • Paired Devices touch the Off, 1, 2 or 3 soft-key. Then Audio touch the arrow back soft-key. This feature shows which phones are paired to the Phone/Bluetooth sys- After pressing the Audio soft-key the • Music Info Cleanup (for versions/ tem. For further information, refer to following settings will be available. markets, where provided) the Uconnect® Supplement. • Balance/Fade This feature helps organize music files When in this display you may adjust for optimized music navigation. To SOUND SYSTEMS the Balance and Fade settings. make your selection, touch the Music Refer to your Sound Systems Booklet. • Equalizer Info Cleanup soft-key, select On or Off followed by pressing the arrow back NAVIGATION SYSTEM When in this display you may adjust soft-key. the Bass, Mid and Treble settings. Ad- (for versions/markets, just the settings with the + and – where provided) setting soft-keys or by selecting any Refer to your Uconnect® User Manual.

183 SETTING THE ANALOG control features. Please visit Apple’s The 12 Channel Class D GreenEdge CLOCK website for software updates. high efficiency amplifier is governed by a high voltage tracking power sup- For further information, refer to the To set the analog clock at the top ply and drives a 7.5-channel play- Uconnect® User’s Manual. center of the instrument panel, press back architecture. The Harman Kar- and hold the button until the setting is HARMAN KARDON® don® audio system offers the ability correct. to choose Logic 7 surround sound for Logic7® HIGH any audio source. The GreenEdge PERFORMANCE high-efficiency speaker designs en- MULTICHANNEL sure the system has higher SPL and a SURROUND SOUND dramatic increase in dynamic sound quality. The speakers are tuned for SYSTEM WITH maximum efficiency and perfectly DRIVER-SELECTABLE matched to the amplifier output stage SURROUND (DSS) (for ensuring state of the art multi-seat Setting The Analog Clock versions/markets, where surround sound processing. iPod®/USB/MP3 required) Logic7® multichannel surround- sound technology delivers an immer- CONTROL (for Your vehicle is equipped with a Har- vehicles/markets, where sive, accurate sound-stage to every man Kardon® audio system with seating position This surround effect provided) GreenEdge™ technology that offers is available for audio from any source superior sound quality, higher Sound This feature allows an iPod® or exter- - AM/FM/CD/ or dashboard AUX in- Pressure Levels (SPL) and reduced nal USB device to be plugged into the put; and is activated through the energy consumption. The new system USB port. Uconnect® System. Refer to “Sur- utilizes proprietary amplifier and round Sound” under “Uconnect® iPod® control supports Mini, 4G, speaker technologies delivering sub- Settings” in “Understanding Your In- Photo, Nano, 5G iPod® and iPhone® stantial increases in component and strument Panel”. devices. Some iPod® software ver- system efficiency levels. sions may not fully support the iPod®

184 Selecting “Audio Surround” through RADIO OPERATION the DSS modes activates the Harman Pressing the top of the switch will Kardon® Logic7® multichannel “Seek” up for the next listenable sta- surround-sound technology in your tion and pressing the bottom of the vehicle. The “Video Surround” mode switch will “Seek” down for the next is described under Driver-Selectable listenable station. Surround (DSS). The Video Surround Mode will only be available for video The button located in the center of the media sources (DVDs, Video CDs, or Remote Sound System Controls (Back left-hand control will tune to the next other video media supported by the View Of Steering Wheel) preset station that you have pro- radio). Some audio will sound better The right-hand control is a rocker- grammed in the radio preset pushbut- in DSS modes, others in Stereo mode. type switch with a pushbutton in the ton. When in “Audio Surround” mode, center and controls the volume and CD PLAYER balance is set automatically. Fader mode of the sound system. Pressing Pressing the top of the switch once control is available in surround mode the top of the rocker switch will in- will go to the next track on the CD. but should be set to the center position crease the volume, and pressing the Pressing the bottom of the switch once for optimal surround performance. bottom of the rocker switch will decrease the volume. will go to the beginning of the current STEERING WHEEL track, or to the beginning of the pre- Pressing the center button will make vious track if it is within one second AUDIO CONTROLS the radio switch between the various after the current track begins to play. modes available (MW/LW/CD, etc.). The remote sound system controls are If you press the switch up or down located on the surface of the steering The left-hand control is a rocker-type twice, it plays the second track; three wheel at the three and nine o'clock switch with a pushbutton in the cen- times, it will play the third, etc. positions. ter. The function of the left-hand control is different depending on which The center button on the left side mode you are in. rocker switch has no function for a single-disc CD player. However, when The following describes the left-hand a multiple-disc CD player is equipped control operation in each mode.

185 on the vehicle, the center button will NOTE: If you experience diffi- CLIMATE CONTROLS select the next available CD in the culty in playing a particular disc, it player. may be damaged (i.e., scratched, The air conditioning and heating sys- reflective coating removed, a hair, tem is designed to make you comfort- CD/DVD DISC moisture or dew on the disc) over- able in all types of weather. This sys- MAINTENANCE sized, or have protection encoding. tem can be operated through either Try a known good disc before con- the controls on the instrument panel To keep a CD/DVD in good condition, sidering disc player service. or through the Uconnect® system dis- take the following precautions: play. 1. Handle the disc by its edge; avoid RADIO OPERATION AND When the Uconnect® system is in dif- touching the surface. MOBILE PHONES ferent modes (Radio, Player, Settings, More, etc.) the driver and passenger 2. If the disc is stained, clean the Under certain conditions, the mobile temperature settings will be indicated surface with a soft cloth, wiping from phone being on in your vehicle can at the top of the display. center to edge. cause erratic or noisy performance from your radio. This condition may 3. Do not apply paper or tape to the GENERAL OVERVIEW be lessened or eliminated by relocat- disc; avoid scratching the disc. Hard-Keys ing the mobile phone antenna. This 4. Do not use solvents such as ben- condition is not harmful to the radio. The hard-keys are located below the zene, thinner, cleaners, or anti-static If your radio performance does not Uconnect® screen, in the center of the sprays. satisfactorily “clear” by the reposi- instrument panel. tioning of the antenna, it is recom- 5. Store the disc in its case after play- mended that the radio volume be ing. turned down or off during mobile 6. Do not expose the disc to direct phone operation. sunlight. 7. Do not store the disc where temperatures may become too high.

186 Button Descriptions (Applies To 4. Blower Control Both Hard-keys And Soft-keys) Blower control is used to regulate the 1. MAX A/C Button amount of air forced through the cli- Press and release to change the cur- mate system. There are seven blower rent setting, the indicator illuminates speeds available. Adjusting the when MAX A/C is ON. Performing blower will cause automatic mode to this function again will cause the switch to manual operation. The speeds can be selected using either Automatic Climate Controls — MAX A/C operation to switch into hard-keys or soft-keys as follows: Hard-keys manual mode and the MAX A/C indi- Soft-Keys cator will turn off. Hard-key Soft-keys are accessible on the 2. A/C Button The blower speed increases as you turn the control clockwise from the Uconnect® screen. Press and release to change the cur- lowest blower setting. The blower rent Air Conditioning (A/C) setting, speed decreases as you turn the knob the indicator illuminates when A/C is counter-clockwise. ON. Performing this function again will cause the automatic operation to Soft-key — Uconnect® 8.4 switch into manual mode and the Use the small blower icon to reduce AUTO indicator will turn off. the blower setting and the large 3. Recirculation Button blower icon to increase the blower setting. Blower can also be selected by Press and release to change the cur- Uconnect® 8.4 Automatic pressing the blower bar area between Temperature Controls — Soft-keys rent setting, the indicator illuminates the icons. when ON.

187 5. Front Defrost Button CAUTION! NOTE: Pressing this button while in Sync mode will automati- Press and release to change the cur- Failure to follow these cautions can cally exit Sync. rent airflow setting to Defrost mode. cause damage to the heating ele- The indicator illuminates when this ments: 8. Passenger Temperature Control feature is ON. Air comes from the • Use care when washing the inside Down Button windshield and side window demist of the rear window. Do not use Provides the passenger with indepen- outlets. When the defrost button is abrasive window cleaners on the dent temperature control. Push the selected, the blower level will in- interior surface of the window. button for cooler temperature set- crease. Use Defrost mode with maxi- Use a soft cloth and a mild wash- tings. mum temperature settings for best ing solution, wiping parallel to windshield and side window defrost- the heating elements. Labels can NOTE: Pressing this button ing and defogging. Performing this be peeled off after soaking with while in Sync mode will automati- function will cause the ATC to switch warm water. cally exit Sync. into manual mode. If the front defrost • Do not use scrapers, sharp instru- 9. Climate Control OFF Button mode is turned off the climate system ments, or abrasive window clean- Press and release this button to turn will return to the previous setting. ers on the interior surface of the the Climate Control ON/OFF. 6. Rear Defrost Button window. • Keep all objects a safe distance 10. AUTO Operation Button Press and release this button to turn from the window. on the rear window defroster and the Automatically controls the interior heated outside mirrors. An indicator 7. Passenger Temperature Control cabin temperature by adjusting air- will illuminate when the rear window Up Button flow distribution and amount. Per- defroster is on. The rear window de- forming this function will cause the froster automatically turns off after Provides the passenger with indepen- ATC to switch between manual mode 10 minutes. dent temperature control. Push the and automatic modes. Refer to “Au- button for warmer temperature set- tomatic Operation” for more informa- tings. tion.

188 11. Driver Temperature Control • Panel Mode • Mix Mode Down Button Air comes from the outlets in Air comes from the floor, de- the instrument panel. Each of frost and side window demist Provides the driver with independent these outlets can be individu- outlets. This mode works best temperature control. Push the button ally adjusted to direct the flow of air. in cold or snowy conditions. for cooler temperature settings. The air vanes of the center outlets and • Defrost Mode NOTE: In Sync mode, this but- outboard outlets can be moved up and Air comes from the windshield ton will also automatically adjust down or side to side to regulate air- and side window demist out- the passenger temperature setting flow direction. There is a shut off lets. Use Defrost mode with at the same time. wheel located below the air vanes to maximum temperature settings for 12. Driver Temperature Control Up shut off or adjust the amount of air- best windshield and side window de- Button flow from these outlets. frosting and defogging. When the de- • Bi-Level Mode frost mode is selected, the blower level Provides the driver with independent Air comes from the instrument will increase. temperature control. Push the button panel outlets and floor outlets. 14. SYNC for warmer temperature settings. A slight amount of air is di- NOTE: In Sync mode, this but- rected through the defrost and side Press the Sync soft-key to toggle the ton will also automatically adjust window demister outlets. Sync feature On/Off. The Sync indicator is illuminated when this feature the passenger temperature setting NOTE: BI-LEVEL mode is de- is enabled. Sync is used to synchro- at the same time. signed under comfort conditions nize the passenger temperature set- to provide cooler air out of the 13. Modes ting with the driver temperature set- panel outlets and warmer air from ting. Changing the passenger 1. The airflow distribution mode can the floor outlets. be adjusted so air comes from the temperature setting while in Sync will • Floor Mode instrument panel outlets, floor out- automatically exit this feature. Air comes from the floor outlets, demist outlets and defrost outlets. A slight amount of air is lets. The Mode settings are as follows: directed through the defrost and side window demister outlets.

189 CLIMATE CONTROL behind the radiator and through button a second time to turn off the FUNCTIONS the condenser. Fabric front fas- Recirculation mode and allow outside cia protectors may reduce air- air into the vehicle. A/C (Air Conditioning) flow to the condenser, reducing NOTE: In cold weather, use of air conditioning performance. The Air Conditioning (A/C) button Recirculation mode may lead to allows the operator to manually acti- MAX A/C excessive window fogging. The re- vate or deactivate the air conditioning circulation feature may be un- Max A/C sets the control for maxi- system. When the air conditioning available (soft-key button greyed mum cooling performance.Press and system is turned on, cool dehumidi- out) if conditions exist that could release to toggle between Max A/C fied air will flow through the outlets create fogging on the inside of he and the prior settings. The soft-key into the cabin. For improved fuel windshield. On systems with illuminates when Max A/C is ON. economy, press the A/C button to turn Manual Climate Controls, the Re- off the air conditioning and manually In MAX A/C, the blower level and circulation mode is not allowed in adjust the blower and airflow mode mode position can be adjusted to de- Defrost mode to improve window settings. Also, make sure to select only sired user settings. Pressing other set- clearing operation. Recirculation Panel, Bi-Level or Floor modes. tings will cause the MAX A/C opera- will be disabled automatically if NOTE: tion to switch to the prior settings and this mode is selected. Attempting the MAX A/C indicator will turn off. to use Recirculation while in this • If fog or mist appears on the mode will cause the LED in the Recirculation windshield or side glass, select control button to blink and then Defrost mode and increase turn off. blower speed. When outside air contains smoke, odors, or high hu- AUTOMATIC • If your air conditioning perfor- TEMPERATURE CONTROL mance seems lower than ex- midity, or if rapid cooling is pected, check the front of the desired, you may wish to (ATC) A/C condenser (located in front recirculate interior air by pressing the ATC Hard-keys are located in the cen- of the radiator), for an accumu- Recirculation control button. The re- ter of the instrument panel. lation of dirt or insects. Clean circulation indicator will illuminate with a gentle water spray from when this button is selected. Push the

190 Soft-keys are accessible on the NOTE: The blower fan speed can be set to any Uconnect® system screen. fixed speed by adjusting the blower • It is not necessary to move the control. The fan will now operate at a Automatic Operation temperature settings for cold or fixed speed until additional speeds are hot vehicles. The system auto- 1. Press the AUTO hard-key or soft- selected. This allows the front occu- matically adjusts the tempera- key button (4) on the Automatic Tem- pants to control the volume of air ture, mode, and blower speed to perature Control (ATC) Panel. circulated in the vehicle and cancel provide comfort as quickly as the Auto mode. 2. Next, adjust the temperature you possible. would like the system to maintain by The operator can also select the direc- • The temperature can be dis- adjusting the driver and passenger tion of the airflow by selecting one of played in U.S. or Metric units by temperature hard or soft control but- the available mode settings. A/C op- selecting the US/M customer- tons (7, 8, 13, 14). Once the desired eration and Recirculation control can programmable feature. Refer to temperature is displayed, the system also be manually selected in Manual the “Uconnect® System Set- will achieve and automatically main- operation. tings” in this section of the tain that comfort level. manual. OPERATING TIPS 3. When the system is set up for your To provide you with maximum com- comfort level, it is not necessary to NOTE: Refer to the chart at the fort in the Automatic mode, during change the settings. You will experi- end of this section for suggested cold start-ups the blower fan will re- ence the greatest efficiency by simply control settings for various main on low until the engine warms allowing the system to function auto- weather conditions. up. The blower will increase in speed matically. and transition into Auto mode. Summer Operation Manual Operation Override The engine cooling system in air- conditioned vehicles must be pro- The system allows for manual selec- tected with a high-quality antifreeze tion of blower speed, air distribution coolant to provide proper corrosion mode, A/C status and recirculation protection and to protect against en- control. gine overheating. A solution of 50% glycol antifreeze coolant and 50%

191 water is recommended. Refer to Window Fogging A/C Air Filter “Maintenance Procedures” in “Main- Interior fogging on the windshield can The climate control system filters out- taining Your Vehicle” for proper cool- be quickly removed by turning the side air containing dust, pollen and ant selection. mode selector to Defrost. The Defrost/ some odors. Strong odors cannot be Winter Operation Floor mode can be used to maintain a totally filtered out. Refer to “Mainte- clear windshield and provide suffi- nance Procedures” in “Maintaining Use of the air Recirculation mode dur- cient heating. If side window fogging Your Vehicle” for filter replacement ing Winter months is not recom- becomes objectionable, increase instructions. mended because it may cause window blower speed to improve airflow and fogging. clearing of the side windows. Vehicle Vacation Storage windows tend to fog on the inside in Any time you store your vehicle or mild but rainy or humid weather. keep it out of service (i.e., vacation) NOTE: for two weeks or more, run the air • Recirculate without A/C should conditioning system at idle for about not be used for long periods, as five minutes in the fresh air and high fogging may occur. blower setting. This will ensure adequate system lubrication to minimize • Automatic Temperature Con- the possibility of compressor damage trols (ATC) will automatically when the system is started again. adjust the climate control settings to reduce or eliminate window fogging on the front windshield. When this occurs, recirculation will be unavailable.

192 5

STARTING AND OPERATING

• STARTING PROCEDURES ...... 197 • KEYLESS ENTER-N-GO™ ...... 197 • NORMAL STARTING — GASOLINE ENGINE . .197 • EXTREME COLD WEATHER (BELOW −29°C) ...... 198 • IF ENGINE FAILS TO START ...... 198 • AFTERSTARTING...... 199 • NORMAL STARTING – DIESEL ENGINE .....199 • AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION ...... 201 • KEY IGNITION PARK INTERLOCK ...... 202 • BRAKE/TRANSMISSION SHIFT INTERLOCK SYSTEM ...... 202 • EIGHT-SPEED AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION – 3.6L ENGINE ...... 202 • FIVE-SPEED AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION – 3.0L DIESEL ENGINE ...... 207 • AUTOSTICK® (for versions/markets, where provided) ...... 211 • OPERATION – 3.6L ENGINE...... 211 • OPERATION – 3.0L DIESEL ENGINE ...... 212 • ALL-WHEEL DRIVE (AWD) (for versions/markets, where provided) ...... 213

193 • DRIVING ON SLIPPERY SURFACES ...... 213 • ACCELERATION...... 213 • TRACTION ...... 214 • DRIVING THROUGH WATER ...... 214 • FLOWING/RISING WATER...... 214 • SHALLOW STANDING WATER...... 214 • POWER STEERING ...... 215 • PARKING BRAKE ...... 216 • ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM ...... 217 • ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM .....219 • ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM (ABS) ...... 219 • TRACTION CONTROL SYSTEM (TCS) ...... 219 • BRAKE ASSIST SYSTEM (BAS) ...... 219 • ELECTRONIC STABILITY CONTROL (ESC) . .220 • HILL START ASSIST (HSA) ...... 222 • READY ALERT BRAKING ...... 223 • RAIN BRAKE SUPPORT ...... 223 • ESC ACTIVATION/MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LIGHT AND ESC OFF INDICATOR LIGHT . . . .223 • SYNCHRONIZING ESC ...... 224 • TIRES — GENERAL INFORMATION ...... 224 • Tire Pressure ...... 224 • Tire Inflation Pressures ...... 225 • Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation . . . .226 • Radial Ply Tires ...... 226 • Tire Types...... 227

194 • Run Flat Tires (for versions/markets, where provided) ...... 227 • Spare Tires (for versions/markets, where provided) ...... 228 • Tire Spinning ...... 229 • Tread Wear Indicators ...... 230 • LifeOfTire...... 230 • Replacement Tires ...... 230 • TIRE CHAINS (TRACTION DEVICES) ...... 231 • TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS ...... 232 • TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR SYSTEM (TPMS) . .232 • PREMIUM SYSTEM ...... 234 • FUEL REQUIREMENTS — GASOLINE ENGINES ...... 236 • 3.6L ENGINE ...... 236 • FUEL REQUIREMENTS — DIESEL ENGINES . . .238 • BIODIESEL FUEL REQUIREMENTS ...... 239 • ADDING FUEL ...... 239 • EMERGENCY FUEL FILLER DOOR RELEASE ...... 240 • TRAILER TOWING ...... 240 • COMMON TOWING DEFINITIONS ...... 240 • BREAKAWAY CABLE ATTACHMENT ...... 242 • TRAILER TOWING WEIGHTS (MAXIMUM TRAILER WEIGHT RATINGS) ...... 243 • TRAILER AND TONGUE WEIGHT ...... 244 • TOWING REQUIREMENTS ...... 244

195 • TOWING TIPS ...... 248 • TRAILER HITCH ATTACHING POINTS ...... 249 • RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND MOTORHOME, ETC.) ...... 250

196 STARTING WARNING! (Continued) NORMAL STARTING — GASOLINE ENGINE PROCEDURES • Do not leave the key fob in or near Before starting your vehicle, adjust the vehicle, or in a location acces- Using The ENGINE START/STOP your seat, adjust the inside and out- sible to children, and do not leave Button the ignition of a vehicle equipped side mirrors, fasten your seat belt, and 1. The transmission must be in PARK with Keyless Enter-N-Go™ in the if present, instruct all other occupants or NEUTRAL. to buckle their seat belts. ACC or ON/RUN mode. A child could operate power windows, 2. Press and hold the brake pedal other controls, or move the ve- while pressing the ENGINE START/ WARNING! hicle. STOP button once. • When leaving the vehicle, always remove the key fob and lock your KEYLESS ENTER-N-GO™ 3. The system takes over and at- vehicle. tempts to start the vehicle. If the vehicle fails to start, the starter will dis- • Never leave children alone in a This feature allows engage automatically after vehicle, or with access to an un- the driver to oper- 10 seconds. locked vehicle. Allowing children ate the ignition to be in a vehicle unattended is switch with the 4. If you wish to stop the cranking of dangerous for a number of rea- push of a button, the engine prior to the engine starting, sons. A child or others could be as long as the Re- press the button again. seriously or fatally injured. Chil- mote Keyless Entry NOTE: Normal starting of either a dren should be warned not to (RKE) transmitter is in the passenger cold or a warm engine is obtained touch the parking brake, brake compartment. without pumping or pressing the pedal or the shift lever. accelerator pedal. (Continued)

197 To Turn Off The Engine Using NOTE: If the ignition switch is left • Press the ENGINE START/STOP ENGINE START/STOP Button in the ACC or RUN (engine not run- button a second time to change the ning) position and the transmis- ignition switch to the RUN position 1. Place the shift lever in PARK, then sion is in PARK, the system will (RUN will illuminate), press and release the ENGINE automatically time out after 30 START/STOP button. • Press the ENGINE START/STOP minutes of inactivity and the igni- button a third time to return the 2. The ignition switch will return to tion will switch to the OFF posi- ignition switch to the OFF position the OFF position. tion. (OFF will illuminate). 3. If the shift lever is not in PARK and ENGINE START/STOP Button the vehicle speed is above 8 km/h, the Functions – With Driver’s Foot EXTREME COLD ENGINE START/STOP button must OFF The Brake Pedal (In PARK WEATHER (BELOW −29°C) be held for two seconds before the Or NEUTRAL Position) To ensure reliable starting at these engine shuts off. The ignition switch The Keyless Enter-N-Go feature oper- temperatures, use of an externally position will remain in the ACC posi- ates similar to an ignition switch. It powered electric engine block heater tion until the shift lever is in PARK has four positions, OFF, ACC, RUN is recommended. and the button is pressed twice to the and START. To change the ignition OFF position. If the shift lever is not IF ENGINE FAILS TO switch positions without starting the in PARK and the ENGINE START/ vehicle and use the accessories follow START STOP button is pressed once, the these steps. EVIC will display a “Vehicle Not In Park” message and the engine will • Starting with the ignition switch in WARNING! remain running. Never leave a vehicle the OFF position: • Never pour fuel or other flam- out of the PARK position, or it could mable liquids into the throttle • Press the ENGINE START/STOP roll. body air inlet opening in an at- button once to change the ignition tempt to start the vehicle. This switch to the ACC position (ACC could result in a flash fire causing will illuminate), serious personal injury.

(Continued)

198 2. Press the accelerator pedal all the Cold Weather Precautions WARNING! (Continued) way to the floor and hold it. If the outside temperature is very low, • Do not attempt to push or tow the diesel fuel thickens due to the your vehicle to get it started. Ve- 3. Press and release the ENGINE formation of parrafin clots and could hicles equipped with an auto- START/STOP button once. clog the diesel filter. In order to avoid matic transmission cannot be The starter motor will engage auto- these problems, different types of die- started this way. Unburned fuel matically, run for 10 seconds, and sel fuel are distributed according to could enter the catalytic con- then disengage. Once this occurs, re- the season: summer type, winter type verter and once the engine has lease the accelerator pedal and the and arctic type (cold, mountainous started, ignite and damage the brake pedal, wait 10 to 15 seconds, areas). converter and vehicle. then repeat the “Normal Starting” • If the vehicle has a discharged procedure. If refuelling with diesel fuel whose battery, booster cables may be specifications are not suitable for the used to obtain a start from a AFTER STARTING outside temperature, it is advisable to booster battery or the battery in The idle speed is controlled automati- mix TUTELA DIESEL ART additive another vehicle. This type of start cally and it will decrease as the engine in the proportions shown on the con- can be dangerous if done improp- warms up. tainer with the fuel. Pour the additive erly. Refer to “Jump Starting” in into the tank before the fuel. “What To Do In Emergencies” for NORMAL STARTING – When using or parking the vehicle for further information. DIESEL ENGINE a long time in the mountains or cold Clearing A Flooded Engine (Using Observe the following when the en- areas, it is advisable to refuel using ENGINE START/STOP Button) gine is operating. locally available diesel. In this case, it • All message center lights are off. is also advisable to keep the tank over If the engine fails to start after you 50% full. have followed the “Normal Starting” • Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) or “Extreme Cold Weather" proce- is off. dures, it may be flooded. To clear any excess fuel: • Low Oil Pressure Light is off. 1. Press and hold the brake pedal.

199 Battery Blanket Usage 3. Watch the “Wait To Start Light” in NOTE: High-speed, no-load run- the instrument cluster. Refer to “In- ning of a cold engine can result in A battery loses 60% of its cranking strument Cluster” in “Understanding excessive white smoke and poor power as the battery temperature de- Your Instrument Panel” for further engine performance. No-load en- creases to -18°C. For the same de- information. It may glow for up to gine speeds should be kept under crease in temperature, the engine re- three seconds, depending on engine 1,200 RPM during the warm-up quires twice as much power to crank temperature. period, especially in cold ambient at the same RPM. The use of battery temperature conditions. blankets will greatly increase starting 4. When the “Wait To Start Light” capability at low temperatures. goes out, the engine will automati- If temperatures are below 0°C, oper- Engine Starting Procedure cally start. ate the engine at moderate speeds for five minutes before full loads are ap- 5. After the engine starts, allow it to plied. WARNING! idle for approximately 30 seconds before driving. This allows oil to circu- Engine Idling – In Cold Weather NEVER pour fuel or other flam- late and lubricate the turbocharger. mable liquid into the air inlet open- Avoid prolonged idling in ambient ing in an attempt to start the ve- Engine Warm Up temperatures below -18°C. Long periods of idling may be harmful to your hicle. This could result in a flash Avoid full throttle operation when the engine because combustion chamber fire causing serious personal injury. engine is cold. When starting a cold temperatures can drop so low that the engine, bring the engine up to operat- 1. The shift lever must be in the fuel may not burn completely. Incom- ing speed slowly to allow the oil pres- NEUTRAL or PARK position before plete combustion allows carbon and sure to stabilize as the engine warms you can start the engine. varnish to form on piston rings and up. injector nozzles. Also, the unburned 2. With your foot on the brake pedal, fuel can enter the crankcase, diluting press the ENGINE START/STOP the oil and causing rapid wear to the button. engine.

200 Stopping The Engine AUTOMATIC WARNING! Before turning off your turbo diesel TRANSMISSION • It is dangerous to shift out of engine, always allow the engine to PARK or NEUTRAL if the engine return to normal idle speed and run CAUTION! speed is higher than idle speed. If for several seconds. This assures your foot is not firmly pressing on Damage to the transmission may proper lubrication of the turbo- the brake pedal, the vehicle could occur if the following precautions charger. This is particularly necessary accelerate quickly forward or in are not observed: after any period of hard driving. reverse. You could lose control of • Shift into PARK only after the the vehicle and hit someone or Idle the engine a few minutes before vehicle has come to a complete something. Only shift into gear routine shutdown. After full load op- stop. eration, idle the engine three to five when the engine is idling nor- • Shift into or out of REVERSE minutes before shutting it down. This mally and your foot is firmly only after the vehicle has come to idle period will allow the lubricating pressing on the brake pedal. a complete stop and the engine is oil and coolant to carry excess heat • Unintended movement of a ve- at idle speed. away from the combustion chamber, hicle could injure those in or near • Do not shift between PARK, RE- bearings, internal components, and the vehicle. As with all vehicles, VERSE, NEUTRAL or DRIVE turbocharger. This is especially im- you should never exit a vehicle when the engine is above idle portant for turbocharged, charge air while the engine is running. Be- speed. cooled engines. fore exiting a vehicle, always ap- • Before shifting into any gear, ply the parking brake, shift the make sure your foot is firmly transmission into PARK, turn the pressing the brake pedal. engine OFF, and remove the key fob. When the ignition is in the NOTE: You must press and hold OFF position, the transmission is the brake pedal while shifting out locked in PARK, securing the ve- of PARK. hicle against unwanted movement.

(Continued)

201 This helps the driver avoid inadver- WARNING! (Continued) EIGHT-SPEED AUTOMATIC tently leaving the vehicle without TRANSMISSION – 3.6L • When leaving the vehicle, always placing the transmission in PARK. remove the key fob and lock your ENGINE This system also locks the transmis- vehicle. Your vehicle is equipped with a state sion in PARK whenever the ignition • Never leave children alone in a of the art, fuel efficient eight-speed switch is in the OFF position. vehicle, or with access to an un- transmission. The electronic shift le- locked vehicle. Allowing children BRAKE/TRANSMISSION ver in this vehicle does not slide like a to be in a vehicle unattended is SHIFT INTERLOCK conventional shifter. Instead, the shift dangerous for a number of rea- SYSTEM lever is spring loaded and moves for- sons. A child or others could be ward and rearward, always returning seriously or fatally injured. Chil- This vehicle is equipped with a Brake to the center position after each gear is dren should be warned not to Transmission Shift Interlock System selected. The transmission gear range touch the parking brake, brake (BTSI) that holds the shift lever in (PRND) is displayed both on the shift pedal or the shift lever. PARK unless the brakes are applied. lever and in the Electronic Vehicle • Do not leave the key fob in or near To shift the transmission out of PARK, Information Center (EVIC). To select the vehicle (or in a location acces- the ignition switch must be turned to a gear range, press the lock button on sible to children), and do not the ON/RUN position (engine run- the shift lever and move the lever rear- leave the ignition in the ACC or ning, for vehicles with 8-speed trans- ward or forward. You must also press ON/ RUN position. A child could mission) and the brake pedal must be the brake pedal to shift the transmis- operate power windows, other pressed. sion out of PARK, or to shift from controls, or move the vehicle. In 8-speed vehicles, the brake pedal NEUTRAL into DRIVE or REVERSE must also be pressed to shift from when the vehicle is stopped or moving KEY IGNITION PARK NEUTRAL into DRIVE or REVERSE at low speeds (refer to “Brake/ INTERLOCK when the vehicle is stopped or moving Transmission Shift Interlock System” in this section). To shift past multiple This vehicle is equipped with a Key at low speeds. gear ranges at once (such as PARK to Ignition Park Interlock which re- DRIVE), move the lever past the first quires the transmission to be in PARK (or second) detent. Select the DRIVE before the engine can be turned off. range for normal driving. 202 The electronically-controlled trans- SPORT shift positions. Once in the The engine can be started in this mission provides a precise shift sched- DRIVE range, tapping the shift lever range. Never attempt to use PARK ule. The transmission electronics are rearward will toggle between SPORT while the vehicle is in motion. Apply self-calibrating; therefore, the first mode and DRIVE mode. You do not the parking brake when leaving the few shifts on a new vehicle may be need to press the shift lever button vehicle in this range. somewhat abrupt. This is a normal when toggling between DRIVE and When parking on a level surface, you condition, and precision shifts will de- SPORT modes. Manual shifts can be may shift the transmission into PARK velop within a few hundred kilome- made using the AutoStick® shift con- first, and then apply the parking ters. trol (refer to "AutoStick®" in this sec- brake. Only shift from DRIVE to PARK or tion). Pressing the shift paddles (-/+) When parking on a hill, apply the REVERSE when the accelerator while in the DRIVE or SPORT posi- parking brake before shifting the pedal is released and the vehicle is tion will manually select the transmis- transmission to PARK. As an added stopped. Be sure to keep your foot on sion gear, and will display the current precaution, turn the front wheels to- the brake pedal when shifting be- gear in the instrument cluster as 8, 7, ward the curb on a downhill grade tween these gears. 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1. and away from the curb on an uphill GEAR RANGES Standard Shifter grade. The standard shift lever has PARK, DO NOT race the engine when shifting from PARK or NEUTRAL into REVERSE, NEUTRAL, DRIVE, and WARNING! LOW shift positions. Using the LOW another gear range. • Never use the PARK position as a position manually downshifts the NOTE: After selecting any gear substitute for the parking brake. transmission to a lower gear based on range, wait a moment to allow the Always apply the parking brake vehicle speed. selected gear to engage before ac- fully when parked to guard celerating. This is especially im- Optional Shifter With AutoStick® against vehicle movement and portant when the engine is cold. The optional shift lever (with possible injury or damage. PARK (P) AutoStick® shift paddles mounted on (Continued) the steering wheel) provides PARK, This range supplements the parking REVERSE, NEUTRAL, DRIVE, and brake by locking the transmission.

203 WARNING! (Continued) WARNING! (Continued) WARNING! (Continued) • Your vehicle could move and in- • Unintended movement of a ve- • Never leave children alone in a jure you and others if it is not in hicle could injure those in or near vehicle, or with access to an un- PARK. Check by trying to move the vehicle. As with all vehicles, locked vehicle. Allowing children the shift lever out of PARK with you should never exit a vehicle to be in a vehicle unattended is the brake pedal released. Make while the engine is running. Be- dangerous for a number of rea- sure the transmission is in PARK fore exiting a vehicle, always ap- sons. A child or others could be before leaving the vehicle. ply the parking brake, shift the seriously or fatally injured. Chil- • It is dangerous to shift out of transmission into PARK, turn the dren should be warned not to PARK or NEUTRAL if the engine engine OFF, and remove the key touch the parking brake, brake speed is higher than idle speed. If fob. When the ignition is in the pedal or the shift lever. your foot is not firmly pressing OFF position, the transmission is • Do not leave the key fob in or near the brake pedal, the vehicle could locked in PARK, securing the ve- the vehicle (or in a location acces- accelerate quickly forward or in hicle against unwanted move- sible to children), and do not reverse. You could lose control of ment. leave the ignition of a vehicle the vehicle and hit someone or • When leaving the vehicle, always equipped with Keyless Enter-N- something. Only shift into gear remove the key fob and lock your Go™ in the ACC or ON/RUN when the engine is idling nor- vehicle. mode. A child could operate mally and your foot is firmly power windows, other controls, or pressing the brake pedal. (Continued) move the vehicle.

(Continued)

204 CAUTION! REVERSE (R) CAUTION! • Before moving the shift lever out This range is for moving the vehicle Towing the vehicle, coasting, or of PARK, you must start the en- backward. Shift into REVERSE only driving for any other reason with gine, and also press the brake after the vehicle has come to a com- the transmission in NEUTRAL can pedal. Otherwise, damage to the plete stop. cause severe transmission damage. shift lever could result. NEUTRAL (N) Refer to “Recreational Towing” in • DO NOT race the engine when “Starting And Operating” and Use this range when the vehicle is shifting from PARK or NEU- “Towing A Disabled Vehicle” in standing for prolonged periods with TRAL into another gear range, as “What To Do In Emergencies” for the engine running. The engine may this can damage the drivetrain. further information. be started in this range. Apply the The following indicators should be parking brake and shift the transmis- DRIVE (D) sion into PARK if you must leave the used to ensure that you have engaged This range should be used for most vehicle. the transmission into the PARK posi- city and highway driving. It provides tion: the smoothest upshifts and down- • When shifting into PARK, press the WARNING! shifts, and the best fuel economy. The lock button on the shift lever and Do not coast in NEUTRAL and transmission automatically upshifts push the lever all the way forward never turn off the ignition to coast through all forward gears. The until it stops. When released, the down a hill. These are unsafe prac- DRIVE position provides optimum lever will return to its home posi- tices that limit your response to driving characteristics under all nor- tion. changing traffic or road conditions. mal operating conditions. You might lose control of the ve- • With brake pedal released, look at When frequent transmission shifting hicle and have a collision. the transmission gear position dis- occurs (such as when operating the play and verify that it indicates the vehicle under heavy loading condi- PARK position. tions, in hilly terrain, traveling into strong head winds, or while towing heavy trailers), use the AutoStick® shift control (if equipped) or the LOW

205 range (if equipped) to select a lower LOW (L) (for versions/markets, more serious conditions, and indicate gear. Under these conditions, using a where provided) what actions may be necessary. lower gear will improve performance Use this range for engine braking In the event of a momentary problem, and extend transmission life by re- when descending very steep grades. In the transmission can be reset to regain ducing excessive shifting and heat this range, the transmission will all forward gears by performing the buildup. downshift for increased engine brak- following steps. During extremely cold temperatures ing. To switch between DRIVE and NOTE: In cases where the instru- (-30°C or below), transmission op- LOW modes, tap the shift lever rear- ment cluster message indicates the eration may be modified depending ward. LOW mode is only accessible transmission may not re-engage on engine and transmission tempera- from DRIVE. after engine shutdown, perform ture as well as vehicle speed. Normal Transmission Limp Home Mode this procedure only in a desired operation will resume once the trans- location (preferably, at your au- mission temperature has risen to a Transmission function is monitored thorized dealer). suitable level. electronically for abnormal conditions. If a condition is detected that 1. Stop the vehicle. SPORT (S) (for versions/markets, could result in transmission damage, where provided) Transmission Limp Home Mode is ac- 2. Shift the transmission into PARK, This mode alters the transmission's tivated. In this mode, the transmis- if possible. If not, shift the transmis- automatic shift schedule for sportier sion may operate only in certain sion to NEUTRAL. driving. Upshift speeds are increased gears, or may not shift at all. Vehicle 3. Press and hold the ignition switch to make full use of available engine performance may be severely de- until the engine turns OFF. power. To switch between DRIVE and graded and the engine may stall. In SPORT modes, tap the shift lever some situations, the transmission may 4. Wait approximately 30 seconds. rearward. SPORT mode is only acces- not re-engage if the engine is turned 5. Restart the engine. sible from DRIVE. off and restarted. The Malfunction In- dicator Light (MIL) may be illumi- 6. Shift into the desired gear range. If nated. A message in the instrument the problem is no longer detected, the cluster will inform the driver of the transmission will return to normal operation.

206 NOTE: Even if the transmission condition, and precision shifts will de- can be reset, we recommend that velop within a few hundred kilome- you visit your authorized dealer at ters. your earliest possible conve- Only shift from DRIVE to PARK or nience. Your authorized dealer has REVERSE when the accelerator diagnostic equipment to deter- pedal is released and the vehicle is mine if the problem could recur. stopped. Be sure to keep your foot on If the transmission cannot be reset, the brake pedal when shifting be- Transmission Shift Lever authorized dealer service is required. tween these gears. GEAR RANGES FIVE-SPEED AUTOMATIC The transmission shift lever has only TRANSMISSION – 3.0L PARK, REVERSE, NEUTRAL, and DO NOT race the engine when shift- DRIVE shift positions. Manual shifts ing from PARK or NEUTRAL into DIESEL ENGINE can be made using the AutoStick® another gear range. The transmission gear position dis- shift control, (refer to “AutoStick®” NOTE: After selecting any gear play (located in the instrument clus- in this section). Moving the shift lever range, wait a moment to allow the ter) indicates the transmission gear to the left or right (-/+) while in the selected gear to engage before ac- range. You must press the brake pedal DRIVE position, or tapping one of the celerating. This is especially im- to move the shift lever out of PARK steering wheel-mounted shift paddles portant when the engine is cold. (refer to “Brake/Transmission Shift (-/+) (for versions/markets, where Interlock System” in this section). To provided), will manually select the If there is a need to restart the engine, drive, move the shift lever from PARK transmission gear, and will display be sure to cycle the ignition to the OFF or NEUTRAL to the DRIVE position. that gear in the instrument cluster as position before restarting. Transmis- 5, 4, 3, 2, 1. sion gear engagement may be delayed The electronically-controlled trans- after restarting the engine if the igni- mission provides a precise shift sched- tion is not cycled to the OFF position ule. The transmission electronics are first. self-calibrating; therefore, the first few shifts on a new vehicle may be somewhat abrupt. This is a normal

207 PARK (P) WARNING! WARNING! (Continued) This range supplements the parking • Never use the PARK position as a • Unintended movement of a ve- brake by locking the transmission. substitute for the parking brake. hicle could injure those in or near The engine can be started in this Always apply the parking brake the vehicle. As with all vehicles, range. Never attempt to use PARK fully when parked to guard you should never exit a vehicle while the vehicle is in motion. Apply against vehicle movement and while the engine is running. Be- the parking brake when leaving the possible injury or damage. fore exiting a vehicle, always ap- vehicle in this range. • Your vehicle could move and in- ply the parking brake, shift the When parking on a level surface, you jure you and others if it is not transmission into PARK, turn the may shift the transmission into PARK completely in PARK. Check by engine OFF, and remove the key first, and then apply the parking trying to move the shift lever out fob. When the ignition is in the brake. of PARK with the brake pedal OFF position, the transmission is released. Make sure the transmis- locked in PARK, securing the ve- When parking on a hill, apply the sion is in PARK before leaving the hicle against unwanted move- parking brake before shifting the vehicle. ment. transmission to PARK, otherwise the • It is dangerous to shift out of • When leaving the vehicle, always load on the transmission locking PARK or NEUTRAL if the engine remove the key fob and lock your mechanism may make it difficult to speed is higher than idle speed. If vehicle. move the shift lever out of PARK. As your foot is not firmly pressing an added precaution, turn the front the brake pedal, the vehicle could (Continued) wheels toward the curb on a downhill accelerate quickly forward or in grade and away from the curb on an reverse. You could lose control of uphill grade. the vehicle and hit someone or something. Only shift into gear when the engine is idling normally and your foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal.

(Continued)

208 REVERSE (R) WARNING! (Continued) CAUTION! • Never leave children alone in a • Before moving the shift lever out This range is for moving the vehicle vehicle, or with access to an un- of PARK, you must place the ig- backward. Shift into REVERSE only locked vehicle. Allowing children nition from the LOCK/OFF posi- after the vehicle has come to a com- to be in a vehicle unattended is tion to the ON/RUN position, and plete stop. dangerous for a number of rea- also press the brake pedal. Other- NEUTRAL (N) sons. A child or others could be wise, damage to the shift lever Use this range when the vehicle is seriously or fatally injured. Chil- could result. standing for prolonged periods with dren should be warned not to • DO NOT race the engine when the engine running. The engine may touch the parking brake, brake shifting from PARK or NEU- be started in this range. Apply the pedal or the shift lever. TRAL into another gear range, as parking brake and shift the transmis- this can damage the drivetrain. • Do not leave the key fob in or near sion into PARK if you must leave the the vehicle (or in a location acces- vehicle. sible to children), and do not The following indicators should be leave the ignition of a vehicle used to ensure that you have engaged equipped with Keyless Enter-N- the transmission into the PARK posi- WARNING! tion: Go™ in the ACC or ON/RUN Do not coast in NEUTRAL and mode. A child could operate • When shifting into PARK, firmly never turn off the ignition to coast power windows, other controls, or move the shift lever all the way down a hill. These are unsafe prac- move the vehicle. forward and to the left until it stops tices that limit your response to and is fully seated. changing traffic or road conditions. You might lose control of the ve- • Look at the transmission gear posi- hicle and have a collision. tion display and verify that it indicates the PARK position. • With brake pedal released, verify that the shift lever will not move out of PARK.

209 CAUTION! heavy trailers), use the “AutoStick®” In the event of a momentary problem, shift control (refer to “AutoStick®” in the transmission can be reset to regain Towing the vehicle, coasting, or this section for further information) all forward gears by performing the driving for any other reason with to select a lower gear. Under these following steps: the transmission in NEUTRAL can conditions, using a lower gear will 1. Stop the vehicle. cause severe transmission damage. improve performance and extend Refer to “Recreational Towing” in transmission life by reducing exces- 2. Shift the transmission into PARK. “Starting And Operating” and sive shifting and heat buildup. “Towing A Disabled Vehicle” in 3. Turn the ignition switch to the “What To Do In Emergencies” for Transmission Limp Home Mode OFF position. further information. Transmission function is monitored 4. Wait approximately 10 seconds. electronically for abnormal condi- DRIVE (D) tions. If a condition is detected that 5. Restart the engine. This range should be used for most could result in transmission damage, 6. Shift into the desired gear range. If city and highway driving. It provides Transmission Limp Home Mode is ac- the problem is no longer detected, the the smoothest upshifts and down- tivated. In this mode, the transmis- transmission will return to normal op- shifts, and the best fuel economy. The sion remains in the current gear until eration. transmission automatically upshifts the vehicle is brought to a stop. After NOTE: Even if the transmission through underdrive first, second, and the vehicle has stopped, the transmis- can be reset, we recommend that third gears, direct fourth gear and sion will remain in second gear re- you visit your authorized dealer at overdrive fifth gear. The DRIVE posi- gardless of which forward gear is se- your earliest possible conve- tion provides optimum driving char- lected. PARK, REVERSE, and nience. Your authorized dealer has acteristics under all normal operating NEUTRAL will continue to operate. diagnostic equipment to deter- conditions. The Malfunction Indicator Light mine if the problem could recur. If (MIL) may be illuminated. Limp When frequent transmission shifting the transmission cannot be reset, Home Mode allows the vehicle to be occurs (such as when operating the authorized dealer service is re- driven to an authorized dealer for ser- vehicle under heavy loading condi- quired. vice without damaging the transmis- tions, in hilly terrain, traveling into sion. strong head winds, or while towing

210 Overdrive Operation driving, cold slippery conditions, automatically shift up when maxi- mountain driving, trailer towing, and mum engine speed is reached. If the The automatic transmission includes many other situations. accelerator is fully depressed, the an electronically controlled Overdrive transmission will downshift when (fifth gear). The transmission will au- OPERATION – 3.6L ENGINE possible (based on current vehicle tomatically shift into Overdrive if the speed and gear). Lack of accelera- following conditions are present: When the transmission is in DRIVE or SPORT mode, it will operate auto- tor pedal activity will cause the • The shift lever is in the DRIVE po- matically, shifting between the eight transmission to revert to automatic sition. available gears. To engage operation. AutoStick®, simply tap one of the • Vehicle speed is sufficiently high. • If AutoStick® is engaged while in steering wheel-mounted shift paddles • The driver is not heavily pressing SPORT mode, manual gear selec- (+/-) while in DRIVE or SPORT the accelerator. tion will be maintained until either mode. Tapping (-) to enter SPORT mode is exited or as de- AutoStick® mode will downshift the AUTOSTICK® (for scribed below. The transmission transmission to the next lower gear, will not upshift automatically at versions/markets, where while using (+) to enter AutoStick® redline in this mode, nor will down- provided) mode will retain the current gear. shifts be obtained if the accelerator When AutoStick® is active, the cur- AutoStick® is a driver-interactive pedal is pressed to the floor. transmission feature providing rent transmission gear is displayed in • In either DRIVE or SPORT mode, manual shift control, giving you more the instrument cluster. In AutoStick® the transmission will automatically control of the vehicle. AutoStick® al- mode, the transmission will shift up or downshift as the vehicle slows to a lows you to maximize engine braking, down when (+/-) is manually selected stop (to prevent engine lugging) eliminate undesirable upshifts and by the driver, unless an engine lugging and will display the current gear. downshifts, and improve overall ve- or overspeed condition would result. Tapping the (+) paddle (at a stop) hicle performance. It will remain in the selected gear until another upshift or downshift is cho- will allow starting in second gear. This system can also provide you with sen, except as described below. After a stop, the driver should more control during passing, city manually upshift (+) the transmis- • If AutoStick® is engaged while in sion as the vehicle accelerates. DRIVE mode, the transmission will

211 • If a requested downshift would five available gears. To engage • If the accelerator is fully depressed, cause the engine to over-speed, that AutoStick®, simply tap the shift lever the transmission will downshift shift will not occur. to the right or left (+/-) while in the when possible (based on vehicle DRIVE position, or tap one of the speed and gear). • The system will ignore attempts to steering wheel-mounted shift paddles upshift at too low of a vehicle speed. • The transmission will automati- (+/-), for versions/markets, where cally downshift as the vehicle slows provided. Tapping (-) to enter (to prevent engine lugging) and will To disengage AutoStick® mode, press AutoStick® mode will downshift the display the current gear. and hold the (+) shift paddle until transmission to the next lower gear, “D” or “S” is once again indicated in while using (+) to enter AutoStick® • The transmission will automati- the instrument cluster. You can shift mode will retain the current gear. cally downshift to first gear when in or out of the AutoStick® mode at When AutoStick® is active, the cur- coming to a stop. After a stop, the any time without taking your foot off rent transmission gear is displayed in driver should manually upshift (+) the accelerator pedal. the instrument cluster. In AutoStick® the transmission as the vehicle is mode, the transmission will shift up or accelerated. WARNING! down when (+/-) is manually selected • You can start out, from a stop, in by the driver (using the shift lever, or first or second gear. Tapping (+) (at Do not downshift for additional en- the shift paddles, for versions/ a stop) will allow starting in second gine braking on a slippery surface. markets, where provided), unless an gear. Starting out in second gear is The drive wheels could lose their engine lugging or overspeed condition helpful in snowy or icy conditions. grip and the vehicle could skid, would result. It will remain in the causing a collision or personal in- selected gear until another upshift or • The system will ignore attempts to jury. downshift is chosen, except as de- upshift at too low of a vehicle speed. scribed below. OPERATION – 3.0L DIESEL • Avoid using speed control when AutoStick® is engaged. ENGINE • The transmission will automatically upshift when necessary to pre- • Transmission shifting will be more When the shift lever is in the DRIVE vent engine over-speed. noticeable when AutoStick® is position, the transmission will operate engaged. automatically, shifting between the

212 To disengage AutoStick® mode, hold automatically redirecting torque to NOTE: If the “SERVICE AWD the shift lever to the right or press and the front and rear wheels as necessary. SYSTEM” warning message ap- hold the (+) shift paddle (for pears after engine start up, or dur- To maximize fuel economy, your AWD versions/markets, where provided) ing driving, it means that the AWD vehicle automatically defaults to rear- until “D” is once again indicated in system is not functioning properly wheel drive (RWD) when road and the instrument cluster. You can shift and that service is required. Refer environmental conditions are such in or out of the AutoStick® mode at to “Electronic Vehicle Information that wheel slip is unlikely to occur. any time without taking your foot off Center (EVIC)” in “Understanding When specific road and environmen- the accelerator pedal. Your Instrument Panel” for further tal conditions require increased levels information. of road traction, the vehicle automati- WARNING! cally shifts into AWD mode. Auto- CAUTION! Do not downshift for additional en- matic AWD operation could be acti- All wheels must have the same size gine braking on a slippery surface. vated by outside temperature, wheel and type tires. Unequal tire sizes The drive wheels could lose their slip, or other predetermined condi- must not be used. Unequal tire size grip and the vehicle could skid, tions (there may be a slight delay for may cause failure of the front dif- causing a collision or personal in- AWD engagement after a wheel slip ferential and/or the transfer case. jury. condition occurs). AWD can also be manually selected by moving the shift DRIVING ON SLIPPERY ALL-WHEEL DRIVE lever into the AutoStick® mode (+/-) (for versions/markets, where pro- SURFACES (AWD) (for versions/ vided) or activating the windshield ACCELERATION markets, where provided) wipers for an extended period of time. Drive mode, RWD or AWD, is dis- Rapid acceleration on snow covered, This vehicle is equipped with an ac- played momentarily in the Electronic wet, or other slippery surfaces may tive on-demand All-Wheel Drive Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) in cause the driving wheels to pull errati- (AWD) system which makes available the gauge area of the vehicle display cally to the right or left. This phenom- optimum traction for a wide variety of when the transmission is first shifted enon occurs when there is a difference road surface and driving conditions. into gear, and if the drive mode in the surface traction under the rear The system minimizes wheel slip by changes during vehicle operation. (driving) wheels.

213 WARNING! 4. Keep tires properly inflated. SHALLOW STANDING WATER Rapid acceleration on slippery sur- 5. Maintain sufficient distance be- faces is dangerous. Unequal trac- tween your vehicle and the vehicle in Although your vehicle is capable of tion can cause sudden pulling of the front of you to avoid a collision in a driving through shallow standing wa- rear wheels. You could lose control sudden stop. ter, consider the following Caution of the vehicle and possibly have a and Warning before doing so. collision. Accelerate slowly and DRIVING THROUGH carefully whenever there is likely to WATER CAUTION! be poor traction (ice, snow, wet Driving through water more than a mud, loose sand, etc.). • Always check the depth of the centimeters deep will require extra standing water before driving TRACTION caution to ensure safety and prevent through it. Never drive through damage to your vehicle. standing water that is deeper When driving on wet or slushy roads, than the bottom of the tire rims it is possible for a wedge of water to FLOWING/RISING WATER mounted on the vehicle. build up between the tire and road WARNING! surface. This is known as hydroplan- • Determine the condition of the Do not drive on or across a road or ing and may cause partial or complete road or the path that is under path where water is flowing and/or loss of vehicle control and stopping water and if there are any ob- rising (as in storm run-off). Flow- ability. To reduce this possibility, the stacles in the way before driving ing water can wear away the road following precautions should be ob- through the standing water. or path's surface and cause your served: • Do not exceed 8 km/h when driv- vehicle to sink into deeper water. ing through standing water. This 1. Slow down during rainstorms or Furthermore, flowing and/or rising will minimize wave effects. when the roads are slushy. water can carry your vehicle away swiftly. Failure to follow this warn- (Continued) 2. Slow down if the road has standing ing may result in injuries that are water or puddles. serious or fatal to you, your passen- 3. Replace tires when tread wear in- gers, and others around you. dicators first become visible.

214 response and increased ease of ma- CAUTION! (Continued) WARNING! neuverability in tight spaces. The sys- • Driving through standing water • Driving through standing water tem will vary its assist to provide light may cause damage to your vehi- limits your vehicle’s traction ca- efforts while parking and good feel cle’s drivetrain components. Al- pabilities. Do not exceed 8 km/h while driving. If the electro-hydraulic ways inspect your vehicle’s fluids when driving through standing power steering system experiences a (i.e., engine oil, transmission, water. fault that prevents it from providing axle, etc.) for signs of contamina- • Driving through standing water power steering assist, then the system tion (i.e., fluid that is milky or limits your vehicle’s braking ca- will provide mechanical steering ca- foamy in appearance) after driv- pabilities, which increases stop- pability. ing through standing water. Do ping distances. Therefore, after not continue to operate the ve- driving through standing water, hicle if any fluid appears con- drive slowly and lightly press on CAUTION! taminated, as this may result in the brake pedal several times to Extreme steering maneuvers may further damage. Such damage is dry the brakes. cause the electrically driven pump not covered by the New Vehicle • Getting water inside your vehi- to reduce or stop power steering Limited Warranty. cle’s engine can cause it to lock up assistance in order to prevent dam- • Getting water inside your vehi- and stall out, and leave you age to the system. Normal opera- cle’s engine can cause it to lock up stranded. tion will resume once the system is and stall out, and cause serious • Failure to follow these warnings allowed to cool. internal damage to the engine. may result in injuries that are se- Such damage is not covered by rious or fatal to you, your passen- If the “SERVICE POWER the New Vehicle Limited War- gers, and others around you. ranty. STEERING SYSTEM” message and a flashing icon POWER STEERING are displayed on the EVIC Your vehicle is equipped with an screen, it indicates that the vehicle electro-hydraulic power steering sys- needs to be taken to the dealer for tem that will give you good vehicle service. It is likely the vehicle has lost power steering assistance. Refer to

215 “Electronic Vehicle Information Cen- NOTE: ter (EVIC)” in “Understanding Your • Even if power steering assis- Instrument Panel” for further tance is no longer operational, it information. is still possible to steer the ve- If the “POWER STEERING SYSTEM hicle. Under these conditions OVER TEMP” message and an icon there will be a substantial in- are displayed on the EVIC screen, it crease in steering effort, espe- indicates that extreme steering ma- cially at very low vehicle speeds Parking Brake neuvers may have occurred, which and during parking maneuvers. caused an over temperature condition When the parking brake is applied • If the condition persists, see in the power steering system. You will with the ignition switch in the ON your authorized dealer for ser- lose power steering assistance mo- position, the “Brake Warning Light” vice. mentarily until the over temperature in the instrument cluster will illumi- condition no longer exists. Once driv- PARKING BRAKE nate. ing conditions are safe, then pull over NOTE: and let vehicle idle for a few moments Before leaving the vehicle, make sure until the light turns off. Refer to that the parking brake is fully applied • When the parking brake is ap- “Electronic Vehicle Information Cen- and place the shift lever in the PARK plied and the transmission is ter (EVIC)” in “Understanding Your position. placed in gear, the “Brake Warn- ing Light” will flash. If vehicle Instrument Panel” for further infor- The foot operated parking brake is mation. speed is detected, a chime will located below the lower left corner of sound to alert the driver. Fully the instrument panel. To apply the release the parking brake before park brake, firmly push the park attempting to move the vehicle. brake pedal fully. To release the parking brake, press the park brake pedal • This light only shows that the a second time and let your foot up as parking brake is applied. It does you feel the brake disengage. not show the degree of brake application.

216 When parking on a hill, it is important WARNING! (Continued) WARNING! (Continued) to turn the front wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade and away • Never leave children alone in a • Always fully apply the parking from the curb on an uphill grade. vehicle, or with access to an un- brake when leaving your vehicle, Apply the parking brake before plac- locked vehicle. Allowing children or it may roll and cause damage ing the shift lever in PARK, otherwise to be in a vehicle unattended is or injury. Also be certain to leave the load on the transmission locking dangerous for a number of rea- the transmission in PARK. Fail- mechanism may make it difficult to sons. A child or others could be ure to do so may allow the vehicle move the shift lever out of PARK. The seriously or fatally injured. Chil- to roll and cause damage or in- parking brake should always be ap- dren should be warned not to jury. plied whenever the driver is not in the touch the parking brake, brake vehicle. pedal or the shift lever. • Do not leave the key fob in or near CAUTION! the vehicle (or in a location acces- If the “Brake Warning Light” re- WARNING! sible to children), and do not mains on with the parking brake • Never use the PARK position as a leave the ignition of a vehicle released, a brake system malfunc- substitute for the parking brake. equipped with Keyless Enter-N- tion is indicated. Have the brake Always apply the parking brake Go™ in the ACC or ON/RUN system serviced by an authorized fully when parked to guard mode. A child could operate dealer immediately. against vehicle movement and power windows, other controls, or possible injury or damage. move the vehicle. ANTI-LOCK BRAKE • When leaving the vehicle, always • Be sure the parking brake is fully SYSTEM remove the key fob from the igni- disengaged before driving; failure tion and lock your vehicle. to do so can lead to brake failure The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) and a collision. provides increased vehicle stability (Continued) and brake performance under most (Continued) braking conditions. The system automatically “pumps” the brakes during severe braking conditions to prevent wheel lock-up. 217 The Electronic Brake Force Distribu- • The clicking sound of solenoid WARNING! (Continued) tion (EBD) prevents the rear wheels valves, from over-braking and provides • The ABS cannot prevent the • Brake pedal pulsations, and greater control of available braking natural laws of physics from act- forces applied to the rear axle. • A slight drop or fall away of the ing on the vehicle, nor can it in- brake pedal at the end of the stop. crease braking or steering effi- When the vehicle is driven over ciency beyond that afforded by These are all normal characteristics of 11 km/h, you may also hear a slight the condition of the vehicle ABS. clicking sound as well as some related brakes and tires or the traction motor noises. These noises are the sys- afforded. tem performing its self check cycle to WARNING! • The ABS cannot prevent colli- ensure that the ABS is working prop- sions, including those resulting erly. This self check occurs each time • The ABS contains sophisticated electronic equipment that may be from excessive speed in turns, fol- the vehicle is started and accelerated lowing another vehicle too past 11 km/h. susceptible to interference caused by improperly installed or high closely, or hydroplaning. ABS is activated during braking un- output radio transmitting equip- • The capabilities of an ABS der certain road or stopping condi- ment. This interference can cause equipped vehicle must never be tions. ABS-inducing conditions can possible loss of anti-lock braking exploited in a reckless or danger- include ice, snow, gravel, bumps, rail- capability. Installation of such ous manner that could jeopardize road tracks, loose debris, or panic equipment should be performed the user's safety or the safety of stops. by qualified professionals. others. • Pumping of the Anti-Lock Brakes You also may experience the following All vehicle wheels and tires must be will diminish their effectiveness when the brake system goes into Anti- the same size and type and tires must and may lead to a collision. Lock: be properly inflated to produce accu- Pumping makes the stopping dis- rate signals for the computer. • The ABS motor running (it may tance longer. Just press firmly on continue to run for a short time your brake pedal when you need after the stop), to slow down or stop.

(Continued) 218 ELECTRONIC BRAKE WARNING! faster than the other, the system will CONTROL SYSTEM apply the brake of the spinning wheel. The ABS cannot prevent the natu- This will allow more engine torque to Your vehicle is equipped with an ad- ral laws of physics from acting on be applied to the wheel that is not vanced electronic brake control sys- the vehicle, nor can it increase the spinning. This feature remains active tem that include Anti-Lock Brake traction afforded by prevailing even if TCS and ESC are in the “Par- System (ABS), Traction Control Sys- road conditions. The ABS cannot tial Off” mode. Refer to “Electronic tem (TCS), Brake Assist System prevent collisions, including those Stability Control (ESC)” in this sec- (BAS), and the Electronic Stability resulting from excessive speed in tion for more information. Control (ESC). All four of these sys- turns, driving on very slippery sur- tems work together to enhance vehicle faces, or hydroplaning. The capa- BRAKE ASSIST SYSTEM stability and control in various driv- bilities of an ABS-equipped vehicle (BAS) must never be exploited in a reck- ing conditions. This system complements the ABS by less or dangerous manner that optimizing the vehicle braking capa- Also, your vehicle may be equipped could jeopardize the user's safety or bility during emergency brake ma- with Hill Start Assist (HSA), Ready the safety of others. Alert Braking, and Rain Brake Sup- neuvers. This system detects an emer- port. TRACTION CONTROL gency braking situation by sensing SYSTEM (TCS) the rate and amount of brake applica- ANTI-LOCK BRAKE tion and then applies optimum pres- SYSTEM (ABS) This system monitors the amount of sure to the brakes. This can help re- This system aids the driver in main- wheel spin of each driven wheel. If duce braking distances. wheel spin is detected, brake pressure taining vehicle control under adverse Applying the brakes very quickly re- is applied to the slipping wheel(s) and braking conditions by controlling hy- sults in the best BAS assistance. To engine power is reduced to provide draulic brake pressure. This prevents receive the benefits of this system, you enhanced acceleration and stability. wheel lock-up to help avoid skidding must apply continuous brake pedal on slippery surfaces during braking. A feature of the TCS system, Brake pressure during the stopping se- Refer to “Anti-Lock Brake System” in Lock Differential (BLD), controls the quence. Do not reduce brake pedal “Starting and Operating” for further wheel spin across a driven axle. If one pressure unless braking is no longer information. wheel on a driven axle is spinning

219 desired. Once the brake pedal is re- ELECTRONIC STABILITY WARNING! leased, the BAS is deactivated. CONTROL (ESC) The Electronic Stability Control This system enhances directional con- (ESC) cannot prevent the natural WARNING! trol and stability of the vehicle under laws of physics from acting on the The BAS cannot prevent the natu- various driving conditions. The ESC vehicle, nor can it increase the trac- ral laws of physics from acting on corrects for oversteering and under- tion afforded by prevailing road the vehicle, nor can it increase the steering the vehicle by applying the conditions. ESC cannot prevent all traction afforded by prevailing brake of the appropriate wheel. En- accidents, including those resulting road conditions. The BAS cannot gine power may also be reduced to from excessive speed in turns, driv- prevent collisions, including those assist in counteracting the condition ing on very slippery surfaces, or resulting from excessive speed in of oversteer or understeer and help hydroplaning. ESC also cannot turns, driving on very slippery sur- the vehicle maintain the desired path. prevent collisions resulting from faces, or hydroplaning. The capa- The ESC uses sensors in the vehicle to loss of vehicle control due to inap- bilities of a BAS-equipped vehicle determine the path that the driver propriate driver input for the con- must never be exploited in a reck- intends to steer the vehicle and com- ditions. Only a safe, attentive, and less or dangerous manner that pares it to the actual path of the ve- skillful driver can prevent acci- could jeopardize the user's safety or hicle. When the actual path does not dents. The capabilities of an ESC the safety of others. match the intended path, the ESC equipped vehicle must never be ex- applies the brake of the appropriate ploited in a reckless or dangerous wheel to assist in counteracting the manner which could jeopardize the condition of oversteer or understeer. user’s safety or the safety of others. • Oversteer - when the vehicle is ESC Operating Modes turning more than appropriate for The ESC system has two or three the steering wheel position. available operating modes: • Understeer - when the vehicle is ESC On turning less than appropriate for the steering wheel position. This is the normal operating mode for the ESC. Whenever the vehicle is 220 started, the ESC system will be in this WARNING! turn the ESC on again by mo- mode. This mode should be used for mentarily pressing the “ESC Off” most driving conditions. The ESC • When in “Partial Off” mode, the switch. This may be done while should only be turned OFF for spe- TCS functionality of ESC, (ex- the vehicle is in motion. cific reasons as noted in the following cept for the limited slip feature • Trailer Sway control (TSC) is paragraphs. described in the TCS section), has been disabled and the “ESC Off disabled when the ESC system is Partial Off Indicator Light” will be illumi- in the “Partial Off” mode. Full Off (for versions/markets, The “Partial Off” mode is intended nated. When in “Partial Off” where provided) for times when a more spirited driving mode, the engine power reduction experience is desired. It is also in- feature of TCS is disabled, and This mode is intended for off- tended for driving in deep snow, sand, the enhanced vehicle stability of- highway or off-road use only and or gravel. This mode disables the TCS fered by the ESC system is re- should not be used on any public portion of the ESC and raises the duced roadways. threshold for ESC activation, which • Trailer Sway control (TSC) is dis- In this mode, all TCS and ESC stabil- allows for more wheel spin than what abled when the ESC system is in ity features are turned OFF. To enter ESC normally allows. the “Partial Off” mode. the “Full Off” mode, press and hold The “ESC Off” switch is located on NOTE: the “ESC Off” switch for five seconds the switch bank in the center of the while the vehicle is stopped with the • To improve the vehicle's traction instrument panel. To enter the “Par- engine running. After five seconds, a when driving with snow chains, tial Off” mode, momentarily press the chime will sound, the “ESC Off Indi- or when starting off in deep “ESC Off” switch and the “ESC off cator Light” will illuminate, and the snow, sand, or gravel, it may be indicator light” will illuminate. To “ESC OFF” message will display in desirable to switch to the “Par- turn the ESC on again, momentarily the Electronic Vehicle Information tial Off” mode by momentarily press the “ESC Off” switch and the Center (EVIC). To turn ESC ON pressing the “ESC Off” switch. “ESC off indicator light” will turn off. again, momentarily press the “ESC Once the situation requiring Off” switch. “Partial Off” mode is overcome,

221 WARNING! HSA Activation Criteria Towing With HSA In the ESC “Full Off” mode, the The following criteria must be met in HSA will provide assistance when engine torque reduction and stabil- order for HSA to activate: starting on a grade when pulling a trailer. ity features are disabled. In an • Vehicle must be stopped. emergency evasive maneuver, the • Vehicle must be on a 6% (approxi- ESC system will not engage to assist WARNING! in maintaining stability. “ESC Off” mate) grade or greater hill. • If you use a trailer brake control- mode is intended for off-highway • Gear selection matches vehicle up- ler with your trailer, your trailer or off-road use only. hill direction (i.e., vehicle facing brakes may be activated and de- uphill is in forward gear; vehicle HILL START ASSIST (HSA) activated with the brake switch. backing uphill is in REVERSE If so, when the brake pedal is The HSA system is designed to assist gear). released there may not be enough the driver when starting a vehicle HSA will work in REVERSE and all brake pressure to hold the vehicle from a stop on a hill. HSA will main- forward gears when the activation cri- and trailer on a hill and this could tain the level of brake pressure the teria have been met. The system will cause a collision with another ve- driver applied for a short period of not activate if the vehicle is placed in hicle or object behind you. In or- time after the driver takes their foot NEUTRAL or PARK. der to avoid rolling down the hill off of the brake pedal. If the driver while resuming acceleration, does not apply the throttle during this manually activate the trailer short period of time, the system will WARNING! brake prior to releasing the brake release brake pressure and the vehicle There may be situations on minor pedal. Always remember the will roll down the hill. The system will hills with a loaded vehicle, or while driver is responsible for braking release brake pressure in proportion pulling a trailer, when the system the vehicle. to the amount of throttle applied as will not activate and slight rolling the vehicle starts to move in the in- may occur. This could cause a col- (Continued) tended direction of travel. lision with another vehicle or object. Always remember the driver is responsible for braking the vehicle.

222 HSA Off amount of brake pressure to remove WARNING! (Continued) any water buildup on the front brake If you wish to turn off the HSA sys- • HSA is not a parking brake. Al- rotors. It only functions when the tem, it can be done using the Cus- ways apply the parking brake windshield wipers are in the LO or HI tomer Programmable Features in the fully when leaving your vehicle. mode, it does not function in the in- Uconnect® System. Refer to Also, be certain to leave the trans- termittent mode. When Rain Brake “Uconnect® SETTINGS” in “Under- mission in PARK. Support is active, there is no notifica- standing Your Instrument Panel” for • Failure to follow these warnings tion to the driver and no driver inter- further information. may cause the vehicle to roll action is required. down the incline and could col- READY ALERT BRAKING lide with another vehicle, object ESC ACTIVATION/ Ready Alert Braking may reduce the or person, and cause serious or MALFUNCTION time required to reach full braking fatal injury. Always remember to INDICATOR LIGHT AND during emergency braking situations. use the parking brake while park- It anticipates when an emergency ESC OFF INDICATOR ing on a hill and that the driver is braking situation may occur by moni- LIGHT responsible for braking the ve- toring how fast the throttle is released hicle. by the driver. When the throttle is The “ESC Activation/ NOTE: The HSA system may also released very quickly, Ready Alert Malfunction Indicator be turned on and off if the vehicle Braking applies a small amount of Light” in the instrument is equipped with the Electronic brake pressure. This brake pressure cluster will come on when Vehicle Information Center will not be noticed by the driver. The the ignition switch is turned to the ON (EVIC). Refer to “Electronic Ve- brake system uses this brake pressure position. It should go out with the hicle Information Center (EVIC)” to allow a fast brake response if the engine running. If the “ESC in “Understanding Your Instru- driver applies the brakes. Activation/Malfunction Indicator ment Panel” for further informa- RAIN BRAKE SUPPORT Light” comes on continuously with tion. the engine running, a malfunction has Rain Brake Support may improve been detected in the ESC system. If braking performance in wet condi- this light remains on after several ig- tions. It will periodically apply a small nition cycles, and the vehicle has been 223 driven several kilometers at speeds • Each time the ignition is turned Light” should go out. However, if the greater than 48 km/h, see your autho- ON, the ESC system will be ON light remains on, have the ESC and rized dealer as soon as possible to even if it was turned off BAS checked at your authorized dealer have the problem diagnosed and previously. as soon as possible. corrected. • The ESC system will make buzz- TIRES — GENERAL The “ESC Activation/Malfunction In- ing or clicking sounds when it is dicator Light” (located in the instru- active. This is normal; the INFORMATION ment cluster) starts to flash as soon as sounds will stop when ESC be- Tire Pressure the tires lose traction and the ESC comes inactive following the system becomes active. The “ESC maneuver that caused the ESC Proper tire inflation pressure is essen- Activation/Malfunction Indicator activation. tial to the safe and satisfactory opera- Light” also flashes when TCS is action of your vehicle. Three primary The “ESC OFF Indicator tive. If the “ESC Activation/ areas are affected by improper tire Light” indicates the Elec- Malfunction Indicator Light” begins pressure: tronic Stability Control to flash during acceleration, ease up (ESC) is in Partial OFF Safety on the accelerator and apply as little mode. throttle as possible. Be sure to adapt your speed and driving to the prevail- SYNCHRONIZING ESC WARNING! ing road conditions. • Improperly inflated tires are dan- NOTE: If the power supply is inter- gerous and can cause collisions. • Under-inflation increases tire • The “ESC Activation/ rupted (battery disconnected or discharged), the “ESC flexing and can result in over- Malfunction Indicator Light” heating and tire failure. and the “ESC OFF Indicator Activation/Malfunction In- Light” come on momentarily dicator Light” may illuminate with the (Continued) each time the ignition switch is engine running. If this should occur, turned ON. turn the steering wheel completely to the left and then to the right. The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator

224 increases tire rolling resistance result- At least once a month: WARNING! (Continued) ing in higher fuel consumption. • Over-inflation reduces a tire's • Check and adjust tire pressure with ability to cushion shock. Objects Ride Comfort And Vehicle a good quality pocket-type pressure on the road and chuckholes can Stability gauge. Do not make a visual judge- ment when determining proper in- cause damage that result in tire Proper tire inflation contributes to a flation. Tires may look properly in- failure. comfortable ride. Over-inflation pro- flated even when they are under- • Over-inflated or under-inflated duces a jarring and uncomfortable inflated. tires can affect vehicle handling ride. Both under-inflation and over- and can fail suddenly, resulting in inflation affect the stability of the ve- • Inspect tires for signs of tire wear or loss of vehicle control. hicle and can produce a feeling of visible damage. sluggish response or over responsive- • Unequal tire pressures can cause CAUTION! steering problems. You could lose ness in the steering. After inspecting or adjusting the control of your vehicle. NOTE: • Unequal tire pressures from one tire pressure, always reinstall the side of the vehicle to the other can • Unequal tire pressures from side valve stem cap. This will prevent cause the vehicle to drift to the to side may cause erratic and moisture and dirt from entering the right or left. unpredictable steering re- valve stem, which could damage the valve stem. • Always drive with each tire in- sponse. flated to the recommended cold • Unequal tire pressure from side Inflation pressures specified on the tire inflation pressure. to side may cause the vehicle to placard are always “cold tire inflation drift left or right. pressure”. Cold tire inflation pressure Economy is defined as the tire pressure after the Improper inflation pressures can Tire Inflation Pressures vehicle has not been driven for at least cause uneven wear patterns to de- The proper cold tire inflation pressure three hours, or driven less than velop across the tire tread. These ab- is listed on the driver's side “B” Pillar 1.6 km after a three hour period. The normal wear patterns will reduce or rear edge of the driver's side door. cold tire inflation pressure must not tread life resulting in a need for earlier exceed the maximum inflation pres- tire replacement. Under-inflation also sure molded into the tire sidewall.

225 Check tire pressures more often if Tire Pressures For High Radial Ply Tires subject to a wide range of outdoor Speed Operation temperatures, as tire pressures vary with temperature changes. The manufacturer advocates driving WARNING! at safe speeds and within posted speed Combining radial ply tires with Tire pressures change by approxi- limits. Where speed limits or condi- other types of tires on your vehicle mately 7 kPa per 7°C of air tempera- tions are such that the vehicle can be will cause your vehicle to handle ture change. Keep this in mind when driven at high speeds, maintaining poorly. The instability could cause checking tire pressure inside a garage, correct tire inflation pressure is very a collision. Always use radial ply especially in the winter. important. Increased tire pressure tires in sets of four. Never combine Example: If garage temperature = and reduced vehicle loading may be them with other types of tires. 20°C and the outside temperature = required for high-speed vehicle op- 0°C then the cold tire inflation pres- eration. Refer to your authorized tire Tire Repair sure should be increased by 21 kPa, dealer or original equipment vehicle If your tire becomes damaged, it may which equals 7 kPa for every 7°C for dealer for recommended safe operat- be repaired if it meets the following this outside temperature condition. ing speeds, loading and cold tire infla- criteria: tion pressures. Tire pressure may increase from 13 to • The tire has not been driven on 40 kPa during operation. DO NOT when flat. reduce this normal pressure build up WARNING! • The damage is only on the tread or your tire pressure will be too low. High speed driving with your ve- section of your tire (sidewall dam- hicle under maximum load is dan- age is not repairable). gerous. The added strain on your tires could cause them to fail. You • The puncture is no greater than could have a serious collision. Do 6 mm. not drive a vehicle loaded to the Consult an authorized tire dealer for maximum capacity at continuous tire repairs and additional informa- speeds above 120 km/h. tion.

226 Damaged Run Flat tires, or Run Flat summer tires, be aware these tires are speeds over 120 km/h. For speeds tires that have experienced a loss of not designed for winter or cold driving above 120 km/h refer to original pressure should be replaced immedi- conditions. For more information, equipment or an authorized tire ately with another Run Flat tire of contact a authorized dealer. Summer dealer for recommended safe operat- identical size and service description tires do not contain the all season ing speeds, loading and cold tire infla- (Load Index and Speed Code). designation or mountain/snowflake tion pressures. symbol on the tire sidewall. Tire Types While studded tires improve perfor- Use summer tires only in sets of four; mance on ice, skid and traction capa- All Season Tires (for failure to do so may adversely affect bility on wet or dry surfaces may be versions/markets, where the safety and handling of your ve- poorer than that of non-studded tires. provided) hicle. Some states prohibit studded tires; therefore, local laws should be All Season tires provide traction for Snow Tires all seasons (spring, summer, fall and checked before using these tire types. Some areas of the country require the winter). Traction levels may vary be- Run Flat Tires (for tween different all season tires. All use of snow tires during the winter. season tires can be identified by the Snow tires can be identified by a versions/markets, where M+S, M&S, M/S or MS designation on mountain/snowflake symbol on the provided) tire sidewall. the tire sidewall. Use all season tires Run Flat tires allow you the capability only in sets of four; failure to do so If you need snow tires, select tires to drive 80 km at 80 km/h after a may adversely affect the safety and equivalent in size and type to the rapid loss of inflation pressure. This handling of your vehicle. original equipment tires. Use snow rapid loss of inflation is referred to as Summer Or Three Season Tires tires only in sets of four; failure to do the Run Flat mode. A Run Flat mode (for versions/markets, where so may adversely affect the safety and occurs when the tire inflation pressure provided) handling of your vehicle. is of/or below 96 kPa. Once a Run Flat tire reaches the run flat mode it Snow tires generally have lower speed Summer tires provide traction in both has limited driving capabilities and ratings than what was originally wet and dry conditions, and are not needs to be replaced immediately. A equipped with your vehicle and intended to be driven in snow or on Run Flat tire is not repairable. ice. If your vehicle is equipped with should not be operated at sustained

227 It is not recommended driving a ve- Spare Tire Matching Original T, S = Temporary Spare Tire hicle loaded at full capacity or to tow Equipped Tire And Wheel (for Since this tire has limited tread life, a trailer while a tire is in the run flat versions/markets, where the original equipment tire should be mode. provided) repaired (or replaced) and reinstalled See the tire pressure monitoring sec- Your vehicle may be equipped with a on your vehicle at the first opportu- tion for more information. spare tire and wheel equivalent in nity. look and function to the original Spare Tires (for equipment tire and wheel found on Do not install a wheel cover or at- versions/markets, where the front or rear axle of your vehicle. tempt to mount a conventional tire on provided) This spare tire may be used in the tire the compact spare wheel, since the rotation for your vehicle. If your ve- wheel is designed specifically for the NOTE: For vehicles equipped hicle has this option, refer to an au- compact spare tire. Do not install with TIREFIT instead of a spare thorized tire dealer for the recom- more than one compact spare tire and tire, please refer to “TIREFIT KIT” mended tire rotation pattern. wheel on the vehicle at any given time. in “In an emergency” for further information. Compact Spare Tire (for versions/markets, where WARNING! provided) Compact spares are for temporary CAUTION! emergency use only. With these The compact spare is for temporary Because of the reduced ground spares, do not drive more than emergency use only. You can identify if clearance, do not take your vehicle 80 km/h. Temporary use spares your vehicle is equipped with a com- through an automatic car wash have limited tread life. When the pact spare by looking at the spare tire with a compact, full size or limited- tread is worn to the tread wear in- description on the Tire and Loading use temporary spare installed. dicators, the temporary use spare Information Placard located on the Damage to the vehicle may result. tire needs to be replaced. Be sure to driver’s side door opening or on the follow the warnings, which apply to sidewall of the tire. Compact spare tire your spare. Failure to do so could descriptions begin with the letter “T” result in spare tire failure and loss or “S” preceding the size designation. of vehicle control. Example: T145/80D18 103M.

228 Full Size Spare (for tire affects vehicle handling. Since it is Tire Spinning versions/markets, where not the same as your original equip- When stuck in mud, sand, snow, or ice provided) ment tire, replace (or repair) the origi- conditions, do not spin your vehicle's nal equipment tire and reinstall on the The full size spare is for temporary wheels above 48 km/h or for longer vehicle at the first opportunity. emergency use only. This tire may than 30 seconds continuously without look like the originally equipped tire stopping. on the front or rear axle of your ve- WARNING! Refer to “Freeing A Stuck Vehicle” in hicle, but it is not. This spare tire may Limited-use spares are for emer- “In an emergency” for further infor- have limited tread life. When the gency use only. Installation of this mation. tread is worn to the tread wear indi- limited-use spare tire affects ve- cators, the temporary use full size hicle handling. With this tire, do spare tire needs to be replaced. Since not drive more than the speed listed WARNING! it is not the same as your original on the limit-use spare wheel. Keep Fast spinning tires can be danger- equipment tire, replace (or repair) the inflated to the cold tire inflation ous. Forces generated by excessive original equipment tire and reinstall pressures listed on your Tire and wheel speeds may cause tire dam- on the vehicle at the first opportunity. Loading Information Placard lo- age or failure. A tire could explode Limited-Use Spare (for cated on the driver’s side B-Pillar or and injure someone. Do not spin versions/markets, where the rear edge of the driver’s side your vehicle's wheels faster than provided) door. Replace (or repair) the origi- 48 km/h for more than 30 seconds nal equipment tire at the first op- continuously when you are stuck, The limited-use spare tire is for tem- portunity and reinstall it on your and do not let anyone near a spin- porary emergency use only. This tire is vehicle. Failure to do so could result ning wheel, no matter what the identified by a label located on the in loss of vehicle control. speed. limited-use spare wheel. This label contains the driving limitations for this spare. This tire may look like the original equipped tire on the front or rear axle of your vehicle, but it is not. Installation of this limited-use spare

229 Tread Wear Indicators Life Of Tire Replacement Tires Tread wear indicators are in the origi- The service life of a tire is dependent The tires on your new vehicle provide nal equipment tires to help you in upon varying factors including, but a balance of many characteristics. determining when your tires should not limited to: They should be inspected regularly be replaced. for wear and correct cold tire inflation • Driving style pressure. The manufacturer strongly • Tire pressure recommends that you use tires equivalent to the originals in size, • Distance driven quality and performance when re- • Performance tires, tires with a placement is needed. Refer to the speed rating of V or higher, and paragraph on “Tread Wear Indica- summer tires typically have a re- tors”. Refer to the Tire and Loading duced tread life. Rotation of these Information placard or the Vehicle tires per the vehicle maintenance Certification Label for the size desig- 1 — Worn Tire nation of your tire. The Load Index 2—NewTire schedule is highly recommended. and Speed Symbol for your tire will be WARNING! found on the original equipment tire These indicators are molded into the Tires and the spare tire should be sidewall. See the Tire Sizing Chart bottom of the tread grooves. They will replaced after six years, regardless example found in the Tire Safety In- appear as bands when the tread depth of the remaining tread. Failure to formation section of this manual for becomes 2 mm. When the tread is follow this warning can result in more information relating to the Load worn to the tread wear indicators, the sudden tire failure. You could lose Index and Speed Symbol of a tire. tire should be replaced. Refer to “Re- control and have a collision result- It is recommended to replace the two placement Tires” in this section for ing in serious injury or death. front tires or two rear tires as a pair. further information. Replacing just one tire can seriously Keep dismounted tires in a cool, dry affect your vehicle’s handling. If you place with as little exposure to light as ever replace a wheel, make sure that possible. Protect tires from contact the wheel’s specifications match those with oil, grease, and gasoline. of the original wheels.

230 It is recommended you contact your WARNING! (Continued) TIRE CHAINS authorized tire dealer or original (TRACTION DEVICES) equipment dealer with any questions • Never use a tire with a smaller you may have on tire specifications or load index or capacity, other than Use of traction devices require suffi- capability. Failure to use equivalent what was originally equipped on cient tire-to-body clearance. Follow replacement tires may adversely af- your vehicle. Using a tire with a these recommendations to guard fect the safety, handling, and ride of smaller load index could result in against damage. tire overloading and failure. You your vehicle. • Traction device must be of proper could lose control and have a col- size for the tire, as recommended by lision. the traction device manufacturer. WARNING! • Failure to equip your vehicle with • Do not use a tire, wheel size or tires having adequate speed capa- • Install on Rear Tires Only. rating other than that specified bility can result in sudden tire fail- • Due to limited clearance, on a 235/ for your vehicle. Some combina- ure and loss of vehicle control. tions of unapproved tires and 55R18 100V,use reduced size snow wheels may change suspension chains or traction devices with a dimensions and performance CAUTION! maximum projection of 6 mm beyond the tire profile. characteristics, resulting in Replacing original tires with tires of changes to steering, handling, a different size may result in false and braking of your vehicle. This speedometer and odometer read- WARNING! can cause unpredictable handling ings. Using tires of different size and type and stress to steering and suspen- (M+S, Snow) between front and sion components. You could lose rear axles can cause unpredictable control and have a collision re- handling. You could lose control sulting in serious injury or death. and have a collision. Use only the tire and wheel sizes with load ratings approved for your vehicle.

(Continued)

231 will increase tread life, help to main- CAUTION! CAUTION! (Continued) tain mud, snow and wet traction lev- To avoid damage to your vehicle or • Observe the traction device els, and contribute to a smooth, quiet tires, observe the following precau- manufacturer’s instructions on ride. tions: the method of installation, oper- • Because of restricted traction de- ating speed, and conditions for NOTE: Rotate tires at the first vice clearance between tires and use. Always use the suggested op- sign of irregular wear. other suspension components, it erating speed of the device manu- is important that only traction facturer’s if it is less than TIRE PRESSURE devices in good condition are 48 km/h. MONITOR SYSTEM used. Broken devices can cause • Do not use traction devices on a (TPMS) serious damage. Stop the vehicle compact spare tire. immediately if noise occurs that The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) will warn the driver of a low could indicate device breakage. TIRE ROTATION Remove the damaged parts of the tire pressure based on the vehicle rec- device before further use. RECOMMENDATIONS ommended cold placard pressure. • Install device as tightly as pos- The tires on the front and rear of your The tire pressure will vary with tem- sible and then retighten after vehicle operate at different loads and perature by about 0.07 BAR for every driving about 0.8 km. perform different steering, handling, 7°C. This means that when the out- • Do not exceed 48 km/h. and braking functions. For these rea- side temperature decreases, the tire • Drive cautiously and avoid severe sons, they wear at unequal rates. pressure will decrease. Tire pressure turns and large bumps, especially These effects can be reduced by should always be set based on cold with a loaded vehicle. timely rotation of tires. The benefits inflation tire pressure. This is defined • Do not drive for prolonged period of rotation are especially worthwhile as the tire pressure after the vehicle on dry pavement. with aggressive tread designs such as has not been driven for at least three those on all season type tires. Rotation hours, or driven less than 1.6 km after (Continued) a three hour period. The cold tire inflation pressure must not exceed the maximum inflation pressure molded into the tire sidewall. Refer to “Tires – 232 General Information” in “Starting The vehicle may need to be driven for CAUTION! and Operating” for information on up to 20 minutes above 24 km/h in how to properly inflate the vehicle’s order for the TPMS to receive this • The TPMS has been optimized tires. The tire pressure will also in- information. for the original equipment tires crease as the vehicle is driven - this is and wheels. TPMS pressures have For example, your vehicle may have a normal and there should be no adjust- been established for the tire size recommended cold (parked for more ment for this increased pressure. equipped on your vehicle. Unde- than three hours) placard pressure of sirable system operation or sensor The TPMS will warn the driver of a 2.1 BAR. If the ambient temperature damage may result when using low tire pressure if the tire pressure is 20°C and the measured tire pres- replacement equipment that is falls below the low-pressure warning sure is 1.9 BAR, a temperature drop to not of the same size, type, and/or limit for any reason, including low -7°C will decrease the tire pressure to style. Aftermarket wheels can temperature effects and natural pres- approximately 1.6 BAR. This tire cause sensor damage. It is recom- sure loss through the tire. pressure is sufficiently low enough to mended not to use aftermarket turn ON the TPM Telltale Light. Driv- The TPMS will continue to warn the sealants or balance beads if your ing the vehicle may cause the tire driver of low tire pressure as long as vehicle is equipped with a TPMS, pressure to rise to approximately 1.9 the condition exists, and will not turn as damage to the sensors may re- BAR, but the TPM Telltale Light will off until the tire pressure is at or above sult. In case of use of aftermarket still be ON. In this situation, the TPM the recommended cold placard pres- tire sealants not equivalent to the Telltale Light will turn OFF only after sure. Once the low tire pressure warn- original TIREFIT sealant, please the tires are inflated to the vehicle’s ing (Tire Pressure Monitoring [TPM] take your vehicle to a authorized recommended cold placard pressure Telltale Light) illuminates, you must dealer to have the sensor function value. increase the tire pressure to the rec- checked. ommended cold placard pressure in • After inspecting or adjusting the order for the TPM Telltale Light to tire pressure always reinstall the turn off. The system will automati- valve stem cap. This will prevent cally update and the TPM Telltale moisture and dirt from entering Light will turn off once the system the valve stem, which could dam- receives the updated tire pressures. age the TPMS sensor.

233 NOTE: • Seasonal temperature changes Tire Pressure Monitoring Low will affect tire pressure, and the Pressure Warnings • The TPMS is not intended to re- TPMS will monitor the actual place normal tire care and tire pressure in the tire. maintenance or to provide The TPM Telltale Light will warning of a tire failure or con- PREMIUM SYSTEM illuminate in the instrument dition. cluster and a chime will sound when The Tire Pressure Monitor System tire pressure is low in one or more of • The TPMS should not be used as (TPMS) uses wireless technology with the four active road tires. In addition, a tire pressure gauge while ad- wheel rim mounted electronic sensors the EVIC will display an “Inflate Tire justing your tire pressure. to monitor tire pressure levels. Sen- to XX” message for a minimum of five sors mounted to each wheel as part of • Driving on a significantly under- seconds and a "LOW TIRE" message the valve stem transmit tire pressure inflated tire causes the tire to and a graphic showing the pressure readings to the receiver module. overheat and can lead to tire values of each tire with the low tire failure. Under-inflation also re- NOTE: It is particularly impor- pressure values flashing or in a differ- duces fuel efficiency and tire tant for you to check the tire present color. The recommended cold tread life, and may affect the ve- sure in all of the tires on your ve- placard pressure inflation value is the hicle’s handling and stopping hicle monthly and to maintain the pressure value displayed in the "In- ability. proper pressure. flate Tire to XX" message displayed in the EVIC. • The TPMS is not a substitute for The TPMS consists of the following proper tire maintenance, and it components: Should this occur, you should stop as is the driver’s responsibility to soon as possible and inflate the tires • Receiver module, maintain correct tire pressure with a low pressure condition (those using an accurate tire pressure • Four TPM sensors, flashing or in a different color in the gauge, even if under-inflation EVIC graphic) to the vehicle’s recom- • Various TPMS messages, which has not reached the level to trig- mended cold placard pressure infla- display in the Electronic Vehicle In- ger illumination of the TPM tion value. Once the system receives formation Center (EVIC), and Telltale Light. the updated tire pressures, the system • TPM Telltale Light

234 will automatically update, the “In- value will display in place of the not be located in the correct vehicle flate Tire to XX” message will no lon- dashes. A system fault can occur due position. The system still needs to be ger be displayed, the graphic display to any of the following: serviced as long as the "SERVICE in the EVIC will stop flashing or re- TPM SYSTEM" message is displayed. 1. Signal interference due to elec- turn to it's original color, and the TPM tronic devices or driving next to facili- Vehicles With Compact Spare Telltale Light will turn off. The ve- ties emitting the same radio frequen- hicle may need to be driven for up to 1. The compact spare tire does not cies as the TPM sensors. 20 minutes above 24 km/h in order have a TPM sensor. Therefore, the for the TPMS to receive this informa- 2. Installing aftermarket window TPMS will not monitor the pressure in tion. tinting that contains materials that the compact spare tire. may block radio wave signals. Service TPMS Warning 2. If you install the compact spare If a system fault is detected, the TPM 3. Accumulation of snow or ice tire in place of a road tire that has a Telltale Light will flash on and off for around the wheels or wheel housings. pressure below the low-pressure warning limit, upon the next ignition 75 seconds and then remain on solid. 4. Using tire chains on the vehicle. The system fault will also sound a switch cycle, the TPM Telltale Light chime. In addition, the EVIC will dis- 5. Using wheels/tires not equipped will remain ON and a chime will play a "SERVICE TPM SYSTEM" with TPM sensors. sound. In addition, the graphic in the EVIC will still display a flashing or message for a minimum of five sec- The EVIC will also display a "SER- different color pressure value. onds and then display dashes (- -) in VICE TPM SYSTEM" message for a place of the pressure value to indicate minimum of five seconds when a sys- 3. After driving the vehicle for up to which sensor is not being received. tem fault related to an incorrect sen- 20 minutes above 24 km/h, the TPM If the ignition switch is cycled, this sor location fault is detected. In this Telltale Light will flash on and off for sequence will repeat, providing the case, the "SERVICE TPM SYSTEM" 75 seconds and then remain on solid. system fault still exists. If the system message is then followed with a In addition, the EVIC will display a fault no longer exists, the TPM Tell- graphic display with pressure values "SERVICE TPM SYSTEM" message tale Light will no longer flash, and the still shown. This indicates that the for a minimum of five seconds and "SERVICE TPM SYSTEM" message pressure values are still being received then display dashes (- -) in place of will no longer display, and a pressure from the TPM sensors but they may the pressure value.

235 4. For each subsequent ignition Sensors, such as when installing win- Light” will flash on and off for 75 switch cycle, a chime will sound, the ter wheel and tire assemblies on your seconds and then turn off, and the TPM Telltale Light will flash on and vehicle. To deactivate the TPMS, first, Electronic Vehicle Information Center off for 75 seconds and then remain on replace all four wheel and tire assem- (EVIC) will display the “SERVICE solid, and the EVIC will display a blies (road tires) with tires not TPM SYSTEM” message. The EVIC "SERVICE TPM SYSTEM" message equipped with Tire Pressure Monitor- will also display pressure values in for a minimum of five seconds and ing (TPM) Sensors. Then, drive the place of the dashes. On the next igni- then display dashes (- -) in place of vehicle for 20 minutes above tion switch cycle the “SERVICE TPM the pressure value. 24 km/h. The TPMS will chime, the SYSTEM” message will no longer be “TPM Telltale Light” will flash on displayed as long as no system fault 5. Once you repair or replace the and off for 75 seconds and then re- exists. original road tire and reinstall it on main on and the Electronic Vehicle the vehicle in place of the compact Information Center (EVIC) will dis- FUEL REQUIREMENTS spare, the TPMS will update auto- play the “SERVICE TPM SYSTEM” matically. In addition, the TPM Tell- — GASOLINE ENGINES message and then display dashes (--) tale Light will turn OFF and the in place of the pressure values. Begin- 3.6L ENGINE graphic in the EVIC will display a new ning with the next ignition switch pressure value instead of dashes (- -), All engines are designed to meet all cycle, the TPMS will no longer chime, as long as no tire pressure is below the emissions regulations and provide ex- flash the TPM Telltale Light or dis- low-pressure warning limit in any of cellent fuel economy and performance play the “SERVICE TPM SYSTEM” the four active road tires. The vehicle when using high quality unleaded message in the EVIC but dashes (--) may need to be driven for up to 20 gasoline with a minimum Research will remain in place of the pressure minutes above 24 km/h in order for Octane Number (RON) of 91 or values. the TPMS to receive this information. higher. The use of premium gasoline To reactivate the TPMS, replace all will not provide any benefit over regu- TPMS DEACTIVATION four wheel and tire assemblies (road lar gasoline in these engines. The TPMS can be deactivated if re- tires) with tires equipped with TPM Light spark knock at low engine placing all four wheel and tire assem- sensors. Then, drive the vehicle for up speeds is not harmful to your engine. blies (road tires) with wheel and tire to 20 minutes above 24 km/h. The However, continued heavy spark assemblies that do not have TPMS TPMS will chime, the “TPM Telltale

236 knock at high speeds can cause dam- Poor quality gasoline can cause prob- Ethanol age, and immediate service is re- lems such as hard starting, stalling The manufacturer recommends that quired. Poor quality gasoline can and stumble. If you experience these your vehicle be operated on fuel con- cause problems such as hard starting, problems, try another brand of gaso- taining no more than 10% ethanol. stalling, and hesitations. If you expe- line before considering service for the Purchasing your fuel from a reputable rience these symptoms, try another vehicle. supplier may reduce the risk of ex- brand of gasoline before considering Methanol ceeding this 10% limit and/or of re- service for the vehicle. ceiving fuel with abnormal properties. (Methyl) is used in a variety of con- Over 40 auto manufacturers world- It should also be noted that an in- centrations when blended with un- wide have issued and endorsed con- crease in fuel consumption should be leaded gasoline. You may find fuels sistent gasoline specifications (the expected when using ethanol-blended containing 3% or more methanol Worldwide Fuel Charter, WWFC) fuels, due to the lower energy content along with other alcohols called cosol- which define fuel properties necessary of ethanol. Problems that result from vents. to deliver enhanced emissions, perfor- using methanol/gasoline or E-85 mance, and durability for your ve- Problems that result from using ethanol blends are not the responsibil- hicle. The manufacturer recommends methanol/gasoline blends are not the ity of the manufacturer. While MTBE the use of gasoline that meets the responsibility of the manufacturer. is an oxygenate made from Methanol, WWFC specifications if they are While MTBE is an oxygenate made it does not have the negative effects of available. from Methanol, it does not have the Methanol. Besides using unleaded gasoline with negative effects of Methanol. the proper octane rating, gasolines CAUTION! that contain detergents, corrosion and CAUTION! Use of fuel with Ethanol content stability additives are recommended. Do not use gasolines containing higher than 10% may result in en- Using gasolines that have these addi- Methanol. Use of these blends may gine malfunction, starting and op- tives may help improve fuel economy, result in starting and drivability erating difficulties, and materials reduce emissions, and maintain ve- problems and may damage critical degradation. These adverse effects hicle performance. fuel system components. could result in permanent damage to your vehicle.

237 Clean Air Gasoline pump; therefore, you should ask your CAUTION! Many gasolines are now being gasoline retailer whether or not his/ her gasoline contains MMT. The manufacturer requires that blended to contribute to cleaner air, you must fuel this vehicle with Ul- especially in those areas where air Materials Added To Fuel tra Low Sulfur Highway Diesel fuel pollution levels are high. These new All gasoline sold in the United States (15 ppm Sulfur maximum) and blends provide a cleaner burning fuel is required to contain effective deter- prohibits the use of Low Sulfur and some are referred to as reformu- gent additives. Use of additional de- Highway Diesel fuel (500 ppm Sul- lated gasoline. tergents or other additives is not fur maximum) to avoid damage to The manufacturer supports these ef- needed under normal conditions and the emissions control system. forts toward cleaner air. You can help they would result in additional cost. by using these blends as they become Therefore, you should not have to add available. anything to the fuel. WARNING! Do not use alcohol or gasoline as a MMT In Gasoline FUEL REQUIREMENTS fuel blending agent. They can be MMT (Methylcyclopentadienyl Man- — DIESEL ENGINES unstable under certain conditions ganese Tricarbonyl) is a manganese and hazardous or explosive when containing metallic additive that is This vehicle must only use pre- mixed with diesel fuel. blended into some gasoline to increase mium diesel fuel that meets the octane. Gasoline blended with MMT requirements of EN 590. Biodiesel Diesel fuel is seldom completely free provides no performance advantage blends that meet EN 590 may also of water. To prevent fuel system beyond gasoline of the same octane be used. trouble, have the accumulated water number without MMT. Gasoline drained from the fuel/water separator blended with MMT reduces spark using the fuel/water separator drain plug life and reduces emission system provided. If you buy good quality fuel performance in some vehicles. The and follow the cold weather advice manufacturer recommends that gaso- above, fuel conditioners should not be line without MMT be used in your required in your vehicle. If available vehicle. The MMT content of gasoline may not be indicated on the gasoline 238 in your area, a high cetane “pre- 2. Open the fuel filler door. NOTE: A funnel is provided (lo- mium” diesel fuel may offer improved cated in the trunk in the spare tire cold-starting and warm-up perfor- area) to open the flapper door to mance. allow for emergency refueling with a gas can. BIODIESEL FUEL REQUIREMENTS A maximum blend of 7% biodiesel meeting the EN590 standard are also Fuel Filler Door recommended for use with your diesel engine. See your authorized dealer for 3. There is no fuel filler cap. A flap- further information regarding fuels per door inside the pipe seals the sys- available in your area. tem. Fuel Funnel 4. Insert the fuel nozzle fully into the ADDING FUEL filler pipe – the nozzle opens and CAUTION! 1. Press the fuel filler door release holds the flapper door while refueling. To avoid fuel spillage and overfill- switch (located in the driver's door NOTE: Only the correct size ing, do not “top off” the fuel tank map pocket). nozzle opens the latches allowing after filling. the flapper door to open. 5. Fill the vehicle with fuel – when the fuel nozzle “clicks” or shuts off the WARNING! fuel tank is full. • Never have any smoking materials lit in or near the vehicle when 6. Remove the fuel nozzle and close the fuel door is open or the tank is the fuel door. being filled.

Fuel Filler Door Release Switch (Continued)

239 To maintain the New Vehicle Limited WARNING! (Continued) Warranty coverage, follow the re- • Never add fuel when the engine is quirements and recommendations in running. This is in violation of this manual concerning vehicles used most state and federal fire regula- for trailer towing. tions and may cause the “Mal- function Indicator Light” to turn COMMON TOWING on. DEFINITIONS • A fire may result if fuel is pumped Access Cover The following trailer towing related into a portable container that is 3. Pull the release cable. definitions will assist you in under- inside of a vehicle. You could be standing the following information: burned. Always place fuel containers on the ground while fill- Gross Vehicle Weight Rating ing. (GVWR) The GVWR is the total allowable EMERGENCY FUEL weight of your vehicle. This includes FILLER DOOR RELEASE driver, passengers, cargo and tongue If you are unable to open the fuel filler weight. The total load must be limited door, use the fuel filler door emer- Release Cable so that you do not exceed the GVWR. gency release. Refer to “Vehicle Loading/Vehicle TRAILER TOWING Certification Label” in “Starting and 1. Open the trunk. In this section you will find safety tips Operating” for further information. 2. Remove the access cover (located and information on limits to the type Gross Trailer Weight (GTW) on the left side inner trim panel). of towing you can reasonably do with your vehicle. Before towing a trailer, The GTW is the weight of the trailer carefully review this information to plus the weight of all cargo, consum- tow your load as efficiently and safely ables and equipment (permanent or as possible. temporary) loaded in or on the trailer

240 in its "loaded and ready for opera- WARNING! Trailer Sway Control tion" condition. The recommended The trailer sway control can be a me- way to measure GTW is to put your It is important that you do not ex- chanical telescoping link that can be fully loaded trailer on a vehicle scale. ceed the maximum front or rear installed between the hitch receiver The entire weight of the trailer must GAWR. A dangerous driving condi- and the trailer tongue that typically be supported by the scale. tion can result if either rating is exceeded. You could lose control of provides adjustable friction associ- Gross Combination Weight Rating the vehicle and have a collision. ated with the telescoping motion to (GCWR) dampen any unwanted trailer sway- Tongue Weight (TW) ing motions while traveling. The GCWR is the total permissible weight of your vehicle and trailer The tongue weight is the downward If equipped, the electronic Trailer when weighed in combination. force exerted on the hitch ball by the Sway Control (TSC) recognizes a trailer. In most cases, it should not be swaying trailer and automatically ap- NOTE: The GCWR rating in- less than 7% or more than 10% of the plies individual wheel brakes and/or cludes a 68 kg allowance for the trailer load. Tongue weight must not reduces engine power to attempt to presence of a driver. exceed the lesser of either the hitch eliminate the trailer sway. Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) certification rating, or the trailer Weight-Carrying Hitch The GAWR is the maximum capacity tongue chassis rating. It should never A weight-carrying hitch supports the of the front and rear axles. Distribute be less than 4% of the trailer load, and trailer tongue weight, just as if it were the load over the front and rear axles not less than 25 kg. You must consider luggage located at a hitch ball or some evenly. Make sure that you do not tongue load as part of the load on your other connecting point of the vehicle. exceed either front or rear GAWR. vehicle and its GAWR. These kinds of hitches are the most Refer to “Vehicle Loading/Vehicle Frontal Area popular on the market today and they Certification Label” in “Starting and The frontal area is the maximum are commonly used to tow small and Operating” for further information. height multiplied by the maximum medium sized trailers. width of the front of a trailer.

241 Weight-Distributing Hitch WARNING! With Attachment Point A weight-distributing system works • An improperly adjusted Weight • For detachable tow bar, pass the by applying leverage through spring Distributing Hitch system may cable through the attachment point (load) bars. They are typically used reduce handling, stability, brak- and clip it back onto itself. for heavier loads to distribute trailer ing performance, and could result tongue weight to the tow vehicle's in a collision. front axle and the trailer axle(s). • Weight Distributing Systems may When used in accordance with the not be compatible with Surge manufacturer's directions, it provides Brake Couplers. Consult with for a more level ride, offering more your hitch and trailer manufac- consistent steering and brake control turer or a reputable Recreational thereby enhancing towing safety. The Vehicle dealer for additional in- addition of a friction / hydraulic sway formation. Detachable Ball Clip Loop Method control also dampens sway caused by • For fixed ball tow bar, attach the traffic and crosswinds and contrib- BREAKAWAY CABLE clip directly to the designated utes positively to tow vehicle and ATTACHMENT point. This alternative must be spe- trailer stability. Trailer sway control cifically permitted by the trailer and a weight distributing (load equal- European braking regulations for manufacturer since the clip may izing) hitch are recommended for braked trailers up to 3,500 kg require not be sufficiently strong for use in heavier Tongue Weights (TW) and trailers to be fitted with either a sec- the way. may be required depending on vehicle ondary coupling or breakaway cable. and trailer configuration / loading to The recommended location for at- comply with Gross Axle Weight Rat- taching the normal trailer's break- ing (GAWR) requirements. Weight away cable is in the stamped slot lo- Distribution hitched are recom- cated on the sidewall of the hitch mended for loads in excess 2,268 kg. receiver.

Fixed Ball Clip Loop Method

242 Without Attachment Points • For fixed ball tow bar, loop the TRAILER TOWING cable around the neck of the tow • For detachable ball tow bar, you WEIGHTS (MAXIMUM ball. If you fit the cable like this, use must follow the recommended TRAILER WEIGHT a single loop only. manufacturer or supplier proce- RATINGS) dure. The following chart provides the maximum trailer weight ratings tow- able for your given drivetrain.

Fixed Ball Neck Loop Method Detachable Ball Neck Loop Method

Engine/Transmission Frontal Area Max. GTW Maximum weight on the (Gross Trailer Wt.) sphere/ball (See Note) 3.6L Automatic 2.04 sq m 1 725 kg 86 kg 3.0L Diesel Automatic 2.97 sq m 1 996 kg 100 kg Refer to local laws for maximum trailer towing speeds NOTE: The trailer tongue weight must be considered as part of the combined weight of occupants and cargo, and it should never exceed the weight referenced on the “Tire and Loading Information” placard. Refer to “Tire Safety Information” in “Starting and Operating” for further information.

243 TRAILER AND TONGUE Consider the following items when TOWING REQUIREMENTS WEIGHT computing the weight on the rear axle of the vehicle: To promote proper break-in of your Always load a trailer with 60% to new vehicle drivetrain components 65% of the weight in the front of the • The tongue weight of the trailer. the following guidelines are recom- trailer. This places 5% of the Gross • The weight of any other type of mended: Trailer Weight (GTW) on the tow cargo or equipment put in or on hitch of your vehicle. Loads balanced your vehicle. CAUTION! over the wheels or heavier in the rear • The weight of the driver and all can cause the trailer to sway severely • Do not tow a trailer at all during passengers. side to side which will cause loss of the first 805 km the new vehicle is control of the vehicle and trailer. Fail- NOTE: Remember that every- driven. The engine, axle or other ure to load trailers heavier in front is thing put into or on the trailer adds parts could be damaged. the cause of many trailer collisions. to the load on your vehicle. Also, • Then, during the first 805 km additional factory-installed op- that a trailer is towed, do not Never exceed the maximum tongue tions or dealer-installed options drive over 80 km/h and do not weight stamped on your bumper or must be considered as part of the make starts at full throttle. This trailer hitch. total load on your vehicle. Refer to helps the engine and other parts the “Tire and Loading Informa- of the vehicle wear in at the tion” placard for the maximum heavier loads. combined weight of occupants and cargo for your vehicle.

244 Towing Requirements – Tires WARNING! WARNING! (Continued) – Do not attempt to tow a trailer Improper towing can lead to an in- • Vehicles with trailers should not while using a compact spare tire. jury collision. Follow these guide- be parked on a grade. When lines to make your trailer towing as parking, apply the parking brake – Proper tire inflation pressures are safe as possible: on the tow vehicle. Put the tow essential to the safe and satisfactory • Make certain that the load is se- vehicle automatic transmission in operation of your vehicle. Refer to cured in the trailer and it will not PARK. Always, block or "chock" “Tires – General Information” in shift during travel. When traile- the trailer wheels. “Starting and Operating” for infor- ring cargo that is not fully secured, • GCWR must not be exceeded. mation on tire pressures and for dynamic load shifts can occur that • Total weight must be distrib- proper tire inflation procedures. may be difficult for the driver to uted between the tow vehicle – Check the trailer tires for proper control. You could lose control of and the trailer such that the tire inflation pressures before your vehicle and have a collision. following four ratings are not trailer usage. • When hauling cargo or towing a exceeded: trailer, do not overload your ve- 1. Max loading as defined on the – Check for signs of tire wear or vis- hicle or trailer. Overloading can “Tire and Loading Informa- ible tire damage before towing a cause a loss of control, poor perfor- tion” placard. trailer. Refer to “Tires – General mance, or damage to brakes, axle, 2. GTW Information” in “Starting and Op- engine, transmission, steering, sus- 3. GAWR erating” for information on tread pension, chassis structure, or tires. 4. Tongue weight rating for the wear indicators and for the proper • Safety chains must always be used trailer hitch utilized. (This re- inspection procedure. between your vehicle and trailer. quirement may limit the abil- – When replacing tires, refer to “Tires Always connect the chains to the ity to always achieve the 10% – General Information” in “Start- frame or hook retainers of the ve- to 15% range of tongue ing and Operating” for information hicle hitch. Cross the chains under weight as a percentage of total on replacement tires and for the the trailer tongue and allow trailer weight.) proper tire replacement proce- enough slack for turning corners. dures. Replacing tires with a higher (Continued)

245 load carrying capacity will not in- CAUTION! Towing Requirements – Trailer crease the vehicle's GVWR and Lights And Wiring GAWR limits. If the trailer weighs more than 454 kg loaded, it should have its Whenever you pull a trailer, regard- Towing Requirements – Trailer own brakes, and they should be of less of the trailer size, stoplights and Brakes adequate capacity. Failure to do turn signals on the trailer are required for motoring safety. –Donot interconnect the hydraulic this could lead to accelerated brake brake system or vacuum system of wear, higher brake pedal effort, and The Trailer Tow Package may include your vehicle with that of the trailer. longer stopping distances. a 7-pin or a 13-pin wiring harness. This could cause inadequate brak- Use a factory approved trailer harness ing and possible personal injury. and connector. WARNING! – An electronically actuated trailer NOTE: Do not cut or splice wiring • Do not connect trailer brakes to brake controller is required when into the vehicles wiring harness. your vehicle's hydraulic brake towing a trailer with electronically lines. It can overload your brake actuated brakes. When towing a The electrical connections are all system and cause it to fail. You trailer equipped with a hydraulic complete to the vehicle but you must might not have brakes when you surge actuated brake system, an mate the harness to a trailer connec- need them and could have an col- electronic brake controller is not tor. lision. required. • Towing any trailer will increase – Trailer brakes are recommended your stopping distance. When for trailers over 454 kg and re- towing, you should allow for ad- quired for trailers in excess of ditional space between your ve- 907 kg. hicle and the vehicle in front of you. Failure to do so could result in a collision. 7–Pin Connector

246 Pin Wire Pin Wire Pin Function Wire Function Function Number Color Number Color Number Color 1 Left Turn Yellow 7 Left Rear Black 1 Left Turn Yellow Signal Position, Signal 2 Rear Fog Blue Side Marker 2 Rear Fog Blue Light Lights, and Light 3 Ground/ White Rear Regis- 3 a Ground/ White Common tration Common Return Plate Illu- Return for mination 4 Right Turn Green Contacts Device. b Signal (Pins) 1 and b The rear position registration 5 Right Rear Brown 2and4to8 plate illumination device shall be Position, 4 Right Turn Green connected such that no light of the Side Marker Signal device has a common connection Lights, and 5 Right Rear Brown with both pins 5 and 7. Rear Regis- Position, tration Side Marker Plate Illu- Lights, and mination Rear Regis- Device. b tration Plate 6 Stoplights Red Illumination Device. b 6 Stoplights Red

13–Pin Connector

247 Pin Function Wire Pin Function Wire frequent shifting when towing. How- Number Color Number Color ever, if frequent shifting does occur while in DRIVE, you can use the 7 Left Rear Black 13 a Return for White AutoStick® shift control (for Position, Contact versions/markets, where provided) to Side Marker (Pin) 9 manually select a lower gear. Lights, and Note: The allocation pin 12 has Rear Regis- been changed from “Coding for NOTE: Using a lower gear while tration Plate coupled Trailer” to “Reserve for operating the vehicle under heavy Illumination Future Allocation.” loading conditions will improve b Device. a The three return circuits shall not performance and extend transmis- 8 Reverse Red/ be connected electrically in the sion life by reducing excessive lights Black trailer. shifting and heat buildup. This action will also provide better engine 9 Permanent Brown/ b The rear position registration braking. Power Sup- White plate illumination device shall be ply (+12V) connected such that no light of the If you REGULARLY tow a trailer for 10 Power Sup- Red device has a common connection more than 45 minutes of continuous ply Con- with both pins 5 and 7. operation, then change the automatic trolled by transmission fluid and filter as speci- Ignition TOWING TIPS fied for “police, taxi, fleet, or frequent Switch Before setting out on a trip, practice trailer towing" (five-speed transmis- (+12V) turning, stopping, and backing up the sion only). Refer to the “Maintenance 11 a Return for White trailer in an area located away from Schedule” for the proper maintenance Contact heavy traffic. intervals. (Pin) 10 Automatic Transmission Electronic Speed Control 12 Reserve for Red/ Future Allo- Blue The DRIVE range can be selected • Do not use in hilly terrain or with cation when towing. The transmission con- heavy loads. trols include a drive strategy to avoid

248 • When using the speed control, if Cooling System mirrors, may also be required or you experience speed drops greater strongly recommended. To reduce potential for engine and than 16 km/h, disengage until you transmission overheating, take the can get back to cruising speed. following actions: • Use speed control in flat terrain and City Driving with light loads to maximize fuel efficiency. When stopped for short periods of time, shift the transmission into NEU- AutoStick® (for versions/markets, TRAL and increase engine idle speed. where provided) Highway Driving – When using the AutoStick® shift control, select the highest gear that Reduce speed. Trailer Tow Hitch Attaching allows for adequate performance Points And Overhang Dimen- Air Conditioning and avoids frequent downshifts. sions For example, choose “4” if the de- Turn off temporarily. A 638.9 mm sired speed can be maintained. B 746.1 mm Choose “3” or “2” if needed to TRAILER HITCH C 831.1 mm maintain the desired speed. ATTACHING POINTS D (maximum 1161.5 mm – To prevent excess heat generation, Your vehicle will require extra equip- overhang) ment to tow a trailer safely and effi- avoid continuous driving at high E 535.3 mm RPM. Reduce vehicle speed as nec- ciently. The trailer tow hitch must be F 520.3 mm essary to avoid extended driving at attached to your vehicle using the high RPM. Return to a higher gear provided attaching points on the ve- or vehicle speed when grade and hicle's frame. Refer to the following road conditions allow. chart to determine the accurate attaching points. Other equipment, such as trailer sway controls and braking equipment, trailer equalizing (leveling) equipment and low profile

249 RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND MOTORHOME, ETC.) Recreational towing (with all four wheels on the ground, or using a towing dolly) is NOT ALLOWED.The only acceptable method for towing this vehicle (behind another vehicle) is on a vehicle trailer with all four wheels OFF the ground.

CAUTION! Towing this vehicle in violation of the above requirements can cause severe transmission damage. Dam- age from improper towing is not covered under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.

250 6

WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

• HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS ...... 252 • IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS ...... 252 • WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS . .253 • TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS ...... 253 • TIREFIT KIT (for versions/markets, where provided) ...... 253 • TIREFIT STORAGE ...... 254 • TIREFIT KIT COMPONENTS AND OPERATION ...... 254 • TIREFIT USAGE PRECAUTIONS ...... 254 • SEALING A TIRE WITH TIREFIT...... 256 • JUMP-STARTING PROCEDURES ...... 259 • PREPARATIONS FOR JUMP-START...... 259 • JUMP-STARTING PROCEDURE ...... 260 • FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE ...... 261 • TOW EYES ...... 262 • SHIFT LEVER OVERRIDE — 5 SPEED TRANSMISSION ...... 263 • MANUAL PARK RELEASE — 8 SPEED TRANSMISSION ...... 263 • TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE ...... 264 • WITHOUT THE KEY FOB...... 266

251 HAZARD WARNING IF YOUR ENGINE CAUTION! FLASHERS OVERHEATS Driving with a hot cooling system The Hazard Warning flasher switch is In any of the following situations, you could damage your vehicle. If the located in the center of the instrument can reduce the potential for overheat- temperature gauge reads “H,” pull panel between the center air outlets. ing by taking the appropriate action. over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle with the air conditioner • On the highways — slow down. Press the switch to turn on the turned off until the pointer drops Hazard Warning flashers. • In city traffic — while stopped, back into the normal range. If the When the switch is activated, all di- place the transmission in NEU- pointer remains on the “H,” turn rectional turn signals will flash on and TRAL, but do not increase the en- the engine off immediately and call off to warn oncoming traffic of an gine idle speed. for service. emergency. Press the switch a second time to turn off the Hazard Warning NOTE: There are steps that you flashers. can take to slow down an impend- WARNING! ing overheat condition: This is an emergency warning system You or others can be badly burned and it should not be used when the • If your air conditioner (A/C) is by hot engine coolant (antifreeze) vehicle is in motion. Use it when your on, turn it off. The A/C system or steam from your radiator. If you vehicle is disabled and it is creating a adds heat to the engine cooling see or hear steam coming from un- safety hazard for other motorists. system and turning the A/C off der the hood, do not open the hood can help remove this heat. until the radiator has had time to When you must leave the vehicle to cool. Never try to open a cooling seek assistance, the Hazard Warning • You can also turn the temperature control to maximum heat, system pressure cap when the ra- flashers will continue to operate even diator or coolant bottle is hot. though the ignition is placed in the the mode control to floor and the OFF position. blower control to high. This allows the heater core to act as a NOTE: With extended use the supplement to the radiator and Hazard Warning flashers may aids in removing heat from the wear down your battery. engine cooling system.

252 WHEEL AND TIRE WARNING! TORQUE To avoid the risk of forcing the ve- SPECIFICATIONS hicle off the jack, do not tighten the Proper lug nut/bolt torque is very im- lug nuts fully until the vehicle has portant to ensure that the wheel is been lowered. Failure to follow this properly mounted to the vehicle. Any warning may result in personal in- time a wheel has been removed and jury. reinstalled on the vehicle the lug nuts/ Wheel Mounting Surface bolts should be torqued using a prop- Tighten the lug nuts/bolts in a star TIREFIT KIT (for erly calibrated torque wrench. pattern until each nut/bolt has been versions/markets, where TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS tightened twice. provided) Small punctures up to 6 mm in the tire Lug Nut/ **Lug Lug tread can be sealed with TIREFIT. Bolt Nut/ Nut/Bolt Foreign objects (e.g., screws or nails) Torque Bolt Socket should not be removed from the tire. Size Size TIREFIT can be used in outside tem- M14 x peratures down to approximately 176 N·m 22 mm 1.50 -20°C. **Use only LANCIA recommended Torque Patterns This kit will provide a temporary tire lug nuts/bolts and clean or remove After 40 km check the lug nut/bolt seal, allowing you to drive your ve- any dirt or oil before tightening. torque to be sure that all the lug nuts/ hicle up to 160 km with a maximum Inspect the wheel mounting surface bolts are properly seated against the speed of 88 km/h. prior to mounting the tire and remove wheel. any corrosion or loose particles.

253 TIREFIT STORAGE 4. Power Button Using The Power Button The TIREFIT kit is located in the 5. Mode Select Knob Push and release the Power Button (4) once to turn On trunk. 6. Sealant Hose (Clear) the TIREFIT kit. Push and 7. Air Pump Hose (Black) release the Power Button (4) again to turn Off the TIREFIT kit. 8. Power Plug Using The Deflation Button Using The Mode Select Knob And Hoses Press the Deflation Button (2) to reduce the air pres- Your TIREFIT kit is equipped with sure in the tire if it becomes the following symbols to indicate the over-inflated. TIREFIT Location air or sealant mode. TIREFIT KIT Selecting Air Mode TIREFIT USAGE COMPONENTS AND PRECAUTIONS Turn the Mode Select Knob OPERATION (5) to this position for air • Using the TIREFIT sealant may pump operation only. Use cause the Tire Pressure Monitoring the Black Air Pump Hose System (TPMS) to become inoper- (7) when selecting this mode. able. It is recommended that you Selecting Sealant Mode take your vehicle to an authorized dealer to have the sensor function Turn the Mode Se- checked. lect Knob (5) to this position to inject • Replace the TIREFIT Sealant the TIREFIT Seal- Bottle (1) and Sealant Hose (6) prior to the expiration date (printed 1. Sealant Bottle ant and to inflate the tire. Use the on the bottle label) to assure opti- 2. Deflation Button Sealant Hose (clear mum operation of the system. Refer 3. Pressure Gauge hose) (6) when selecting this mode. 254 to “Sealing a Tire with TIREFIT” Hose (7) and make sure the Mode WARNING! (Continued) section (F) “Sealant Bottle and Select Knob (5) is in the Air Mode Hose Replacement”. when inflating such items to avoid • If the tire has any damage from injecting sealant into them. The driving with extremely low tire • The Sealant Bottle (1) and Sealant TIREFIT Sealant is only intended pressure. Hose (6) are a one tire application to seal punctures less than 6 mm • If the tire has any damage from use. After each use, always replace diameter in the tread of your driving on a flat tire. these components immediately at vehicle. • If the wheel has any damage. an authorized dealer. • If you are unsure of the condition • Do not lift or carry the TIREFIT kit • When the TIREFIT sealant is in a of the tire or the wheel. by the hoses. liquid form, clean water, and a • Keep TIREFIT away from open damp cloth will remove the mate- flame or heat source. rial from the vehicle or tire and WARNING! • A loose TIREFIT kit thrown for- wheel components. Once the seal- • Do not attempt to seal a tire on ward in a collision or hard stop ant dries, it can easily be peeled off the side of the vehicle close to could endanger the occupants of and properly discarded. traffic. Pull far enough off the the vehicle. Always stow the • For optimum performance, make road to avoid the danger of being TIREFIT kit in the place pro- sure the valve stem on the wheel is hit when using the TIREFIT kit. vided. Failure to follow these free of debris before connecting the • Do not use TIREFIT or drive the warnings can result in injuries TIREFIT kit. vehicle under the following cir- that are serious or fatal to you, cumstances: your passengers, and others • You can use the TIREFIT air pump – If the puncture in the tire tread around you. to inflate bicycle tires. The kit also is approximately 6 mm or (Continued) comes with two needles, located in larger. the Accessory Storage Compart- – If the tire has any sidewall ment (on the bottom of the air damage. pump) for inflating sport balls, rafts, or similar inflatable items. (Continued) However, use only the Air Pump

255 (B) Setting Up To Use TIREFIT: WARNING! (Continued) SEALING A TIRE WITH TIREFIT • Take care not to allow the con- 1. Turn the Mode Select Knob (5) to tents of TIREFIT to come in con- (A) Whenever You Stop To Use the Sealant Mode position. tact with hair, eyes, or clothing. TIREFIT: 2. Uncoil the Sealant Hose (6) and TIREFIT is harmful if inhaled, 1. Pull over to a safe location and then remove the cap from the fitting swallowed, or absorbed through turn on the vehicle’s Hazard Warning at the end of the hose. the skin: It causes skin, eye, and flashers. respiratory irritation. Flush im- 3. Place the TIREFIT kit flat on the mediately with plenty of water if 2. Verify that the valve stem (on the ground next to the deflated tire. there is any contact with eyes or wheel with the deflated tire) is in a 4. Remove the cap from the valve skin. Change clothing as soon as position that is near to the ground. stem and then screw the fitting at the possible, if there is any contact This will allow the TIREFIT Hoses end of the Sealant Hose (6) onto the with clothing. (6) and (7) to reach the valve stem valve stem. • TIREFIT Sealant solution con- and keep the TIREFIT kit flat on the 5. Uncoil the Power Plug (8) and in- tains latex. In case of allergic re- ground. This will provide the best po- sert the plug into the vehicle’s 12 Volt action or rash, consult a physi- sitioning of the kit when injecting the power outlet. cian immediately. Keep TIREFIT sealant into the deflated tire and run- out of reach of children. If swal- ning the air pump. Move the vehicle as NOTE: Do not remove foreign ob- lowed, rinse mouth immediately necessary to place the valve stem in jects (e.g., screws or nails) from the with plenty of water and drink this position before proceeding. tire. plenty of water. Do not induce 3. Place the transmission in PARK (C) Injecting TIREFIT Sealant vomiting! Consult a physician (auto transmission) or in Gear Into The Deflated Tire: immediately. (manual transmission) and turn Off • Use the gloves provided in the the ignition. • Always start the engine before Accessory Storage Compartment turning ON the TIREFIT kit. (located on the bottom of the air 4. Set the parking brake. pump) when operating the TIRE- FIT kit.

256 NOTE: Manual transmission ve- 2. Connect the Power Plug (8) to a 2. The pump will start to inject air hicles must have the parking different 12 Volt power outlet in your into the tire immediately after the brake engaged and the shift lever vehicle or another vehicle, if avail- Sealant Bottle (1) is empty. Continue in NEUTRAL. able. Make sure the engine is running to operate the pump and inflate the before turning ON the TIREFIT kit. tire to the pressure indicated on the • After pressing the Power Button tire pressure label on the driver-side (4), the sealant (white fluid) will 3. The Sealant Bottle (1) may be latch pillar (recommended pressure). flow from the Sealant Bottle (1) empty due to previous use. Call for Check the tire pressure by looking at through the Sealant Hose (6) and assistance. the Pressure Gauge (3). into the tire. NOTE: If the Mode Select Knob If the tire does not inflate to at least NOTE: Sealant may leak out (5) is on Air Mode and the pump is 1.8 Bar pressure within 15 min- through the puncture in the tire. operating, air will dispense from utes: If the sealant (white fluid) does not the Air Pump Hose (7) only, not the Sealant Hose (6). flow within0–10seconds through • The tire is too badly damaged. Do not attempt to drive the vehicle fur- the Sealant Hose (6): If the sealant (white fluid) does ther. Call for assistance. flow 1. Press the Power Button (4) to turn through the Sealant Hose (6): NOTE: If the tire becomes over- Off the TIREFIT kit. Disconnect the 1. Continue to operate the pump un- inflated, press the Deflation But- Sealant Hose (6) from the valve stem. til sealant is no longer flowing ton to reduce the tire pressure to Make sure the valve stem is free of through hose (typically takes 30 - 70 the recommended inflation pres- debris. Reconnect the Sealant Hose seconds). As the sealant flows through sure before continuing. (6) to the valve stem. Check that the the Sealant Hose (6), the Pressure Mode Select Knob (5) is in the Sealant Gauge (3) can read as high as 5 Bar. If the tire inflates to the recom- Mode position and not Air Mode. The Pressure Gauge (3) will decrease mended pressure or is at least 1.8 Press the Power Button (4) to turn On quickly from approximately 5 Bar to Bar pressure within 15 minutes: the TIREFIT kit. the actual tire pressure when the Seal- 1. Press the Power Button (4) to turn ant Bottle (1) is empty. off the TIREFIT kit.

257 2. Remove the Speed Limit sticker (D) Drive Vehicle: 3. Uncoil the Air Pump Hose (7) from the top of the Sealant Bottle (1) Immediately after injecting sealant (black in color) and screw the fitting and place the sticker on the instru- and inflating the tire, drive the vehicle at the end of hose (7) onto the valve ment panel. 8 km or 10 minutes to ensure distri- stem. 3. Immediately disconnect the Seal- bution of the TIREFIT Sealant within 4. Check the pressure in the tire by ant Hose (6) from the valve stem, the tire. Do not exceed 88 km/h. reading the Pressure Gauge (3). reinstall the cap on the fitting at the If tire pressure is less than 1.3 Bar, end of the hose, and place the TIRE- WARNING! the tire is too badly damaged. Do not FIT kit in the vehicle storage location. attempt to drive the vehicle further. Quickly proceed to (D) “Drive Ve- TIREFIT is not a permanent flat Call for assistance. hicle”. tire repair. Have the tire inspected and repaired or replaced after using If the tire pressure is 1.3 Bar or TIREFIT. Do not exceed 88 km/h higher: CAUTION! until the tire is repaired or replaced. • The metal end fitting from Power Failure to follow this warning can 1. Press the Power Button (4) to turn Plug (8) may get hot after use, so result in injuries that are serious or on TIREFIT and inflate the tire to the it should be handled carefully. fatal to you, your passengers, and pressure indicated on the tire and • Failure to reinstall the cap on the others around you. loading information label on the fitting at the end of the Sealant driver-side door opening. (E) After Driving: Hose (6) can result in sealant NOTE: If the tire becomes over- contacting your skin, clothing, Pull over to a safe location. Refer to inflated, press the Deflation But- and the vehicle’s interior. It can “Whenever You Stop to Use TIRE- ton to reduce the tire pressure to also result in sealant contacting FIT” before continuing. the recommended inflation pres- internal TIREFIT kit components sure before continuing. 1. Turn the Mode Select Knob (5) to which may cause permanent the Air Mode position. damage to the kit. 2. Disconnect the TIREFIT kit from 2. Uncoil the power plug and insert the valve stem, reinstall the cap on the the plug into the vehicle's 12 Volt valve stem and unplug from 12 Volt power outlet. outlet.

258 3. Place the TIREFIT kit in its proper 3. Press the Sealant Bottle release battery booster pack. Jump-starting storage area in the vehicle. button. The Sealant Bottle (1) will can be dangerous if done improperly pop up. Remove the bottle and dis- so please follow the procedures in this 4. Have the tire inspected and re- pose of it accordingly. section carefully. paired or replaced at the earliest opportunity at an authorized dealer or 4. Clean any remaining sealant from NOTE: When using a portable tire service center. the TIREFIT housing. battery booster pack follow the manufacturer’s operating instruc- 5. Replace the Sealant Bottle (1) and 5. Position the new Sealant Bottle (1) tions and precautions. Sealant Hose (6) assembly at your in the housing so that the Sealant authorized dealer as soon as possible. Hose (6) aligns with the hose slot in Refer to “(F) Sealant Bottle and Hose the front of the housing. Press the CAUTION! Replacement.” bottle into the housing. An audible Do not use a portable battery click will be heard indicating the NOTE: When having the tire ser- booster pack or any other booster bottle is locked into place. viced, advise the authorized dealer source with a system voltage or service center that the tire has 6. Verify that the cap is installed on greater than 12 Volts or damage to been sealed using the TIREFIT the fitting at the end of the Sealant the battery, starter motor, alterna- service kit. Hose (6) and return the hose to its tor or electrical system may occur. storage area (located on the bottom of (F) Sealant Bottle And Hose the air pump). Replacement: WARNING! 7. Return the TIREFIT kit to its stor- 1. Uncoil the Sealant Hose (6) (clear Do not attempt jump-starting if the age location in the vehicle. in color). battery is frozen. It could rupture or explode and cause personal injury. 2. Locate the round Sealant Bottle JUMP-STARTING release button in the recessed area PROCEDURES PREPARATIONS FOR under the sealant bottle. If your vehicle has a discharged bat- JUMP-START tery it can be jump-started using a set The battery is stored under an access of jumper cables and a battery in an- cover in the trunk. Remote battery other vehicle or by using a portable

259 posts are located on the right side of WARNING! (Continued) WARNING! the engine compartment for jump- starting. • Remove any metal jewelry such Do not allow vehicles to touch each as rings, watch bands and brace- other as this could establish a NOTE: The remote battery posts lets that could make an inadver- ground connection and personal in- are viewed by standing on the right tent electrical contact. You could jury could result. side of the vehicle looking over the be seriously injured. fender. • Batteries contain sulfuric acid JUMP-STARTING that can burn your skin or eyes PROCEDURE and generate hydrogen gas which is flammable and explosive. Keep WARNING! open flames or sparks away from the battery. Failure to follow this procedure could result in personal injury or 1. Set the parking brake, shift the property damage due to battery ex- automatic transmission into PARK plosion. Remote Battery Post Locations and turn the ignition to LOCK. 1 — Remote Positive (+) Post 2. Turn off the heater, radio, and all 2 — Remote Negative (-) Post CAUTION! unnecessary electrical accessories. Failure to follow these procedures 3. If using another vehicle to jump- could result in damage to the WARNING! start the battery, park the vehicle charging system of the booster ve- within the jumper cables reach, set hicle or the discharged vehicle. • Take care to avoid the radiator the parking brake and make sure the cooling fan whenever the hood is ignition is OFF. 1. Connect the positive (+) end of the raised. It can start anytime the jumper cable to the remote positive ignition switch is ON. You can be (+) post of the discharged vehicle. injured by moving fan blades.

(Continued)

260 2. Connect the opposite end of the Once the engine is started, remove the CAUTION! positive (+) jumper cable to the posi- jumper cables in the reverse sequence: tive (+) post of the booster battery. Accessories plugged into the vehicle 6. Disconnect the negative (-) jumper power outlets draw power from the 3. Connect the negative end (-) of the cable from the remote negative (-) vehicle’s battery, even when not in jumper cable to the negative (-) post post of the vehicle with the discharged use (i.e., cellular phones, etc.). of the booster battery. battery. Eventually, if plugged in long 4. Connect the opposite end of the 7. Disconnect the negative end (-) of enough without engine operation, negative (-) jumper cable to the re- the jumper cable from the negative (-) the vehicle’s battery will discharge mote negative (-) post of the vehicle post of the booster battery. sufficiently to degrade battery life with the discharged battery. and/or prevent the engine from 8. Disconnect the opposite end of the starting. positive (+) jumper cable from the WARNING! positive (+) post of the booster bat- FREEING A STUCK tery. Do not connect the jumper cable to VEHICLE the negative (-) post of the dis- 9. Disconnect the positive (+) end of charged battery. The resulting elec- the jumper cable from the remote If your vehicle becomes stuck in mud, trical spark could cause the battery positive (+) post of the discharged ve- sand, or snow, it can often be moved to explode and could result in per- hicle. by a rocking motion. Turn your steer- sonal injury. Only use the specific ing wheel right and left to clear the ground point, do not use any other If frequent jump-starting is required area around the front wheels. Then exposed metal parts. to start your vehicle you should have shift back and forth between DRIVE the battery and charging system in- and REVERSE. Using minimal accel- 5. Start the engine in the vehicle that spected at your authorized dealer. erator pedal pressure to maintain the has the booster battery, let the engine rocking motion, without spinning the idle a few minutes, and then start the wheels, is most effective. engine in the vehicle with the dis- NOTE: For vehicles with 8-speed charged battery. transmission: Shifts between DRIVE and REVERSE can only be

261 achieved at wheel speeds of 8 km/h CAUTION! TOW EYES or less. Whenever the transmission remains in NEUTRAL for more • When “rocking” a stuck vehicle Your vehicle is equipped with tow than 2 seconds, you must press the by shifting between DRIVE and eyes, which are mounted in the front brake pedal to engage DRIVE or REVERSE, do not spin the and the rear. REVERSE. wheels faster than 24 km/h, or drivetrain damage may result. CAUTION! • Revving the engine or spinning CAUTION! the wheels too fast may lead to Tow eyes are for emergency use Racing the engine or spinning the transmission overheating and only, to rescue a vehicle stranded wheels may lead to transmission failure. It can also damage the off road. Do not use tow eyes for overheating and failure. Allow the tires. Do not spin the wheels tow truck hookup or highway tow- engine to idle with the transmission above 48 km/h while in gear (no ing. You could damage your ve- in NEUTRAL for at least one minute transmission shifting occurring). hicle. Tow straps are recommended after every five rocking-motion when towing the vehicle; chains cycles. This will minimize overheat- may cause vehicle damage. ing and reduce the risk of transmis- WARNING! sion failure during prolonged efforts Fast spinning tires can be danger- WARNING! to free a stuck vehicle. ous. Forces generated by excessive wheel speeds may cause damage, or Stand clear of vehicles when pull- NOTE: Press the "ESC Off" even failure, of the axle and tires. A ing with tow eyes. Tow straps and switch, to place the Electronic Sta- tire could explode and injure some- chains may break, causing serious bility Control (ESC) system in one. Do not spin your vehicle's injury. "Partial Off" mode, before rocking wheels faster than 48 km/h or for the vehicle. Refer to “Electronic longer than 30 seconds continu- Brake Control” in “Starting And ously without stopping when you Operating” for further informa- are stuck and do not let anyone tion. Once the vehicle has been near a spinning wheel, no matter freed, press the "ESC Off" switch what the speed. again to restore "ESC On" mode.

262 SHIFT LEVER MANUAL PARK OVERRIDE — 5 SPEED RELEASE — 8 SPEED TRANSMISSION TRANSMISSION If a malfunction occurs and the shift lever cannot be moved out of the WARNING! PARK position, you can use the fol- Always secure your vehicle by fully lowing procedure to temporarily applying the parking brake, before Shift Lever Override move the shift lever: activating the Manual Park Re- 1. Turn the engine OFF. 6. Move the shift lever to the NEU- lease. Activating the Manual Park TRAL position. Release will allow your vehicle to 2. Firmly apply the parking brake. 7. The vehicle may then be started in roll away if it is not secured by the 3. Remove the rubber liner from the NEUTRAL. parking brake or by proper connec- storage tray (located next to the tion to a tow vehicle. Activating the shifter on the center console). 8. Reinstall the rubber storage bin Manual Park Release on an unse- liner. cured vehicle could lead to serious 4. Press and maintain firm pressure injury or death for those in or on the brake pedal. around the vehicle. 5. Insert a screwdriver or similar tool In order to push or tow the vehicle in into the access port (in the left side of cases where the transmission will not the storage bin), and push and hold shift out of PARK (such as a dead the override release lever in. battery), a Manual Park Release is available.

263 Follow these steps to use the Manual To Reset The Manual Park Re- Park Release: lease: 1. To prevent the vehicle from rolling 1. Push the latch (at the base of the unintentionally, firmly apply the lever, on the rear side) rearward parking brake. (away from the lever) to unlatch the lever. 2. Remove the console storage bin to access the Manual Park Release lever. 2. Rotate the Manual Park Release Locking Tab lever forward and down, to its original 5. While holding the locking tab in position, until the locking tab snaps the disengaged position, pull the into place to secure the lever. tether strap to rotate the lever up and 3. Pull up gently on the tether strap rearward, until it locks in place in the to confirm that the lever is locked in vertical position. The vehicle is now its stowed position. out of PARK and can be towed. Re- lease the parking brake only when the 4. Tuck the tether strap into the base vehicle is securely connected to a tow of the console. Reinstall the console Console Storage Bin vehicle. storage bin. 3. Using a small screwdriver or simi- TOWING A DISABLED lar tool, fish the tether strap up through the opening in the console VEHICLE base. This section describes procedures for 4. Insert the screwdriver into the slot towing a disabled vehicle using a in the center of the lever, and disen- commercial towing service. gage the lever locking tab by pushing it to the right. Tether Strap

264 Towing Wheels OFF the RWD MODELS AWD MODELS Condition Ground IF Transmission is operable: Flat Tow NONE • Transmission in NEUTRAL NOT ALLOWED • 48 km/h max speed Front •24kmmax distance (5-speed trans) NOT ALLOWED •48kmmax distance (8-speed trans) Wheel Lift • Ignition in ON/RUN position Rear OK • Transmission in NEUTRAL (NOT in PARK) Flatbed ALL BEST METHOD BEST METHOD Proper towing or lifting equipment is If the vehicle's battery is discharged, CAUTION! (Continued) required to prevent damage to your see “Manual Park Release” or “Shift vehicle. Use only tow bars and other Lever Override” in this section for • Do not push or tow this vehicle equipment designed for this purpose, instructions on shifting the transmis- with another vehicle as damage to following equipment manufacturer’s sion out of PARK for towing. the bumper fascia and transmis- instructions. Use of safety chains is sion may result. mandatory. Attach a tow bar or other • The manufacturer does not rec- CAUTION! towing device to main structural ommend towing this vehicle using members of the vehicle, not to bum- • Do not use sling type equipment a tow dolly. Vehicle damage may pers or associated brackets. State and when towing. Damage to the fas- occur. local laws regarding vehicles under cia will occur. tow must be observed. • When securing the vehicle to a The manufacturer recommends tow- flatbed truck, do not attach to the ing your vehicle with all four wheels If you must use the accessories (wip- front or rear suspension compo- OFF the ground using a flatbed. ers, defrosters, etc.) while being nents. Damage to your vehicle may If flatbed equipment is not available, towed, the ignition must be in the result from improper towing. ON/RUN position, not the ACC posi- and the transmission is operable, this tion. (Continued) 265 vehicle may be towed (with rear CAUTION! WITHOUT THE KEY FOB wheels on the ground) under the fol- Special care must be taken when the lowing conditions: Towing this vehicle in violation of the above requirements can cause vehicle is towed with the ignition in • The transmission must be in NEU- severe transmission damage. Dam- the LOCK/OFF position. The only TRAL. age from improper towing is not approved method of towing without • The towing speed must not exceed covered under the New Vehicle the key fob is with a flatbed truck. 48 km/h. Limited Warranty. Proper towing equipment is necessary to prevent damage to the vehicle. • The towing distance must not ex- Vehicles equipped with AWD can also ceed 24 km for 5-speed transmis- be towed with the ignition in the ON/ sion, or 48 km for 8-speed trans- RUN position, the transmission in mission. NEUTRAL (not in PARK!), and the rear wheels OFF the ground with no If the transmission is not operable, or limitation on speed or distance. the vehicle must be towed faster than 48 km/h or farther than 24 km for NOTE: If the key fob is unavailable 5-speed transmission, or 48 km for on a AWD vehicle, it must be towed 8-speed transmission, tow with the with ALL FOUR wheels OFF the rear wheels OFF the ground (on a ground (e.g. on a flatbed truck) . flatbed, or with the rear wheels raised using a wheel lift and the transmission in NEUTRAL).

266 7

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

• ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 3.6L ...... 269 • ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 3.0L DIESEL .....270 • ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II . . .271 • REPLACEMENT PARTS ...... 271 • MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES ...... 271 • ENGINE OIL – GASOLINE ENGINE ...... 272 • ENGINE OIL – DIESEL ENGINE ...... 273 • SYNTHETIC ENGINE OILS ...... 273 • MATERIALS ADDED TO ENGINE OILS ...... 273 • DISPOSING OF USED ENGINE OIL AND FILTERS ...... 273 • ENGINE OIL FILTER ...... 273 • ENGINE AIR CLEANER FILTER ...... 274 • MAINTENANCE-FREE BATTERY ...... 274 • AIR CONDITIONER MAINTENANCE ...... 275 • A/CAIRFILTER ...... 276 • BODY LUBRICATION ...... 276 • WINDSHIELD WIPER BLADES ...... 277 • ADDING WASHER FLUID ...... 277 • INTERVENTION REGENERATION STRATEGY – 3.0L DIESEL ENGINE ...... 278 • EXHAUST SYSTEM ...... 278 267 • COOLING SYSTEM ...... 279 • BRAKE SYSTEM ...... 283 • AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION ...... 284 • ALL WHEEL DRIVE (AWD) (for versions/markets, where provided) ...... 286 • REAR AXLE ...... 286 • APPEARANCE CARE AND PROTECTION FROM CORROSION...... 286 • FUSES...... 289 • POWER DISTRIBUTION CENTER ...... 290 • REAR POWER DISTRIBUTION CENTER .....292 • VEHICLE STORAGE ...... 296 • REPLACEMENT BULBS ...... 296 • BULB REPLACEMENT ...... 297 • HIGH INTENSITY DISCHARGE HEADLAMPS (HID)...... 297 • FRONT TURN SIGNAL LAMPS...... 298 • REAR TURN SIGNAL AND BACKUP LAMPS . .298 • LICENSE LAMP ...... 298 • FLUIDCAPACITIES ...... 299 • FLUIDS, LUBRICANTS AND GENUINE PARTS . .300 • ENGINE ...... 300 • CHASSIS ...... 301 • ARRANGEMENTS FOR DEALING WITH THE VEHICLE AT THE END OF ITS LIFE ...... 302

268 ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 3.6L

1 — Power Distribution Center (Fuses) 5 — Air Cleaner Filter 2 — Engine Oil Dipstick 6 — Engine Oil Fill 3 — Brake Fluid Reservoir Access Cover 7 — Remote Jump Start (Positive Battery Post) 4 — Engine Coolant Reservoir 8 — Washer Fluid Reservoir

269 ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 3.0L DIESEL

1 — Power Distribution Center (Fuses) 5 — Engine Air Cleaner Filter 2 — Engine Oil Fill 6 — Engine Oil Dipstick 3 — Brake Fluid Reservoir 7 — Washer Fluid Reservoir 4 — Engine Coolant Reservoir

270 ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC CAUTION! MAINTENANCE SYSTEM — OBD II • Prolonged driving with the MIL PROCEDURES Your vehicle is equipped with a soon could cause further damage to The pages that follow contain the re- phisticated onboard diagnostic sys- the emissions control system. It quired maintenance services deter- tem called OBD II. This system moni- could also affect fuel economy mined by the engineers who designed tors the performance of the emissions, and driveability. The vehicle your vehicle. engine, and automatic transmission must be serviced before any emis- Besides those maintenance items control systems. When these systems sions tests can be performed. specified in the fixed maintenance are operating properly, your vehicle • If the MIL is flashing while the schedule, there are other components will provide excellent performance engine is running, severe catalytic which may require servicing or re- and fuel economy, as well as engine converter damage and power loss placement in the future. emissions well within current govern- will soon occur. Immediate ser- ment regulations. vice is required. CAUTION! If any of these systems require service, the OBD II system will turn on the REPLACEMENT PARTS • Failure to properly maintain your “Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL).” Use of genuine parts for normal/ vehicle or perform repairs and It will also store diagnostic codes and scheduled maintenance and repairs is service when necessary could re- other information to assist your ser- highly recommended to ensure the de- sult in more costly repairs, dam- vice technician in making repairs. Al- signed performance. Damage or fail- age to other components or nega- though your vehicle will usually be ures caused by the use of parts which tively impact vehicle drivable and not need towing, see are not quality-equivalent to genuine performance. Immediately have your authorized dealer for service as parts for maintenance and repairs will potential malfunctions examined soon as possible. not be covered by the manufacturer’s by an authorized dealership or warranty. qualified repair center. (Continued)

271 CAUTION! (Continued) ENGINE OIL – GASOLINE CAUTION! ENGINE • Car maintenance should be done Car maintenance should be done at at a LANCIA Dealership. For Checking Oil Level a LANCIA Dealership. For routine and minor maintenance operations routine and minor maintenance To assure proper lubrication of your you wish to carry out yourself, we operations you wish to carry out vehicle's engine, the engine oil must do recommend you have the proper yourself, we do recommend you be maintained at the correct level. equipment, genuine LANCIA spare have the proper equipment, The best time to check the engine oil parts and the necessary fluids; do genuine LANCIA spare parts and level is about five minutes after a fully not however carry out these opera- the necessary fluids; do not how- warmed up engine is shut off. ever carry out these operations if tions if you have no experience. you have no experience. Checking the oil while the vehicle is Change Engine Oil • Your vehicle has been built with on level ground will improve the ac- improved fluids that protect the curacy of the oil level readings. Main- Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” performance and durability of tain the oil level in the SAFE level for the proper maintenance intervals. your vehicle and also allow ex- range. Adding 0.95 Liter of oil when Engine Oil Selection – 3.6L tended maintenance intervals. Do the level is at the bottom of the SAFE Engine not use chemical flushes in these range will result in the level being at components as the chemicals can the top of the SAFE range. SAE Grade 5W-20 SELENIA K damage your engine, transmis- POWER fully synthetic engine oil that sion, power steering or air condi- CAUTION! meets FIAT Qualification 9.55535- tioning. Such damage is not cov- CR1 API SN, ILSAC GF-5 or equiva- ered by the New Vehicle Limited Overfilling or underfilling the lent. crankcase will cause aeration or Warranty. If a flush is needed be- The engine oil filler cap also shows the cause of component malfunction, loss of oil pressure. This could damage your engine. recommended engine oil viscosity for use only the specified fluid for the your vehicle. For information on en- flushing procedure. gine oil filler cap location, refer to

272 “Engine Compartment” in “Main- SAE Grade 5W-30 SELENIA MUL- DISPOSING OF USED taining Your Vehicle” for further in- TIPOWER C3 fully synthetic engine ENGINE OIL AND FILTERS formation. oil that meets FIAT Qualification 9.55535-S3 API SM/CF, ACEA C3 or Care should be taken in disposing of NOTE: SAE Grade 5W-30 SELE- equivalent. used engine oil and oil filters from NIA K POWER fully synthetic en- your vehicle. Used oil and oil filters, gine oil that meets FIAT Qualifica- The engine oil filler cap also shows the indiscriminately discarded, can pres- tion 9.55535-CR1 API SN, ILSAC recommended engine oil viscosity for ent a problem to the environment. GF-5 may be used when SAE your engine. For information on en- Contact your local authorized dealer, 5W-20 engine oil meeting Fiat gine oil filler cap location, refer to service station, or governmental 9.55535-CR1 is not available. “Engine Compartment” in “Main- agency for advice on how and where taining Your Vehicle” for further in- used oil and oil filters can be safely ENGINE OIL – DIESEL formation. ENGINE discarded in your area. SYNTHETIC ENGINE OILS ENGINE OIL FILTER Engine Oil Selection – 3.0L Engine You may use synthetic engine oils pro- The engine oil filter should be re- vided the recommended oil quality placed with a new filter at every oil requirements are met, and the recom- change. CAUTION! mended maintenance intervals for oil Car maintenance should be done at and filter changes are followed. Engine Oil Filter Selection a LANCIA Dealership. For routine MATERIALS ADDED TO The manufacturer's engines have a and minor maintenance operations full-flow type disposable oil filter. Use you wish to carry out yourself, we ENGINE OILS a filter of this type for replacement. do recommend you have the proper Do not add supplemental materials, The quality of replacement filters var- equipment, genuine LANCIA spare other than leak detection dyes, to the ies considerably. Only high-quality parts and the necessary fluids; do engine oil. Engine oil is an engineered filters should be used to assure most not however carry out these opera- product, and its performance may be efficient service. LANCIA engine oil tions if you have no experience. impaired by supplemental additives. filters are high-quality oil filters and are recommended.

273 ENGINE AIR CLEANER LANCIA engine air cleaner filters are WARNING! FILTER a high quality filter and are recommended. • Battery fluid is a corrosive acid Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” solution and can burn or even for the proper maintenance intervals. MAINTENANCE-FREE blind you. Do not allow battery BATTERY fluid to contact your eyes, skin, or clothing. Do not lean over a bat- WARNING! The top of the maintenance-free battery when attaching clamps. If tery is permanently sealed. You will The air induction system (air acid splashes in eyes or on skin, never have to add water, nor is peri- cleaner, hoses, etc.) can provide a flush the area immediately with odic maintenance required. measure of protection in the case of large amounts of water. engine backfire. Do not remove the NOTE: The battery is stored un- • Battery gas is flammable and ex- air induction system (air cleaner, der an access cover in the trunk. plosive. Keep flame or sparks hoses, etc.) unless such removal is Remote battery terminals are lo- away from the battery. Do not use necessary for repair or mainte- cated in the engine compartment a booster battery or any other nance. Make sure that no one is for jump-starting. booster source with an output near the engine compartment be- greater than 12 Volts. Do not al- fore starting the vehicle with the air low cable clamps to touch each induction system (air cleaner, other. hoses, etc.) removed. Failure to do • Battery posts, terminals, and re- so can result in serious personal lated accessories contain lead and injury. lead compounds. Wash hands af- Engine Air Cleaner Filter ter handling. Selection • The battery in this vehicle has a Battery Location vent hose that should not be dis- The quality of replacement engine air connected and should only be re- cleaner filters varies considerably. placed with a battery of the same Only high quality filters should be type (vented). used to assure most efficient service.

274 condenser fins and a performance CAUTION! WARNING! (Continued) test. Drive belt tension should also be • It is essential when replacing the checked at this time. • The air conditioning system con- cables on the battery that the tains refrigerant under high pres- positive cable is attached to the sure. To avoid risk of personal positive post and the negative CAUTION! injury or damage to the system, cable is attached to the negative Do not use chemical flushes in your adding refrigerant or any repair post. Battery posts are marked air conditioning system as the requiring lines to be disconnected positive (+) and negative (-) and chemicals can damage your air should be done by an experienced are identified on the battery case. conditioning components. Such technician. Cable clamps should be tight on damage is not covered by the New the terminal posts and free of cor- Vehicle Limited Warranty. Refrigerant Recovery And rosion. Recycling • If a “fast charger” is used while R-134a Air Conditioning Refrigerant the battery is in the vehicle, dis- WARNING! is a hydrofluorocarbon (HFC) that is connect both vehicle battery • Use only refrigerants and com- endorsed by the Environmental Pro- cables before connecting the pressor lubricants approved by tection Agency and is an ozone-saving charger to the battery. Do not use the manufacturer for your air product. However, the manufacturer a “fast charger” to provide start- conditioning system. Some unap- recommends that air conditioning ing voltage. proved refrigerants are flam- service be performed by authorized mable and can explode, injuring dealer or other service facilities using AIR CONDITIONER you. Other unapproved refriger- recovery and recycling equipment. MAINTENANCE ants or lubricants can cause the NOTE: Use only manufacturer system to fail, requiring costly re- For best possible performance, your approved A/C system PAG com- pairs. air conditioner should be checked and pressor oil and refrigerants. serviced by an authorized dealer at (Continued) the start of each warm season. This service should include cleaning of the

275 A/C AIR FILTER

CAUTION! Car maintenance should be done at a LANCIA Dealership. For routine and minor maintenance operations you wish to carry out yourself, we do recommend you have the proper Access Door A/C Air Filter equipment, genuine LANCIA spare 2. Unsnap both ends and lift the filter 5. Close the filter access cover. parts and the necessary fluids; do access cover. not however carry out these opera- Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” tions if you have no experience. for the proper maintenance intervals. The filter is located in the fresh air BODY LUBRICATION inlet under the hood, behind a remov- Locks and all body pivot points, in- able panel in the cowl on the passen- cluding such items as seat tracks, door ger side of the vehicle, next to the hinge pivot points and rollers, liftgate, windshield wipers. When installing a tailgate, sliding doors and hood new filter, ensure its proper orienta- hinges, should be lubricated periodi- tion. Filter Access Cover cally with a lithium based grease to 3. Remove the used filter. 1. Remove the access door in the cowl assure quiet, easy operation and to screen by pressing the retaining clips. 4. Install the new filter with arrows protect against rust and wear. Prior to pointing in the direction of airflow, the application of any lubricant, the which is toward the rear of the vehicle parts concerned should be wiped (text and arrows on the filter will in- clean to remove dust and grit; after dicate this). lubricating excess oil and grease should be removed. Particular attention should also be given to hood latching components to ensure proper 276 function. When performing other un- mild nonabrasive cleaner. This will the front of the engine compartment. derhood services, the hood latch, re- remove accumulations of salt or road Be sure to check the fluid level in the lease mechanism and safety catch film. reservoir at regular intervals. Fill the reservoir with windshield washer sol- should be cleaned and lubricated. Operation of the wipers on dry glass vent (not radiator antifreeze) and op- The external lock cylinders should be for long periods may cause deteriora- erate the system for a few seconds to lubricated twice a year, preferably in tion of the wiper blades. Always use flush out the residual water. the Fall and Spring. Apply a small washer fluid when using the wipers to amount of a high quality lubricant remove salt or dirt from a dry wind- When refilling the washer fluid reser- directly into the lock cylinder. shield. voir, apply some washer fluid to a cloth or towel and wipe the wiper Avoid using the wiper blades to re- blades clean. This will help blade per- CAUTION! move frost or ice from the windshield. formance. Keep the blade rubber out of contact Car maintenance should be done at with petroleum products such as en- To prevent freeze-up of your wind- a LANCIA Dealership. For routine gine oil, gasoline, etc. shield washer system in cold weather, and minor maintenance operations select a solution or mixture that meets you wish to carry out yourself, we NOTE: Life expectancy of wiper or exceeds the temperature range of do recommend you have the proper blades varies depending on geo- your climate. This rating information equipment, genuine LANCIA spare graphical area and frequency of can be found on most washer fluid parts and the necessary fluids; do use. Poor performance of blades containers. not however carry out these opera- may be present with chattering, tions if you have no experience. marks, water lines or wet spots. If The fluid reservoir will hold nearly 4 any of these conditions are pres- Liters of washer fluid when the mes- WINDSHIELD WIPER ent, clean the wiper blades or re- sage “Low Washer Fluid” appears in BLADES place as necessary. the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC). Clean the rubber edges of the wiper ADDING WASHER FLUID blades and the windshield periodically with a sponge or soft cloth and a The windshield washer and the headlight washer share the same fluid reservoir. The fluid reservoir is located in

277 WARNING! The engine and exhaust after- into the passenger compartment. In treatment system work together to addition, have the exhaust system in- Commercially available windshield meet the Emission standards. The spected each time the vehicle is raised washer solvents are flammable. system manages engine combustion to for lubrication or oil change. Replace They could ignite and burn you. allow the exhaust system’s catalyst to as required. Care must be exercised when filling trap and burn Particulate Matter or working around the washer solu- (PM) pollutants with no input or in- WARNING! tion. teraction on your part. Exhaust gases can injure or kill. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Informa- They contain carbon monoxide tion Center (EVIC)” in “Understand- CAUTION! (CO), which is colorless and odor- ing Your Instrument Cluster” for fur- Car maintenance should be done at less. Breathing it can make you un- ther information. a LANCIA Dealership. For routine conscious and can eventually poi- and minor maintenance operations EXHAUST SYSTEM son you. To avoid breathing CO, you wish to carry out yourself, we refer to “Safety Tips/Exhaust Gas” do recommend you have the proper The best protection against carbon in “Things To Know Before Start- equipment, genuine LANCIA spare monoxide entry into the vehicle body ing Your Vehicle” for further infor- parts and the necessary fluids; do is a properly maintained engine ex- mation. not however carry out these opera- haust system. tions if you have no experience. Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the exhaust system, when CAUTION! INTERVENTION exhaust fumes can be detected inside The catalytic converter requires the REGENERATION the vehicle, or when the underside or use of unleaded fuel only. Leaded STRATEGY – 3.0L DIESEL rear of the vehicle is damaged, have a gasoline will destroy the effective- ENGINE competent mechanic inspect the com- ness of the catalyst as an emissions plete exhaust system and adjacent control device and may seriously This vehicle is equipped with a state- body areas for broken, damaged, de- reduce engine performance and of-the-art engine and exhaust system teriorated, or mispositioned parts. cause serious damage to the engine. containing a diesel particulate filter. Open seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep 278 Under normal operating conditions, WARNING! • Do not idle the engine with any the catalytic converter will not require spark plug wires disconnected or maintenance. However, it is impor- A hot exhaust system can start a fire removed, such as when diagnostic tant to keep the engine properly tuned if you park over materials that can testing, or for prolonged periods to assure proper catalyst operation burn. Such materials might be during very rough idling or mal- and prevent possible catalyst damage. grass or leaves coming into contact functioning operating conditions. with your exhaust system. Do not park or operate your vehicle in ar- COOLING SYSTEM CAUTION! eas where your exhaust system can Damage to the catalytic converter contact anything that can burn. WARNING! can result if your vehicle is not kept in proper operating condition. In In unusual situations involving • When working near the radiator the event of engine malfunction, grossly malfunctioning engine opera- cooling fan, disconnect the fan particularly involving engine mis- tion, a scorching odor may indicate motor lead or turn the ignition fire or other apparent loss of perfor- severe and abnormal catalyst over- switch to the LOCK position. The mance, have your vehicle serviced heating. If this should occur, safely fan is temperature controlled and promptly. Continued operation of bring the vehicle to a complete stop, can start at anytime the ignition your vehicle with a severe malfunc- shut the engine OFF, and allow the switch is in the ON position. tion could cause the converter to vehicle to cool. Thereafter, obtain ser- • You or others can be badly overheat, resulting in possible dam- vice, including a tune-up to manufac- burned by hot engine coolant age to the converter and the vehicle. turer's specifications immediately. (antifreeze) or steam from your To minimize the possibility of catalyst radiator. If you see or hear steam NOTE: Intentional tampering damage: coming from under the hood, do with emissions control systems can not open the hood until the radia- result in civil penalties being as- • Do not shut off the engine or inter- tor has had time to cool. Never try sessed against you. rupt the ignition when the trans- to open a cooling system pressure mission is in gear and the vehicle is cap when the radiator is hot. in motion. • Do not try to start the engine by pushing or towing the vehicle.

279 CAUTION! tears, cuts, and tightness of the con- Selection Of Coolant nection at the bottle and radiator. In- Use only the manufacturer's recom- Car maintenance should be done at spect the entire system for leaks. a LANCIA Dealership. For routine mended engine coolant (antifreeze). and minor maintenance operations With the engine at normal operating Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and you wish to carry out yourself, we temperature (but not running), check Genuine Parts” in “Maintaining Your do recommend you have the proper the cooling system pressure cap for Vehicle” for further information. equipment, genuine LANCIA spare proper vacuum sealing by draining a parts and the necessary fluids; do small amount of engine coolant (anti- CAUTION! not however carry out these opera- freeze) from the radiator drain cock. • Mixing of engine coolant (anti- tions if you have no experience. If the cap is sealing properly, the engine coolant (antifreeze) will begin to freeze) other than specified en- Coolant Checks drain from the coolant recovery gine coolant (antifreeze), may re- bottle. DO NOT REMOVE THE sult in engine damage and may Check engine coolant (antifreeze) decrease corrosion protection. If a protection every 12 months (before COOLANT PRESSURE CAP WHEN THE COOLING SYSTEM IS HOT. non-specified engine coolant (an- the onset of freezing weather, where tifreeze) is introduced into the applicable). If the engine coolant (an- Cooling System – Drain, Flush, cooling system in an emergency, it tifreeze) is dirty or rusty in appear- And Refill should be replaced with the speci- ance, the system should be drained, If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is fied engine coolant (antifreeze) as flushed, and refilled with fresh cool- dirty or contains a considerable soon as possible. ant. Check the front of the A/C con- amount of sediment, clean and flush denser for any accumulation of bugs, (Continued) with a reliable cooling system cleaner. leaves, etc. If dirty, clean by gently Follow with a thorough rinsing to re- spraying water from a garden hose move all deposits and chemicals. vertically down the face of the con- Properly dispose of old engine coolant denser. (antifreeze). Check the coolant recovery bottle Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” tubing for brittle rubber, cracking, for the proper maintenance intervals.

280 When adding engine coolant (anti- coolant (antifreeze) will return to the CAUTION! (Continued) freeze): radiator from the coolant recovery • Do not use plain water alone or bottle. alcohol-based engine coolant Use only high purity water such as (antifreeze) products. Do not use distilled or deionized water when The cap should be inspected and additional rust inhibitors or anti- mixing the water/engine coolant (an- cleaned if there is any accumulation rust products, as they may not be tifreeze) solution. The use of lower of foreign material on the sealing sur- compatible with the radiator en- quality water will reduce the amount faces. gine coolant (antifreeze) and may of corrosion protection in the engine cooling system. plug the radiator. WARNING! • This vehicle has not been de- Please note that it is the owner's re- • The warning words “DO NOT signed for use with Propylene sponsibility to maintain the proper OPEN HOT” on the cooling sys- Glycol based engine coolant (an- level of protection against freezing ac- tem pressure cap are a safety pre- tifreeze). Use of Propylene Glycol cording to the temperatures occurring caution. Never add engine cool- based engine coolant (antifreeze) in the area where the vehicle is oper- ant (antifreeze) when the engine is not recommended. ated. is overheated. Do not loosen or Adding Coolant NOTE: Mixing engine coolant remove the cap to cool an over- (antifreeze) types will decrease the heated engine. Heat causes pres- Your vehicle has been built with an life of the engine coolant (anti- sure to build up in the cooling improved engine coolant (antifreeze) freeze) and will require more fre- system. To prevent scalding or in- that allows extended maintenance in- quent engine coolant (antifreeze) jury, do not remove the pressure tervals. This engine coolant (anti- changes. cap while the system is hot or freeze) can be used up to ten years or under pressure. Cooling System Pressure Cap 240 000 km before replacement. To • Do not use a pressure cap other prevent reducing this extended main- The cap must be fully tightened to than the one specified for your tenance period, it is important that prevent loss of engine coolant (anti- vehicle. Personal injury or engine you use the same engine coolant (an- freeze), and to ensure that engine damage may result. tifreeze) throughout the life of your vehicle.

281 Disposal Of Used Engine Coolant freeze point or replacing engine cool- • Do not overfill the coolant recovery Used ethylene glycol-based engine ant (antifreeze). Advise your service bottle. attendant of this. As long as the en- coolant (antifreeze) is a regulated • Check engine coolant (antifreeze) gine operating temperature is satis- substance requiring proper disposal. freeze point in the radiator and in factory, the coolant bottle need only Check with your local authorities to the coolant recovery bottle. If en- be checked once a month. determine the disposal rules for your gine coolant (antifreeze) needs to community. To prevent ingestion by When additional engine coolant (an- be added, contents of coolant re- animals or children, do not store eth- tifreeze) is needed to maintain the covery bottle must also be pro- ylene glycol-based engine coolant proper level, it should be added to the tected against freezing. (antifreeze) in open containers or al- coolant bottle. Do not overfill. • If frequent engine coolant (anti- low it to remain in puddles on the Points To Remember freeze) additions are required, or if ground. If ingested by a child or pet, the level in the coolant recovery seek emergency assistance immedi- NOTE: When the vehicle is bottle does not drop when the en- ately. Clean up any ground spills im- stopped after a few kilometers of gine cools, the cooling system mediately. operation, you may observe vapor should be pressure tested for leaks. Coolant Level coming from the front of the engine compartment. This is normally a • Maintain engine coolant (anti- The coolant bottle provides a quick result of moisture from rain, or freeze) concentration at 50% en- visual method for determining that high humidity accumulating on gine coolant (antifreeze) (mini- the coolant level is adequate. With the the radiator and being vaporized mum) and distilled water for engine OFF and cold, the level of the when the thermostat opens, allow- proper corrosion protection of your coolant in the bottle should be being hot engine coolant (antifreeze) engine, which contains aluminum tween the ranges indicated on the to enter the radiator. components. bottle. If an examination of your engine com- • Make sure that the radiator and The radiator normally remains compartment shows no evidence of radia- coolant recovery bottle overflow pletely full, so there is no need to tor or hose leaks, the vehicle may be hoses are not kinked or obstructed. remove the radiator cap unless check- safely driven. The vapor will soon dis- ing for engine coolant (antifreeze) sipate.

282 • Keep the front of the radiator clean. WARNING! Master Cylinder – Brake Fluid If your vehicle is equipped with air Level Check Riding the brakes can lead to brake conditioning, keep the front of the Check the fluid level in the master condenser clean. failure and possibly an accident. Driving with your foot resting or cylinder immediately if the brake sys- • Do not change the thermostat for riding on the brake pedal can result tem warning light indicates system Summer or Winter operation. If re- in abnormally high brake tempera- failure. placement is ever necessary, install tures, excessive lining wear, and Check the fluid level in the master ONLY the correct type thermostat. possible brake damage. You would cylinder when performing underhood Other designs may result in unsat- not have your full braking capacity services. isfactory engine coolant (anti- in an emergency. freeze) performance, poor gas mile- Clean the top of the master cylinder age, and increased emissions. area before removing the cap. Add fluid to bring the level up to the BRAKE SYSTEM CAUTION! Car maintenance should be done at “MAX” mark on the side of the master In order to assure brake system per- a LANCIA Dealership. For routine cylinder reservoir. formance, all brake system compo- and minor maintenance operations Add enough fluid to bring the level up nents should be inspected periodi- you wish to carry out yourself, we to the requirements described on the cally. Refer to the “Maintenance do recommend you have the proper brake fluid reservoir. With disc Schedule” for the proper maintenance equipment, genuine LANCIA spare brakes, fluid level can be expected to intervals. parts and the necessary fluids; do fall as the brake pads wear. However, not however carry out these opera- low fluid level may be caused by a tions if you have no experience. leak and a checkup may be needed. Use only manufacturer's recommended brake fluid. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.

283 WARNING! WARNING! (Continued) WARNING! (Continued) • Use only manufacturer's recom- • To avoid contamination from for- • Do not allow petroleum based mended brake fluid. Refer to eign matter or moisture, use only fluid to contaminate the brake “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine new brake fluid or fluid that has fluid. Brake seal components Parts” in “Maintaining Your Ve- been in a tightly closed container. could be damaged, causing par- hicle” for further information. Keep the master cylinder reser- tial or complete brake failure. Using the wrong type of brake voir cap secured at all times. This could result in an accident. fluid can severely damage your Brake fluid in a open container brake system and/or impair its absorbs moisture from the air re- AUTOMATIC performance. The proper type of sulting in a lower boiling point. TRANSMISSION brake fluid for your vehicle is also This may cause it to boil unex- Selection Of Lubricant identified on the original factory pectedly during hard or pro- installed hydraulic master cylin- longed braking, resulting in sud- It is important to use the proper trans- der reservoir. den brake failure. This could mission fluid to ensure optimum result in a accident. transmission performance and life. (Continued) • Overfilling the brake fluid reser- Use only the manufacturer’s specified voir can result in spilling brake transmission fluid. Refer to “Fluids, fluid on hot engine parts, causing Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in the brake fluid to catch fire. this section for fluid specifications. It Brake fluid can also damage is important to maintain the trans- painted and vinyl surfaces, care mission fluid at the correct level using should be taken to avoid its con- the recommended fluid. No chemical tact with these surfaces. flushes should be used in any transmission; only the approved lubricant (Continued) should be used.

284 CAUTION! CAUTION! CAUTION! Using a transmission fluid other Do not use chemical flushes in your If a transmission fluid leak occurs, than the manufacturer’s recom- transmission as the chemicals can visit your authorized dealer imme- mended fluid may cause deteriora- damage your transmission compo- diately. Severe transmission dam- tion in transmission shift quality nents. Such damage is not covered age may occur. Your authorized and/or torque converter shudder, by the New Vehicle Limited War- dealer has the proper tools to adjust and will require more frequent fluid ranty. the fluid level accurately. and filter changes. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in Fluid Level Check Fluid And Filter Changes – 5-Speed Transmission this section for fluid specifications. The fluid level is preset at the factory and does not require adjustment un- Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” Special Additives der normal operating conditions. for the proper maintenance intervals. The manufacturer strongly recom- Routine fluid level checks are not re- In addition, change the fluid and filter mends against using any special addi- quired, therefore the transmission has if the fluid becomes contaminated tives in the transmission. no dipstick. Your authorized dealer (with water, etc.) or if the transmis- can check your transmission fluid Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF) sion is disassembled for any reason. level using special service tools. is an engineered product and its performance may be impaired by supple- If you notice fluid leakage or trans- CAUTION! mental additives. Therefore, do not mission malfunction, visit your au- add any fluid additives to the trans- thorized dealer immediately to have Car maintenance should be done at mission. The only exception to this the transmission fluid level checked. a LANCIA Dealership. For routine policy is the use of special dyes for Operating the vehicle with an im- and minor maintenance operations diagnosing fluid leaks. Avoid using proper fluid level can cause severe you wish to carry out yourself, we transmission sealers as they may ad- transmission damage. do recommend you have the proper versely affect seals. equipment, genuine LANCIA spare parts and the necessary fluids; do not however carry out these operations if you have no experience.

285 Fluid And Filter Changes – The exterior surface of these compo- fluid level. Refer to “Fluids, Lubri- 8-Speed Transmission nents should be inspected for evi- cants, and Genuine Parts” in “Main- dence of fluid leaks. Confirmed leaks taining Your Vehicle” for further in- Under normal operating conditions, should be repaired as soon as possible. formation. the fluid installed at the factory will provide satisfactory lubrication for The transfer case fluid fill/inspection Fluid Level Check the life of the vehicle. Routine fluid plug is located in the middle of the Check the fluid level by removing the and filter changes are not required. rear housing. To inspect the transfer fill plug on the axle. The fluid level However, change the fluid and filter if case fluid level, remove the fill/ should be at the bottom of the fill the fluid becomes contaminated (with inspection plug. The fluid level should hole. Add fluid, if necessary, to main- water, etc.), or if the transmission is be even with the bottom of the hole. tain the proper level. Refer to “Fluids, disassembled for any reason. Use this plug to add fluid as required. Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in The front differential fill plug is lo- “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for fur- CAUTION! cated on the outer cover near the half- ther information. shaft attachment. To inspect the dif- Car maintenance should be done at Change Axle Fluid ferential fluid level, remove the fill a LANCIA Dealership. For routine plug. The fluid level should be even Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” and minor maintenance operations with or slightly below the bottom of for the proper maintenance intervals. you wish to carry out yourself, we the hole. do recommend you have the proper APPEARANCE CARE AND equipment, genuine LANCIA spare REAR AXLE PROTECTION FROM parts and the necessary fluids; do CORROSION not however carry out these opera- For normal service, periodic fluid tions if you have no experience. level checks are not required. When Protection Of Body And Paint the vehicle is serviced for other rea- From Corrosion ALL WHEEL DRIVE (AWD) sons the exterior surfaces of the axle (for versions/markets, assembly should be inspected. If gear Vehicle body care requirements vary oil leakage is suspected inspect the according to geographic locations and where provided) usage. Chemicals that are sprayed on The all wheel drive system consists of trees and road surfaces during other a transfer case and front differential. seasons, are highly corrosive to the 286 metal in your vehicle. Outside park- Washing • It is important that the drain holes ing, which exposes your vehicle to air- in the lower edges of the doors, • Wash your vehicle regularly. Al- borne contaminants, road surfaces on rocker panels, and cargo area be ways wash your vehicle in the shade which the vehicle is operated, extreme kept clear and open. using a mild car wash soap, and hot or cold weather and other extreme rinse the panels completely with • If you detect any stone chips or conditions will have an adverse effect clear water. scratches in the paint, touch them on paint, metal trim, and underbody up immediately. The cost of such protection. • Use a high quality cleaner wax to repairs is considered the responsi- protect your paint finish. Take care The following maintenance recom- bility of the owner. never to scratch the paint. mendations will enable you to obtain • If your vehicle is damaged due to an maximum benefit from the corrosion • Avoid using abrasive compounds and accident or similar cause, which de- resistance built into your vehicle. power buffing that may diminish the stroys the paint and protective gloss or thin out the paint finish. What Causes Corrosion? coating, have your vehicle repaired as soon as possible. The cost of such Corrosion is the result of deterioration CAUTION! repairs is considered the responsi- or removal of paint and protective bility of the owner. coatings from your vehicle. Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning materials such as steel wool or • If you carry special cargo such as The most common causes are: scouring powder that will scratch chemicals, fertilizers, de-icer salt, • Road salt, dirt and moisture accu- metal and painted surfaces. etc., be sure that such materials are mulation. well packaged and sealed. Special Care • Stone and gravel impact. • If a lot of driving is done on gravel • If you drive on salted or dusty roads roads, consider mud or stone • Insects, tree sap and tar. or if you drive near the ocean, hose shields behind each wheel. • Salt in the air near seacoast off the undercarriage at least once a • Use Touch Up Paint or equivalent localities. month. on scratches as soon as possible. • Atmospheric fallout/industrial pollutants.

287 Your authorized dealer has touch • For tough stains, apply a mild soap WARNING! up paint to match the color of your solution to a clean, damp cloth and vehicle. remove the stain. Use a fresh, damp Do not use volatile solvents for towel to remove soap residue. cleaning purposes. Many are poten- Wheel And Wheel Trim Care tially flammable, and if used in All wheels and wheel trim, especially • Do not use any harsh solvents or closed areas they may cause respi- aluminum and chrome-plated wheels any other form of protectants on ratory harm. should be cleaned regularly with a Stain Repel products. Cleaning Headlights mild soap and water to prevent corro- Interior Care sion. To remove heavy soil and/or ex- Your vehicle has plastic headlights Interior trim should be cleaned start- cessive brake dust, use a nonabrasive, that are lighter and less susceptible to ing with a damp cloth. Do not use non-acidic cleaner. Do not use scour- stone breakage than glass headlights. harsh cleaners. ing pads, steel wool, a bristle brush, or Plastic is not as scratch resistant as metal polishes. Do not use oven Your leather upholstery can be best glass and therefore different lens cleaner. Avoid automatic car washes preserved by regular cleaning with a cleaning procedures must be fol- that use acidic solutions or harsh damp soft cloth. Small particles of lowed. brushes that may damage the wheels’ dirt can act as an abrasive and dam- protective finish. age the leather upholstery and should To minimize the possibility of scratch- be removed promptly with a damp ing the lenses and reducing light out- Stain Repel Fabric Cleaning cloth. Stubborn soils can be removed put, avoid wiping with a dry cloth. To Procedure (for versions/markets, easily with a soft cloth and appropri- remove road dirt, wash with a mild where provided) ate products. Care should be taken to soap solution followed by rinsing. Stain Repel seats may be cleaned in avoid soaking your leather upholstery Do not use abrasive cleaning compo- the following manner: with any liquid. Please do not use nents, solvents, steel wool or other polishes, oils, cleaning fluids, sol- • Remove as much of the stain as aggressive material to clean the vents, detergents, or ammonia-based possible by blotting with a clean, lenses. dry towel. cleaners to clean your leather upholstery. Application of a leather condi- • Blot any remaining stain with a tioner is not required to maintain the clean, damp towel. original condition. 288 Glass Surfaces Seat Belt Maintenance FUSES All glass surfaces should be cleaned Do not bleach, dye, or clean the belts on a regular basis with any commer- with chemical solvents or abrasive WARNING! cial household-type glass cleaner. cleaners. This will weaken the fabric. Never use an abrasive type cleaner. Sun damage can also weaken the fab- • When replacing a blown fuse, al- Use caution when cleaning the inside ric. ways use an appropriate replace- rear window equipped with an elec- ment fuse with the same amp rat- If the belts need cleaning, use a mild tric defroster. Do not use scrapers or ing as the original fuse. Never soap solution, or lukewarm water. Do other sharp instruments that may replace a fuse with another fuse of not remove the belts from the vehicle scratch the elements. higher amp rating. Never replace to wash them. a blown fuse with metal wires or When cleaning the rear view mirror, Replace the belts if they appear frayed any other material. Failure to use spray cleaner on the towel or rag that or worn or if the buckles do not work proper fuses may result in serious you are using. Do not spray cleaner properly. personal injury, fire and/or prop- directly on the mirror. erty damage. Cleaning The Center Console Cleaning Plastic Instrument • Before replacing a fuse, make Cupholders Cluster Lenses sure that the ignition is off and Clean with a damp cloth or towel us- that all the other services are The lenses in front of the instruments ing a mild detergent with the cup- switched off and/or disengaged. in this vehicle are molded in clear holder in the center console. • If the replaced fuse blows again, plastic. When cleaning the lenses, contact an authorized dealer. care must be taken to avoid scratch- NOTE: The cupholder cannot be • If a general protection fuse for ing the plastic. removed. safety systems (air bag system, 1. Clean with a wet soft rag. A mild braking system), power unit sys- soap solution may be used, but do not tems (engine system, gearbox sys- use high alcohol content or abrasive tem) or steering system blows, cleaners. If soap is used, wipe clean contact an authorized dealer. with a clean damp rag. 2. Dry with a soft cloth. 289 POWER DISTRIBUTION CAUTION! CAUTION! (Continued) CENTER • When installing the integrated • When replacing a blown fuse, it is The Integrated Power Module is lo- power module cover, it is impor- important to use only a fuse hav- cated in the engine compartment. tant to ensure the cover is prop- ing the correct amperage rating. This module contains fuses and re- erly positioned and fully latched. The use of a fuse with a rating lays. Failure to do so may allow water other than indicated may result in to get into the integrated power a dangerous electrical system module and possibly result in an overload. If a properly rated fuse electrical system failure. continues to blow, it indicates a problem in the circuit that must (Continued) be corrected.

Integrated Power Module Cavity Cartridge Fuse Mini-Fuse Description 1 — — Spare 2 40 Amp Green — Radiator Fan #1 3 50 Amp Red — Power Steering #1 4 30 Amp Pink — Starter 5 40 Amp Green — Anti-Lock Brakes 6 — 25 Amp Natural Anti-Lock Brakes 7 50 Amp Red — Cabin Heater #1 — Diesel Only 8 50 Amp Red — Cabin Heater #2 — Diesel Only 9 — — Spare 10 — 5 Amp Tan Security

290 Cavity Cartridge Fuse Mini-Fuse Description 11 — 20 Amp Yellow Horns 12 — 10 Amp Red Air Conditioning Clutch 13 — — Spare 14 — — Spare 15 — — Spare 16 — — Spare 18 50 Amp Red — Radiator Fan #2 19 50 Amp Red — Power Steering #2 20 30 Amp Pink — Wiper Motor 21 30 Amp Pink — Headlamp Washers 22 50 Amp Red — Glow Plug Module — Diesel Only 23 30 Amp Pink — Fuel Pump Feed/Diesel Fuel Heater — Diesel Only 24 50 Amp Red — Cabin Heater #3 — Diesel Only 28 — 25 Amp Natural Fuel Pump 29 — 15 Amp Blue Transmission/Shifter (TCM Module) 30 — — Spare 31 — 25 Amp Natural Engine Module (PCM) 32 — — Spare 33 — — Spare 34 — 25 Amp Natural ASD Feed #1 35 — 20 Amp Yellow ASD Feed #2 36 — 10 Amp Red Anti-Lock Brake Module (ABS/ESP Module) 37 — 10 Amp Red Engine Controller (PCM)/Rad Fan Relay Coils 38 — 10 Amp Red Airbag Module

291 Cavity Cartridge Fuse Mini-Fuse Description 39 — 10 Amp Red Power Steering Module/AC Clutch Relay/Cabin Heater Relay Coils — Diesel Only 48 — 10 Amp Red DTCM/Diesel Scr Module — Diesel Only 49 — 15 Amp Blue ASD Feed #3 50 — — Spare 51 — 20 Amp Yellow Vacuum Pump 52 — — Spare 53 — — Spare

REAR POWER CAUTION! DISTRIBUTION CENTER • When installing the power distri- There is also a power distribution cen- bution center cover, it is impor- ter located in the trunk under the tant to ensure the cover is prop- spare tire access panel. This center erly positioned and fully latched. contains fuses and relays. Failure to do so may allow water to get into the power distribution Rear Power Distribution Center center and possibly result in an electrical system failure.

(Continued)

Opening The Access Panel

292 CAUTION! (Continued) • When replacing a blown fuse, it is important to use only a fuse having the correct amperage rating. The use of a fuse with a rating other than indicated may result in a dangerous electrical system overload. If a properly rated fuse continues to blow, it indicates a problem in the circuit that must be corrected.

Cavity Cartridge Fuse Mini-Fuse Description 2 60 Amp Yellow — Front PDC Feed #1 3 — — Spare 4 60 Amp Yellow — Front PDC Feed #2 5 30 Amp Pink — Sunroof 6 40 Amp Green — Exterior Lighting #1 7 40 Amp Green — Exterior Lighting #2 8 30 Amp Pink — Interior Lighting/Washer Pump 9 30 Amp Pink — Power Locks 10 30 Amp Pink — Driver Door 11 30 Amp Pink — Passenger Door 12 — 20 Amp Yellow Selectable Power Outlet #1 15 40 Amp Green — HVAC Blower

293 Cavity Cartridge Fuse Mini-Fuse Description 16 — — Spare 17 — — Spare 18 — — Spare 19 — — Spare 20 — — Spare 21 — — Spare 22 — 20 Amp Yellow Trailer Park Lamp - If Equipped 23 — 10 Amp Red Fuel Door/Diagnostic Port 24 — 15 Amp Blue Radio Screen 25 — 10 Amp Red Tire Pressure Monitor 26 — 25 Amp Natural Transmission 27 — 25 Amp Natural Amplifier 31 — 25 Amp Natural Power Seats 32 — 15 Amp Blue HVAC Module/Cluster/Steering Wheel Lock 33 — 15 Amp Blue Ignition Switch/Wireless Module 34 — 10 Amp Red Steering Column Module/Clock 35 — 10 Amp Red Battery Sensor 36 — 20 Amp Yellow T/Tow Module Lighting - If Equipped 37 — 15 Amp Blue Radio 38 — 20 Amp Yellow Console Power Outlet 40 — — Spare 41 — — Spare 42 30 Amp Pink — Rear Defrost (EBL Feed) 43 — 25 Amp Natural Rear Heated Seats/Heated Steering Wheel

294 Cavity Cartridge Fuse Mini-Fuse Description 44 — 10 Amp Red Park Assist/Blind Spot/Camera 45 — 15 Amp Blue Cluster/Rearview Mirror/Compass/Humidity Sensor 46 — 10 Amp Red Adaptive Cruise Control 47 — 10 Amp Red Adaptive Front Lighting 48 — 20 Amp Yellow Active Suspension — If Equipped 49 — — Spare 50 — — Spare 51 — 20 Amp Yellow Front Heated Seats 52 — 10 Amp Red Heated Cupholders/Rear Heated Seat 53 — 10 Amp Red HVAC Module/In Car Temperature Sensor 54 — — Spare 55 — — Spare 56 — — Spare 57 — — Spare 58 — 10 Amp Red Airbag Module 59 — — Spare 60 — — Spare 61 — 20 Amp Yellow Trailer Tow (Europe) - If Equipped 62 — — Spare 63 — — Spare 64 — 25 Amp Natural Rear Windows 65 — 10 Amp Red Airbag Module 66 — — Spare 67 — 15 Amp Blue Frt Door Illum/Run Sense

295 Cavity Cartridge Fuse Mini-Fuse Description 68 — 15 Amp Blue Console Power Outlet Illumination/Rear Sunshade 69 — — Spare 70 — — Spare VEHICLE STORAGE NOTE: When the negative cable the possibility of compressor damage is disconnected from the battery, when the system is started again. If you are leaving your vehicle dor- and the trunk lid is completely mant for more than 21 days, you may closed, it is necessary to pull the REPLACEMENT BULBS want to take these steps to protect emergency release lever of the your battery. trunk latching mechanism to open Interior Bulb Number 1. Disconnect the negative cable it again. To access the trunk and Rear Courtesy/Reading from the battery. operate the lever, fold the rear Lamps...... W5W seatbacks. Please refer to “FOLD- ING REAR SEAT” in “UNDER- Rear Compartment (Trunk) STANDING THE FEATURES OF Lamp...... 562 YOUR VEHICLE” and "TRUNK Overhead Console Reading EMERGENCY RELEASE” in Lamps...... 578 “THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE Visor Vanity Lamps ...... 194 STARTING YOUR VEHICLE” for Glove Box Lamp (for versions/ further information. markets, where provided) . . 194 Negative Battery Cable 2. Anytime you store your vehicle, or Door Courtesy ...... 562 keep it out of service (i.e., vacation) for two weeks or more, run the air Shift Indicator conditioning system at idle for about Lamp ...... JKLE14140 five minutes in the fresh air and high Optional Door Map Pocket/Cup- blower setting. This will ensure ad- holder...... LED equate system lubrication to minimize (Serviced at Authorized Dealer)

296 NOTE: For lighted switches, see Rear Tail/Stop/Side Marker HIGH INTENSITY your authorized dealer for re- Lamp...... LED DISCHARGE HEADLAMPS placement instructions. (Serviced at Authorized Dealer) (HID) All of the interior bulbs are glass Rear Turn Signal wedge base or glass cartridge types. Lamp...... WY21W Aluminum base bulbs are not ap- RearFogLamps...... LED CAUTION! proved and should not be used for (Serviced at Authorized Dealer) Where possible, it is advisable to replacement. BackupLamp...... W16W have bulbs changed at a LANCIA Center High Mount Stop Lamp Dealership. Proper operation and Exterior Bulb Number (CHMSL) ...... LED orientation of the external lights are Low Beam/High Beam (Serviced at Authorized Dealer) essential for driving safety and complying with the law. (Bi-XenonHeadlamp).....D3S License ...... W5W (Serviced at Authorized Dealer) The headlamps are a type of high Front Turn Signal BULB REPLACEMENT voltage discharge tube. High voltage Lamp ...... PSY24WSV NOTE: Lens fogging can occur can remain in the circuit even with the FrontParkLamp...... LED under certain atmospheric condi- headlamp switch off and the key re- (Serviced at Authorized Dealer) tions. This will usually clear as at- moved. Because of this, you should Daytime Running Lamp . . . LED mospheric conditions change to not attempt to service a headlamp (Serviced at Authorized Dealer) allow the condensation to change bulb yourself. If a headlamp bulb Front Fog Lamp (for versions/ back into a vapor. Turning the fails, take your vehicle to an au- markets, where provided) . . H11 lamps on will usually accelerate thorized dealer for service. Front Position Lamp .....LED the clearing process. (Serviced at Authorized Dealer) Front Side Marker Lamp . . LED (Serviced at Authorized Dealer) Side Repeater Lamps .....LED (Serviced at Authorized Dealer)

297 WARNING! 3. Squeeze the two tabs on the side of 7. Disconnect the electrical connec- the turn signal bulb socket and pull tor. A transient high voltage occurs at straight out from the lamp. the bulb sockets of HID headlamps 8. Continue removing lamp from ve- when the headlamp switch is 4. Install replacement bulb and con- hicle in order to access the bulb(s). nector assembly straight into the turned ON. It may cause serious 9. Turn the appropriate bulb and lamp until it locks in place. electrical shock or electrocution if socket assembly counterclockwise to not serviced properly. See your au- 5. Reinstall plastic cap to headlamp remove it from the tail lamp assembly. thorized dealer for service. assembly housing. 10. Disconnect the bulb from the NOTE: On vehicles equipped REAR TURN SIGNAL AND socket assembly and install the re- with HID headlamps, when the BACKUP LAMPS placement bulb. headlamps are turned on, there is 11. Reinstall the bulb and socket as- a blue hue to the lights. This di- 1. Open the trunk. sembly into the tail lamp assembly, minishes and becomes more white 2. Remove the trunk trim by remov- and then turn it clockwise. after approximately 10 seconds, as ing the grocery hook (using a T-20 the system charges. torx driver or similar tool), remove 12. Reinstall the tail lamp assembly, the fastener, and pull back the fasteners, electrical connector, and FRONT TURN SIGNAL trunk trim. LAMPS weather strip. 3. Pull back the trunk liner to gain 13. Close the trunk. 1. Open the hood. access to the tail lamp wing nuts. LICENSE LAMP NOTE: Removal of the air 4. Remove the three wing nuts from cleaner filter housing may be nec- 1. Remove the screws securing the the back of the tail lamp assembly. essary prior to replacing bulbs in lamp to the rear fascia. the headlamp assembly on the 5. Pull the tail lamp assembly away 2. Remove the bulb and socket as- driver side of the vehicle. from the vehicle enough to access the sembly. electrical connector. 2. Remove plastic cap from the back of the headlamp housing. 6. Push the electrical connector locking tab to the side. 298 3. Disconnect the bulb from the 4. Reinstall the bulb and socket as- socket assembly and install the re- sembly. placement bulb. 5. Reattach the lamp to the rear fascia, and then install the screws.

1 — License Lamp Bulb 2 — Socket

FLUID CAPACITIES

Metric Fuel (Approximate) All Engines 72 Liters Engine Oil with Filter 3.6 Liter Engine 5.6 Liters 3.0L Diesel Engine 8.4 Liters Cooling System * 3.6 Liter Engine 9.5 Liters 3.0L Diesel Engine 12 Liters * Includes heater and coolant recovery bottle filled to MAX level.

299 FLUIDS, LUBRICANTS AND GENUINE PARTS ENGINE Component Fluids and Lubricants Specs (Genuine Parts) Engine Coolant* Red protective agent with antifreeze action, based on inhibited monoethyl glycol with organic formula. Exceeds CUNA NC 956-16, ASTM D 3306 specifications, FIAT Classification 9.55523 (PARAFLU UP Contractual Technical Ref- erence N° F101.M01. Cooling circuit usage percentage: 50% water 50% PARAFLU UP **) Engine Oil – 3.6L Engine*** SAE Grade 5W-20 fully synthetic engine oil that meets FIAT Classification 9.55535-CR1, API SN, ILSAC GF-5 (SELENIA K POWER, Contractual Tech- nical Reference N° F042.F11) Engine Oil – 3.0L Diesel Engine*** SAE Grade 5W-30 fully synthetic engine oil that meets FIAT Classification 9.55535–S3, API SM/CF, ACEA C3 (SELENIA MULTIPOWER C3, Contrac- tual Technical Reference N° F129.F11) Spark Plugs – 3.6L Engine We recommend you use OEM Original Equipment Spark Plugs (Gap 1.1 mm) Fuel Selection – 3.6L Engine Research Octane Number (RON) of 91 or higher Fuel Selection – 3.0L Diesel Engine This vehicle must only use premium diesel fuel that meets the requirements of EN 590. Biodiesel blends that meet EN 590 may also be used. Fuel Additive – 3.0L Diesel Engine Additive for diesel with antifreeze and protective action for diesel engines. (TUTELA DIESEL ART, Contractual Technical Reference N° F601.L06. To be mixed with the diesel fuel: 25 cc per 10 litres) * Do not top up or mix with fluids *** In the event of an emergency in not guaranteed. Using products with with different specifications. which the original products are not specifications lower than ILSAC GF-5 available, lubricants with at least IL- for gasoline engines or lower than ** For particularly harsh climate con- SAC GF-5 performance for petrol en- ACEA C3 for Diesel engines may ditions, a mixture of 60% PARAFLU gines and ACEA C3 performance for cause engine damage not covered by UP and 40% demineralized water is diesel engines are acceptable. In this warranty. recommended. case optimum engine performance is 300 CHASSIS Component Fluids and Lubricants Specs (Genuine Parts) Automatic Transmission – Totally synthetic lubricant that meets FIAT Classification 9.55550-AV5 (TUTELA 3.6L Engine TRANSMISSION AS8, Contractual Technical Reference N° F139.I11) Automatic Transmission – Totally synthetic lubricant that meets FIAT Classification 9.55550-AV4 (TUTELA 3.0L Diesel Engine TRANSMISSION FORCE4, Contractual Technical Reference N° F108.F11) Brake Master Cylinder Synthetic fluid that meets FIAT Classification 9.55597, FMVSS n° 116, DOT 4, ISO 4925, SAE J-1704 (TUTELA TOP 4, Contractual Technical Reference N° F001.A93) Power Steering Reservoir Totally synthetic lubricant that meets FIAT Classification 9.55550-AG3 (TUTELA GI/R, Contractual Technical Reference N° F428.H04) Front Axle – All Wheel SAE Grade 75W–90 Synthetic gear lubricant that meets FIAT Classification 9.55550- Drive Only DA5, API GL-5, SAE J-2360 (TUTELA TRANSMISSION X-ROAD, Contractual Techni- cal Reference N° F140.F11). Rear Axle SAE Grade 75W–140 Synthetic gear lubricant that meets FIAT Classification 9.55550- DA5, API GL-5, SAE J-2360 (TUTELA TRANSMISSION X-ROAD, Contractual Techni- cal Reference N° F140.F11). Transfer Case – All Wheel Contact a LANCIA Dealership. Drive Only Windshield/Rear Window Mixture of alcohol, water and surfactants that meets FIAT Classification 9.55522, CUNA Washer Fluid NC 956-11 (TUTELA PROFESSIONAL SC35, Contractual Technical Reference N° F201.D02)

301 ARRANGEMENTS FOR In all European Union countries, until You can find further information on DEALING WITH THE 1st January 2007, only vehicles regis- these collection and scrapping centres VEHICLE AT THE END OF tered after 1st July 2002 were col- either from a LANCIA or LANCIA lected free of charge, while since 2007 Commercial Vehicle Dealership or by ITS LIFE collection has been free of charge irre- calling the freephone number LANCIA has been committed for spective of the year of registration as 00800 526242 00 or by going on the many years to safeguarding the envi- long as the vehicle contains its basic LANCIA website. components (in particular, the engine ronment through the constant im- (*) Vehicle for transporting passen- and bodywork) and has no additional provement of its production processes gers with a maximum of nine seats waste. and manufacturing products that are and a total permitted weight of 3.5 t increasingly “eco-compatible”. To hand your vehicle over at the end To give customers the best possible of its life without extra cost, go to one service in terms of respecting environ- of our Dealerships or LANCIA- mental laws and in response to Euro- authorized collection and scrapping pean Directive 2000/53/EC govern- centres. ing vehicles at the end of their life, These centres have been carefully LANCIA is offering its customers the chosen to offer high quality service for opportunity of handing over their ve- the collection, treatment and recy- hicle* at the end of its life without cling of unused vehicles with respect incurring any additional costs. to the environment. The European Directive sets out that when the vehicle is handed over the last keeper or owner should not incur any expenses as a result of it having a zero or negative market value.

302 303 304 8

MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES

• MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE ...... 306 • MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE – GASOLINE ENGINE ...... 306 • MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE – DIESEL ENGINE ...... 309

305 MAINTENANCE The oil change indicator system will • Under no circumstances should SCHEDULE remind you that it is time to take your oil change intervals exceed vehicle in for scheduled maintenance. 12,000 km or 12 months, which- ever comes first. MAINTENANCE On Electronic Vehicle Information SCHEDULE – GASOLINE Center (EVIC) equipped vehicles “Oil • Rotate the tires at the first sign of ENGINE Change Required” will be displayed irregular wear. in the EVIC and a single chime will The Scheduled Maintenance services Your authorized dealer will reset the sound, indicating that an oil change is listed in this manual must be done at oil change indicator message after necessary. the times or mileages specified to pro- completing the scheduled oil change. tect your vehicle warranty and ensure NOTE: the best vehicle performance and reli- • The oil change indicator message CAUTION! ability. More frequent maintenance will not monitor the time since the may be needed for vehicles in severe Failure to perform the required last oil change. Change your ve- operating conditions, such as dusty ar- maintenance items may result in hicles oil if it has been 12 months eas and very short trip driving. Inspec- damage to the vehicle. since your last oil change even if tion and service should also be done the oil change indicator message anytime a malfunction is suspected. is NOT illuminated. Thousands Of Kilometers 24 48 72 96 120 144 168 192 Months 12 24 36 48 60 72 84 96 Change engine oil and replace oil filter (*). Inspect and replace PCV valve if necessary. • Check battery charge status and possibly recharge. •• •••••• Check tire condition/wear and adjust pressure, if necessary. • • ••••••

306 Thousands Of Kilometers 24 48 72 96 120 144 168 192 Months 12 24 36 48 60 72 84 96 Check operation of lighting system (headlamps, direction indicators, hazard warning lights, luggage compartment, passen- •••••••• ger compartment, glove compartment, instrument panel warning lights, etc.). Check operation of windscreen washer system and adjust jets •••••••• if necessary. Check windshield/rear window wiper blade position/wear. • • •••••• Check cleanliness of hood and tailgate locks and cleanliness •••••••• and lubrication of linkages. Visually inspect condition of: exterior bodywork, underbody protection, pipes and hoses (exhaust - fuel system - brakes), •••••••• rubber elements (boots, sleeves, bushes, etc.). Check conditions and wear of front disc brake pads. • • •••••• Check conditions and wear of rear disc brake pads. • • •••••• Check and, if necessary, top up fluid levels (brakes, windshield •••••••• washer, battery, engine coolant, etc.). Visually inspect the condition of accessory drive belt/s. • • Adjust parking brake shoes as necessary. • • • • Check exhaust gas emissions. • • •••••• Check engine management system operation (via diagnostic socket). •••••••• Replace spark plugs (**). • • Replace air filter cartridge. • • • • Change the automatic transmission fluid and filter (***) • Change brake fluid (or every 24 months). • •

307 Thousands Of Kilometers 24 48 72 96 120 144 168 192 Months 12 24 36 48 60 72 84 96 Replace pollen filter. •• •••••• Inspect the rear axle fluid (#) • • Inspect the front axle fluid – All Wheel Drive Models Only (#). • • Inspect the transfer case fluid – All Wheel Drive Models Only (##). •• (*) The oil and oil filter replacement short (less than 7-8 km) and repeated • tire inflation pressure and must be carried out when indicated by journeys, or frequent trailer or cara- condition; a warning light or message on the van towing. • operation of lighting system (head- instrument panel, or in any case every (##) Change the transfer case fluid at lights, direction indicators, hazard 12 months. 96 thousands of kilometers or 48 warning lights, etc.); (**) The spark plug change in Km months and 192 thousands of kilome- • operation of windshield washer/ based only monthly intervals do not ters or 96 months if using your vehicle wiper system and positioning/wear apply. for any of the following: city driving, of windshield/rear window wiper short (less than 7-8 km) and repeated (***) Change the automatic transmis- blades. sion fluid and filter(s) at 96 thou- journeys, or frequent trailer or cara- Every 3,000 km, check and top up, if sands of kilometers or 48 months if van towing. required, the engine oil level and au- using your vehicle for any of the fol- Periodic Checks tomatic transmission fluid level (four- lowing: city driving, short (less than Every 1,000 km or before long jour- speed automatic only). 7-8 km) and repeated journeys, or neys, check and, if necessary, restore: frequent trailer or caravan towing. Heavy-Duty Use Of The Car • engine coolant; (#) Change the front and rear axle If the car is used mainly under one of fluid at 72 thousands of km or 36 • brake fluid; the following conditions: months and 144 thousands of km or • power steering fluid; • towing a trailer or caravan; 72 months if using your vehicle for any of the following: city driving, • windshield washer fluid level; • dusty roads; • power steering fluid; 308 • short, repeated journeys (less than • check and, if necessary, replace pol- The vehicle is equipped with an en- 7-8 km) at sub-zero outside len filter; gine oil change indicator system. The temperatures; “Oil Change Required” message will • check and, if necessary, replace air flash in the EVIC display for approxi- • engine often idling or driving long cleaner filter. mately 10 seconds after a single chime distances at low speeds or long pe- has sounded to indicate the next riods of idleness. MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE – DIESEL scheduled oil change interval. The en- You should perform the following in- ENGINE gine oil change indicator system is spections more frequently than shown duty cycle based, which means the on the Scheduled Servicing Plan: To help you have the best driving engine oil change interval may fluctu- experience possible, the manufacturer ate dependent upon your personal • check front disc brake pad condi- has identified the specific vehicle driving style. tions and wear; maintenance service intervals that are Unless reset, this message will con- • check cleanliness of hood and trunk required to keep your vehicle operat- tinue to display each time you turn the locks, cleanliness and lubrication of ing properly and safely. ignition switch to the ON/RUN posi- linkage; The manufacturer recommends that tion. To turn off the message tempo- • visually inspect conditions of: en- these maintenance intervals be per- rarily, press and release the Menu but- gine, transmission, pipes and hoses formed at your selling dealer. The ton. (exhaust - fuel system - brakes) and technicians at your dealership know NOTE: rubber elements (boots - sleeves - your vehicle best, and have access to bushes - etc.); factory trained information, genuine • Under no circumstances should LANCIA parts, and specially designed oil change intervals exceed • check battery charge and battery electronic and mechanical tools that 20,000 km or 12 months, which- fluid level (electrolyte); can help prevent future costly repairs. ever comes first. • visually inspect condition of the ac- The maintenance intervals shown • Rotate the tires at the first sign of cessory drive belts; should be performed as indicated in irregular wear • check and, if necessary, change en- this section. gine oil and replace oil filter;

309 CAUTION! Failure to perform the required maintenance items may result in damage to the vehicle.

Thousands Of Kilometers 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160 Months 12 24 36 48 60 72 84 96 Change engine oil and replace oil filter (*). Check battery charge status and possibly recharge. •••••••• Check tire condition/wear and adjust pressure, if necessary. • • • • • • • • Check operation of lighting system (headlamps, direction indicators, hazard warning lights, luggage compartment, passen- •••••••• ger compartment, glove compartment, instrument panel warning lights, etc.). Check operation of windscreen washer system and adjust jets •••••••• if necessary. Check windshield/rear window wiper blade position/wear. • • • • • • • • Check cleanliness of hood and tailgate locks and cleanliness •••••••• and lubrication of linkages. Visually inspect condition of: exterior bodywork, underbody protection, pipes and hoses (exhaust - fuel system - brakes), •••••••• rubber elements (boots, sleeves, bushes, etc.). Check conditions and wear of front disc brake pads. •••••••• Check conditions and wear of rear disc brake pads. •••••••• Check and, if necessary, top up fluid levels (brakes, windshield •••••••• washer, battery, engine coolant, etc.).

310 Thousands Of Kilometers 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160 Months 12 24 36 48 60 72 84 96 Visually inspect the condition of accessory drive belt/s. • Adjust parking brake shoes as necessary. • • • • Check exhaust gas emissions. •••••••• Check engine management system operation (via diagnostic •••••••• socket). Change the automatic transmission fluid and filter (**). • Replace fuel filter. • • • • Replace accessory drive belt/s. • Replace air filter cartridge. • • • • Inspect the rear axle fluid (#) • • Change brake fluid (or every 24 months). • • Replace pollen filter. •••••••• (*) The oil and oil filter replacement (#) Change the rear axle fluid at • brake fluid; must be carried out when indicated by 72 thousands of km or 36 months and • power steering fluid; a warning light or message on the 144 thousands of km or 72 months if instrument panel, or in any case every using your vehicle for any of the fol- • windshield washer fluid level; 12 months. lowing: city driving, short (less than • power steering fluid; (**) Change the automatic transmis- 7-8 km) and repeated journeys, or frequent trailer or caravan towing. • tire inflation pressure and sion fluid and filter(s) at 100 thou- condition; sands of kilometers or 60 months if Periodic Checks using your vehicle for any of the fol- • operation of lighting system (head- Every 1,000 km or before long jour- lowing: city driving, short (less than lights, direction indicators, hazard neys, check and, if necessary, restore: 7-8 km) and repeated journeys, or warning lights, etc.); frequent trailer or caravan towing. • engine coolant;

311 • operation of windshield washer/ You should perform the following in- wiper system and positioning/wear spections more frequently than shown of windshield/rear window wiper on the Scheduled Servicing Plan: blades. • check front disc brake pad condi- Every 3,000 km, check and top up, if tions and wear; required, the engine oil level and au- • check cleanliness of hood and trunk tomatic transmission fluid level (four- locks, cleanliness and lubrication of speed automatic only). linkage; Heavy-Duty Use Of The Car • visually inspect conditions of: en- If the car is used mainly under one of gine, transmission, pipes and hoses the following conditions: (exhaust - fuel system - brakes) and • towing a trailer or caravan; rubber elements (boots - sleeves - bushes - etc.); • dusty roads; • check battery charge and battery • short, repeated journeys (less than fluid level (electrolyte); 7-8 km) at sub-zero outside temperatures; • visually inspect condition of the accessory drive belts; • engine often idling or driving long distances at low speeds or long pe- • check and, if necessary, change en- riods of idleness. gine oil and replace oil filter; • check and, if necessary, replace pollen filter; • check and, if necessary, replace air cleaner filter.

312 9

INDEX

313 About Your Brakes ...... 216 Alterations/Modifications, Vehicle ...7 Auto Up Power Windows ...... 26 ABS (Anti-Lock Brake System). . .217 Antifreeze Axle Fluid ...... 301 Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) (Engine Coolant) . . .280, 281, 299 Axle Lubrication (Axle Fluid). . . .301 (Cruise Control) ...... 125 Disposal ...... 282 Adding Engine Coolant Anti-Lock Brake System Battery ...... 274 (Antifreeze) ...... 281 (ABS) ...... 217, 219 Keyless Transmitter Replacement Adding Fuel ...... 239 Anti-Lock Warning Light ...... 164 (RKE) ...... 19 Adding Washer Fluid ...... 277 Assist, Hill Start...... 222 Location ...... 274 Additives, Fuel...... 238 Auto Down Power Windows ...... 26 Belts, Seat ...... 31, 60 Adjustable Pedals ...... 122 Automatic Dimming Mirror ...... 70 Body Mechanism Lubrication . . . .276 Airbag ...... 38, 43 Automatic Door Locks ...... 22 Brake Assist System ...... 219 Airbag Deployment ...... 44 Automatic Headlights ...... 112 Brake Control System, Airbag Light ...... 42, 45, 60, 162 Automatic Oil Change Indicator . .171 Electronic ...... 219 Airbag Maintenance ...... 45 Automatic Temperature Control Brake Fluid ...... 301 Airbag, Side ...... 40, 41, 43 (ATC) ...... 190 Brake, Parking...... 216 Airbag, Window Automatic Transmission . . .202, 207, Brakes ...... 283 (Side Curtain)...... 40, 41, 43 284, 285, 286 Brake System...... 283 Air Cleaner, Engine (Engine Air Adding Fluid .....285, 286, 301 Anti-Lock (ABS) ...... 217 Cleaner Filter) ...... 274 Autostick ...... 211 Fluid Check ...... 283, 301 Air Conditioner Maintenance . . . .275 Fluid and Filter Changes . .285, 286 Master Cylinder ...... 283 Air Conditioning Filter.....192, 276 Fluid Change ...... 285, 286 Parking ...... 216 Air Conditioning Refrigerant . . . .275 Fluid Level Check ...... 285 Warning Light ...... 163 Air Conditioning System . . .190, 275 Fluid Type ...... 301 Brake/Transmission Interlock . . . .202 Air Pressure, Tires ...... 225 Gear Ranges ...... 203 Break-In Recommendations, New Alarm Light ...... 164 Special Additives ...... 285 Vehicle ...... 58 Alarm System Automatic Transmission Limp Home Brightness, Interior Lights ...... 117 (Security Alarm) ...... 15, 16 Mode ...... 206 Bulb Replacement ...... 296, 297 All Wheel Drive (AWD) . . . .213, 286 Autostick ...... 211 Bulbs, Light...... 61, 296 Auto Unlock, Doors ...... 22

314 Camera, Rear ...... 142 Universal Consumer Interface Defroster, Windshield ...... 60, 189 Capacities, Fluid ...... 299 (UCI) ...... 184 Delay (Intermittent) Wipers .....118 Caps, Filler Conserving Fuel ...... 172 Diagnostic System, Onboard.....271 Radiator (Coolant Pressure) . .281 Console, Floor ...... 150 Diesel Fuel ...... 238 Carbon Monoxide Warning ...... 59 Console, Overhead ...... 143 Dimmer Switch, Headlight...... 116 Cargo Area Features ...... 152 Coolant Pressure Cap Dipsticks Cargo Compartment ...... 152 (Radiator Cap) ...... 281 Oil (Engine) ...... 272 Cellular Phone ...... 186 Cooling System ...... 279 Disabled Vehicle Towing ...... 264 Chains, Tire ...... 231 Adding Coolant (Antifreeze) . .281 Disposal Check Engine Light (Malfunction Coolant Capacity ...... 299 Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) . .282 Indicator Light) ...... 162 Coolant Level ...... 280, 282 Engine Oil ...... 273 Checking Your Vehicle For Safety . .59 Disposal of Used Coolant . . . .282 Door Locks ...... 20 Checks, Safety ...... 59 Drain, Flush, and Refill .....280 Door Locks, Automatic ...... 22 Child Restraint ...... 47 Inspection ...... 282 Driving Child Safety Locks ...... 22 Points to Remember ...... 282 Through Flowing, Rising, or Child Seat...... 50 Pressure Cap ...... 281 Shallow Standing Water .....214 Driving to Achieve Maximum Fuel Clean Air Gasoline ...... 238 Radiator Cap ...... 281 Economy ...... 172 Cleaning Selection of Coolant Wheels ...... 288 (Antifreeze) ...... 280, 299, 300 Windshield Wiper Blades . . . .277 Corrosion Protection ...... 286 Electrical Power Outlets ...... 147 Climate Control ...... 186 Cruise Control (Speed Control). . .125 Electric Rear Window Defrost. . . .153 Clock ...... 184 Cupholders ...... 149, 289 Electric Remote Mirrors...... 71 Coin Holder ...... 150 Electronic Brake Control System . .219 Cold Weather Operation ...... 198 Data Recorder, Event ...... 46 Anti-Lock Brake System .....219 Compact Disc (CD) Maintenance . .186 Daytime Brightness, Interior Brake Assist System ...... 219 Compact Spare Tire ...... 228 Lights ...... 117 Traction Control System .....219 Electronic Speed Control Computer, Trip/Travel...... 173 Deck Lid, Emergency Release.....28 (Cruise Control) ...... 123, 125 Connector Deck Lid, Power Release ...... 27 UCI ...... 184 Defroster, Rear Window...... 153

315 Electronic Stability Control Oil Selection .....272, 273, 299 Fluid Capacities ...... 299 (ESC) ...... 220 Oil Synthetic ...... 273 Fluid Leaks...... 62 Electronic Vehicle Information Center Overheating ...... 252 Fluid Level Checks ...... 286 (EVIC) ...... 142, 165 Starting ...... 197 Automatic Transmission .....285 Emergency Deck Lid Release .....28 Temperature Gauge ...... 165 Brake ...... 283 Emergency, In Case of Enhanced Accident Response Cooling System ...... 280 Freeing Vehicle When Stuck . .261 Feature ...... 44 Engine Oil ...... 272 Hazard Warning Flasher .....252 Entry System, Illuminated ...... 18 Transfer Case ...... 286 Jump Starting ...... 259 Euro Twin Clutch Transmission Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine Overheating ...... 252 Fluid Type ...... 284 Parts...... 300 Towing ...... 264 Event Data Recorder...... 46 Fog Lights ...... 160 Emergency Trunk Release ...... 28 Exhaust Gas Caution ...... 59 Fog Lights, Rear ...... 115 Engine Exhaust System ...... 59, 278 Folding Rear Seat...... 108 Air Cleaner ...... 274 Exterior Folding Mirrors ...... 70 Forward Collision Warning . .136, 168 Break-In Recommendations . . .58 Exterior Lighting ...... 112 Freeing A Stuck Vehicle...... 261 Compartment ...... 269, 270 Exterior Lights ...... 61 Fuel ...... 236, 238 Compartment Identification ...... 269, 270 Additives ...... 238 Filler Location Fuel ...... 162 Conserving ...... 172 Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . .280, 300 Filters Cooling ...... 279 Diesel ...... 238 Air Cleaner ...... 274 Filler Door (Gas Cap) ...... 162 Exhaust Gas Caution ...... 59 Air Conditioning ...... 192, 276 Fails to Start ...... 198 Gasoline ...... 236 Engine Oil ...... 273, 300 Gauge ...... 162 Flooded, Starting ...... 198 Flashers Light ...... 168 Fuel Requirements ...... 236 Hazard Warning ...... 252 Materials Added ...... 238 Jump Starting ...... 259 Turn Signal ...... 61, 115, 160 Octane Rating ...... 236, 300 Oil ...... 272, 299, 300 Flash-To-Pass ...... 116 Saver Mode ...... 172 Oil Change Interval . . . .171, 272 Flooded Engine Starting ...... 198 Specifications ...... 300 Oil Disposal ...... 273 Floor Console ...... 150 Tank Capacity ...... 299 Oil Filter ...... 273 Fluid, Brake ...... 301

316 Fuel Optimizer...... 172 High Beam/Low Beam Select Intermittent Wipers (Delay Fuel Saver...... 172 Switch ...... 116 Wipers) ...... 118 Fuses ...... 289, 290 Lights On Reminder ...... 114 Intervention Regeneration On With Wipers ...... 113 Strategy ...... 278 Gasoline, Clean Air...... 238 Passing ...... 116 Introduction ...... 4 Gasoline (Fuel) ...... 236 Switch ...... 112 Conserving ...... 172 Time Delay ...... 113 Jump Starting ...... 259 Gauges Washers ...... 120 Coolant Temperature ...... 165 Headlight Washers ...... 120, 277 Key-In Reminder ...... 13 Fuel ...... 162 Head Restraints ...... 107 Keyless Enter-N-Go ...... 23, 197 Speedometer ...... 162 Head Rests ...... 107 Keyless Entry System ...... 18 Tachometer ...... 160 Heated Mirrors ...... 72 Keyless Go ...... 12 Gear Ranges...... 203, 207 High Beam/Low Beam Select Key, Programming ...... 14 Gear Select Lever Override .....263 (Dimmer) Switch ...... 116 Key, Replacement...... 14 General Information .....14, 20, 95 Hill Start Assist ...... 222 Keys ...... 12 General Maintenance ...... 271 Holder, Coin ...... 150 Key, Sentry (Immobilizer) ...... 14 Glass Cleaning ...... 289 Kicker Sound System ...... 184 Gross Axle Weight Rating...... 241 Ignition Knee Bolster ...... 38 Gross Vehicle Weight Rating.....240 Key ...... 12 Illuminated Entry...... 18 Lane Change and Turn Signals . . .115 Hazard Immobilizer (Sentry Key) ...... 14 Lane Change Assist ...... 115 Driving Through Flowing, Rising, or Infant Restraint ...... 47 Lap/Shoulder Belts...... 31 Shallow Standing Water .....214 Information Center, Vehicle .....165 Latches ...... 61 Hazard Warning Flasher ...... 252 Instrument Cluster ...... 159, 160 Latch Plate ...... 31 Headlights ...... 297 Instrument Panel and Controls . . .158 Lead Free Gasoline...... 236 Automatic ...... 112 Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning . .289 Leaks, Fluid ...... 62 Cleaning ...... 288 Interior Appearance Care...... 288 Life of Tires ...... 230 Delay ...... 113 Interior Lights ...... 116 Light Bulbs ...... 61, 296 Lights...... 61, 112

317 Airbag ...... 42, 45, 60, 162 Malfunction Indicator Low Tire Pressure System ...... 232 Alarm ...... 164 (Check Engine) ...... 162 Lubrication, Body ...... 276 Anti-Lock ...... 164 Map Reading ...... 116 Lug Nuts ...... 253 Automatic Headlights ...... 112 Parade Mode Brake Assist Warning ...... 223 (Daytime Brightness) ...... 117 Maintenance Free Battery ...... 274 Brake Warning ...... 163 Passing ...... 116 Maintenance, General ...... 271 Bulb Replacement .....296, 297 Reading ...... 116 Maintenance Procedures ...... 271 Dimmer Switch, Seat Belt Reminder ...... 165 Maintenance Schedule .....306, 309 Headlight ...... 115, 116 Security Alarm (Theft Alarm) . .164 Malfunction Indicator Light Electronic Stability Program (ESP) Service ...... 296, 297 (Check Engine) ...... 162 Indicator ...... 223 Service Engine Soon Master Cylinder (Brakes)...... 283 Exterior ...... 61 (Malfunction Indicator) .....162 Memory Feature (Memory Seat) . .109 Fog ...... 160 SmartBeams ...... 113 Memory Seat ...... 109 Hazard Warning Flasher .....252 Theft Alarm (Security Alarm) . .164 Memory Seats and Radio ...... 109 Headlights ...... 112, 297 Tire Pressure Monitoring Methanol ...... 237 (TPMS) ...... 161, 232 Headlights On Reminder . . . .114 Methanol Fuel ...... 237 Traction Control ...... 223 Headlights On With Wipers . . .113 Mini-Trip Computer ...... 173 Turn Signal ...... 61, 115 Headlight Switch ...... 112 Mirrors...... 70 Vanity Mirror ...... 72 High Beam ...... 116 Automatic Dimming ...... 70 Wait to Start ...... 168 High Beam Indicator ...... 160 Electric Powered ...... 71 Warning (Instrument Cluster High Beam/Low Beam Select . .116 Electric Remote ...... 71 Description) ...... 160 Illuminated Entry ...... 18 Exterior Folding ...... 70 Load Leveling System ...... 154 Instrument Cluster ...... 112 Heated ...... 72 Locks...... 20 Intensity Control ...... 117 Outside ...... 70 Automatic Door ...... 22 Interior ...... 116 Vanity ...... 72 Auto Unlock ...... 22 License ...... 298 Mode Child Protection ...... 22 Lights On Reminder ...... 114 Fuel Saver ...... 172 Door ...... 20 Low Fuel ...... 168 Modifications/Alterations, Vehicle ...7 Power Door ...... 21 Monitor, Tire Pressure System . . .232 318 Multi-Function Control Lever. . . .115 Overdrive ...... 211 Pretensioners Overdrive OFF Switch...... 211 Seat Belts ...... 35 Navigation System Overhead Console...... 143 Programming Transmitters (Uconnect® gps) ...... 142, 183 Overheating, Engine ...... 165, 252 (Remote Keyless Entry) ...... 18 New Vehicle Break-In Period .....58 Owner's Manual (Operator Manual)...6 Radial Ply Tires ...... 226 Radiator Cap (Coolant Pressure Occupant Restraints .....28, 41, 44 Paint Care...... 286 Cap) ...... 281 Occupant Restraints Parking Brake ...... 216 Radio Operation...... 186 (Sedan) ...... 40, 41, 43 ParkSense System, Rear ...... 137 Octane Rating, Gasoline Radio Remote Controls ...... 185 Passing Light...... 116 (Fuel) ...... 236, 300 Radio (Sound Systems) ...... 183 Pedals, Adjustable ...... 122 Odometer ...... 160 Rain Sensitive Wiper System . . . .119 Pets ...... 58 Oil Change Indicator ...... 160, 171 Rear Axle (Differential) ...... 286 Power Oil Change Indicator, Reset. .160, 171 Deck Lid Release ...... 27 Rear Camera ...... 142 Oil, Engine ...... 272, 300 Distribution Center Rear Cupholder ...... 150 Capacity ...... 299 (Fuses) ...... 290, 292 Rear Fog Lights ...... 115 Change Interval ...... 171, 272 Door Locks ...... 21 Rear ParkSense System ...... 137 Diesel ...... 273 Mirrors ...... 71 Rear Seat, Folding ...... 108 Dipstick ...... 272 Outlet (Auxiliary Electrical Rear Window Defroster ...... 153 Filter ...... 273, 300 Outlet) ...... 147 Rear Window Features ...... 153 Materials Added to ...... 273 Seats ...... 103 Recorder, Event Data ...... 46 Recommendation . .272, 273, 299 Steering ...... 215 Recreational Towing ...... 250 Synthetic ...... 273 Sunroof ...... 144 Refrigerant ...... 275 Viscosity ...... 299 Tilt/Telescoping Steering Reminder, Lights On...... 114 Oil Filter, Selection ...... 273 Column ...... 120 Reminder, Seat Belt ...... 37 Onboard Diagnostic System .....271 Windows ...... 25 Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) .....18 Operating Precautions...... 271 Power Steering Fluid...... 301 Remote Sound System (Radio) Operator Manual (Owner's Manual)...6 Pregnant Women and Seat Belts . . .38 Controls ...... 185 Outside Rearview Mirrors ...... 70 Remote Trunk Release...... 27

319 Replacement Bulbs ...... 296 Untwisting Procedure ...... 33 Snow Chains (Tire Chains) .....231 Replacement Keys ...... 14 Seats ...... 103 Snow Tires ...... 227 Replacement Parts ...... 271 Adjustment ...... 103 Sound System Replacement Tires ...... 230 Easy Entry ...... 111 Kicker ...... 184 Resetting Oil Change Head Restraints ...... 107 Sound Systems...... 183 Indicator ...... 160, 171 Height Adjustment ...... 103 Sound Systems (Radio) ...... 183 Restraint, Head ...... 107 Memory ...... 109 Spare Tire ...... 228, 229 Restraints, Child ...... 47 Power ...... 103 Spark Plugs...... 300 Restraints, Occupant...... 28 Rear Folding ...... 108 Specifications Rocking Vehicle When Stuck . . . .261 Seatback Release ...... 108 Fuel (Gasoline) ...... 236, 300 Rotation, Tires ...... 232 Tilting ...... 103 Oil ...... 273, 300 Selection of Coolant Speed Control Safety Checks Inside Vehicle .....60 (Antifreeze) ...... 280, 300 (Cruise Control) ...... 123, 125 Safety Checks Outside Vehicle ....61 Selection of Oil ...... 273 Speedometer ...... 162 Safety, Exhaust Gas ...... 59 Sentry Key (Immobilizer) ...... 14 Starting ...... 197 Safety Tips ...... 59 Sentry Key Programming ...... 14 Cold Weather ...... 198 Schedule, Maintenance . . . .306, 309 Sentry Key Replacement ...... 14 Engine Fails to Start ...... 198 Seat Belt Maintenance ...... 289 Service Engine Soon Light Starting and Operating ...... 197 Seat Belt Reminder...... 37 (Malfunction Indicator) ...... 162 Starting Procedures ...... 197 Seat Belts...... 28, 31, 60 Setting the Clock ...... 184 Steering Adjustable Upper Shoulder Shifting ...... 201 Column Controls ...... 115 Anchorage ...... 33 Automatic Transmission .....201 Column Lock ...... 120 And Pregnant Women ...... 38 Shift Lever Override ...... 263 Power ...... 215 Child Restraint ...... 47 Shoulder Belts ...... 31 Tilt Column ...... 120 Front Seat ...... 31 Shoulder Belt Upper Anchorage . . .33 Wheel, Heated ...... 121 Inspection ...... 60 Side Airbag ...... 43 Wheel, Tilt ...... 120 Operating Instructions ...... 31 Side View Mirror Adjustment .....70 Steering Wheel Audio Controls . . .185 Steering Wheel Mounted Sound Pretensioners ...... 35 Signals, Turn ...... 61, 115, 160 System Controls ...... 185 Rear Seat ...... 31 SmartBeams ...... 113 320 Storage...... 296 Life of Tires ...... 230 Tips ...... 248 Storage, Vehicle ...... 192, 296 Pressure Monitor System Trailer and Tongue Weight . . .244 Storing Your Vehicle ...... 296 (TPMS) ...... 232 Wiring ...... 246 Stuck, Freeing ...... 261 Pressure Warning Light .....161 Trailer Towing Guide ...... 243 Sunglasses Storage ...... 144 Radial ...... 226 Trailer Weight ...... 243 Sun Roof...... 144 Replacement ...... 230 Transfer Case ...... 286 Supplemental Restraint System - Rotation ...... 232 Fluid ...... 286 Airbag ...... 38 Safety ...... 224 Transmission ...... 284 Synthetic Engine Oil ...... 273 Snow Tires ...... 227 Automatic ...... 202, 207, 284 System, Navigation Spinning ...... 229 Fluid ...... 284, 301 (Uconnect® gps)...... 183 Trailer Towing ...... 245 Shifting ...... 201 Tread Wear Indicators ...... 230 Transmitter Battery Service Tachometer ...... 160 Tongue Weight/Trailer Weight . . .244 (Remote Keyless Entry) ...... 19 Telescoping Steering Column . . . .120 Towing ...... 240 Transmitter Programming Temperature Control, Automatic Behind a Motorhome ...... 250 (Remote Keyless Entry) ...... 18 (ATC) ...... 190 Disabled Vehicle ...... 264 Transmitter, Remote Keyless Entry Temperature Gauge, Engine Guide ...... 243 (RKE)...... 18 Coolant ...... 165, 252 Recreational ...... 250 Transporting Pets...... 58 Tilt Steering Column...... 120 Weight ...... 243 Tread Wear Indicators ...... 230 Time Delay, Headlight...... 113 Towing Eyes ...... 262 Trip Odometer ...... 160 Tires...... 61, 224 Towing Vehicle Behind a Trunk Lid (Deck Lid) ...... 27, 28 Aging (Life of Tires) ...... 230 Motorhome ...... 250 Trunk Release, Emergency...... 28 Air Pressure ...... 224 Traction ...... 213 Trunk Release Remote Control ....27 Chains ...... 231 Traction Control...... 219 Turn Signals ...... 115, 160 Compact Spare ...... 228 Trailer Towing ...... 240 General Information ...... 224 Cooling System Tips ...... 249 UCI Connector...... 184 High Speed ...... 226 Hitches ...... 249 Underhood Fuses ...... 290 Inflation Pressures ...... 225 Minimum Requirements .....244 Universal Child Seat Position Chart ...... 50

321 Universal Consumer Interface (UCI) Windshield Wiper Blades ...... 277 Connector ...... 184 Windshield Wipers ...... 117 Untwisting Procedure, Seat Belt . . .33 Wiper Blade Replacement ...... 277 Wipers, Intermittent ...... 118 Vanity Mirrors ...... 72 Wipers, Rain Sensitive...... 119 Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) ...... 7 Vehicle Modifications/Alterations ...7 Vehicle Storage...... 192, 296

Wait to Start Light ...... 168 Warning Flasher, Hazard ...... 252 Warning Lights (Instrument Cluster Description) ...... 160 Warnings and Cautions ...... 7 Washer Adding Fluid ...... 277 Washers, Headlight...... 120 Washers, Windshield ...... 118, 277 Water Driving Through ...... 214 Wheel and Wheel Trim ...... 288 Wheel and Wheel Trim Care.....288 Wind Buffeting ...... 27, 146 Window Fogging ...... 192 Windows...... 25 Power ...... 25 Windshield Defroster ...... 60 Windshield Washers...... 117, 118

322 Notes Notes

Fiat Group Automobiles S.p.A. - Parts & Services - Technical Services - Service Engineering Largo Senatore G. Agnelli, 3 - 10040 Volvera - Torino (Italia) Print n. 530.02.312 - 09/2013 - Edition 1 WHY CHOOSE GENUINE PARTS

Owner Handbook